Command Reference

Alteon OS 21.0
Alteon Application Switch
Part Number: 315393-E, October 2003

TM

4655 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 Phone 1-800-4Nortel www.nortelnetworks.com

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Copyright 2003 Nortel Networks, Inc.,4655 Great America Parkway, Santa Clara, California 95054, USA. All rights reserved. Part Number: 315393-E. This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Nortel Networks, Inc. Documentation is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including any kind of implied or express warranty of noninfringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. U.S. Government End Users: This document is provided with a “commercial item” as defined by FAR 2.101 (Oct 1995) and contains “commercial technical data” and “commercial software documentation” as those terms are used in FAR 12.211-12.212 (Oct 1995). Government End Users are authorized to use this documentation only in accordance with those rights and restrictions set forth herein, consistent with FAR 12.211- 12.212 (Oct 1995), DFARS 227.7202 (JUN 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995). Nortel Networks, Inc. reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time, and without notice. Nortel Networks, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Nortel Networks, Inc. The use and purchase of this product does not convey a license under any patent rights, trademark rights, or any other intellectual property rights of Nortel Networks, Inc. Alteon OS is the trademarks of Nortel Networks, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Cisco® and EtherChannel® are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies.

2
315393-E, October 2003

Contents
Preface 15 Who Should Use This Book 15 How This Book Is Organized 15 Related Documentation 16 Typographic Conventions 17 How to Get Help 18 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 19 Connecting to the Switch 20 Establishing a Console Connection 20 Requirements 20 Procedure 20 Establishing a Telnet Connection 21 Using a BOOTP Server 21 Running Telnet 21 Establishing an SSH Connection 22 Running SSH 22 Accessing the Switch 23 CLI Versus Setup 25 Command Line History and Editing 25 Idle Timeout 25 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 27 Using the Setup Utility 27 Information Needed For Setup 27 Starting Setup When You Log In 28 Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually 29 Stopping Setup 29 Restarting Setup 29 Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration 29
3
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Setup Part 2: Port Configuration 31 Setup Part 3: VLANs 33 Setup Part 4: IP Configuration 35 IP Interfaces 35 Default Gateways 36 IP Routing 37 Setup Part 5: Final Steps 38 Optional Setup for SNMP Support 39 Optional Setup for Telnet Support 39 Setting Passwords 40 Changing the Default Administrator Password 40 Changing the Default User Password 42 Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password 43 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 45 The Main Menu 45 Menu Summary 46 Global Commands 47 Command Line History and Editing 49 Command Line Interface Shortcuts 50 Command Stacking 50 Command Abbreviation 50 Tab Completion 50 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 51 Information Menu 51 System Information Menu 53 General System Information 54 Show Last 30 Syslog Messages 55 Management Port Information 56 SONMP Information 56 System Information Dump 58 Layer 2 Information Menu 59 Layer 2 FDB Information 60 Show All FDB Information 61 Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database 61 Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information 62 Trunk Group Information 64

4

„

Contents
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

VLAN Information 64 Layer2 Dump Information 65 Layer3 Information Menu 66 IP Routing Information 67 Show All IP Route Information 68 Type Parameters 68 Tag Parameters 69 ARP Information Menu 69 Show All ARP Entry Information 71 ARP Address List Information 72 BGP Information Menu 72 BGP Peer information 73 BGP Summary information 73 Dump BGP Information 74 OSPF Information Menu 74 OSPF General Information 76 OSPF Interface Information 76 OSPF Database Information 77 OSPF Information Route Codes 78 IP Information 79 VRRP Information 79 Layer3 Dump Information 81 Layer 4 Information Menu 82 Session Table Information 84 Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications 86 Session dump information in Alteon OS 87 Show All Layer 4 Information 89 Link Status Information 90 Port Information 91 Bandwidth Management Information 92 Security Information 92 Software Enabled Keys 93 Information Dump 93 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 95 Statistics Menu 95 Port Statistics Menu 97 Bridging Statistics 98

Contents
315393-E, October 2003

„

5

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Ethernet Statistics 99 Interface Statistics 102 Interface Protocol Statistics 104 Link Statistics 105 RMON Statistics 106 Layer 2 Statistics Menu 109 FDB Statistics 109 Layer 3 Statistics Menu 110 OSPF Statistics Menu 111 OSPF Global Statistics 112 IP Statistics 116 Route Statistics 118 ARP statistics 119 VRRP Statistics 120 DNS Statistics 121 ICMP Statistics 121 Interface Statistics 123 TCP Statistics 125 UDP Statistics 126 Load Balancing Statistics Menu 127 Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu 129 SP Real Server Statistics 130 Real Server SLB Statistics 131 Per Service Octet Counters 132 Real Server Group Statistics 133 Virtual Server SLB Statistics 133 Filter SLB Statistics 134 Global SLB Statistics Menu 134 Real Server Global SLB Statistics 135 Real Server Group Global SLB Statistics 135 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics 135 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics 136 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu 137 Layer7 Redirection Statistics 137 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics 138 Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics 139 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics 141 File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu 142

6

„

Contents
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics 142 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics 143 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics 143 FTP SLB Statistics Dump 144 RTSP SLB Statistics 145 DNS SLB Statistics 145 WAP SLB Statistics 147 SLB Maintenance Statistics 149 Clearing the SLB Statistics 150 BWM Statistics Menu 152 BWM Switch Processor Statistics 153 BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu 153 BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics 154 BWM Contract Statistics 154 BWM Contract Rate Statistics 155 BWM History Statistics 156 BWM Maintenance Statistics 158 Management Processor Statistics 158 MP Packet Statistics 159 TCP Statistics 161 UCB Statistics 161 MP-Specific SFD Statistics 162 CPU Statistics 162 SP Specific Statistics 162 SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics 163 Security Statistics 164 DOS Attack Statistics Menu 165 Types of DOS Attacks 165 IP Access Control List Statistics 166 UDP Blast Statistics 166 UDP Blast Dump Statistics 167 UDP Pattern Match Statistics 167 Rate Limiting Statistics 168 Dump Statistics for Security 169 SNMP Statistics 170 Management Port Statistics 173 Dump Statistics 174

Contents
315393-E, October 2003

„

7

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 175 Configuration Menu 175 Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes 176 Viewing Pending Changes 177 Applying Pending Changes 177 Saving the Configuration 177 System Configuration 179 System Host Log Configuration 181 Seven Levels of Severity 182 Management Port Configuration Menu 182 Management Port Link Menu 185 SSH Server Configuration Menu 185 RADIUS Server Configuration 187 NTP Server Configuration 188 SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration 189 System SNMP Configuration 190 System Health Check Configuration Menu 192 System Access Control Configuration 193 Management Networks Menu 194 User Access Control Menu 195 Port Configuration 197 Alteon Application Switch 2000 Series 197 Fast Ethernet Ports 197 SFP GBIC Ports 197 Port Link Configuration 199 Alteon Application Switch 3000 Series 201 Port Configuration on Alteon Application Switch 3408 201 Single-Mode ports 202 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu 203 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu 206 Dual-Mode Ports 207 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration 208 Dual-Mode Fiber Optic Port Link Configuration Menu 210 Temporarily Disabling a Port 210 Port Mirroring Menu 211 Port-Mirroring Menu 211 Bandwidth Management Configuration 212

8

„

Contents
315393-E, October 2003

250 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu 250 Border Gateway Protocol Configuration 251 BGP Peer Configuration Menu 253 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu 255 BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu 256 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu 257 Domain Name System Configuration Menu 258 Contents 315393-E.0 Command Reference Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration 214 Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration 215 Bandwidth Management Current Configuration 216 Layer 2 Configuration Menu 217 Spanning Tree Group Configuration 218 Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration 220 Spanning Tree Port Configuration 221 Trunk Configuration 222 VLAN Configuration 224 Layer 3 Configuration Menu 226 IP Interface Configuration 228 Default IP Gateway Configuration 229 Default Gateway Metrics 230 IP Static Route Configuration 230 ARP Configuration Menu 231 ARP Static Configuration Menu 231 IP Forwarding Configuration 233 Local Network Route Caching Definition 233 Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache 234 Network Filter Configuration 235 Routing Map Configuration Menu 236 IP Access List Configuration Menu 238 Autonomous System Filter Path 239 Routing Information Protocol Configuration 240 Open Shortest Path First Configuration 241 Area Index Configuration Menu 243 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu 245 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu 246 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu 247 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu 249 OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu. October 2003 „ 9 .Alteon OS 21.

0 Command Reference Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu 259 VRRP Configuration Menu 260 Virtual Router Configuration Menu 262 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration 264 Virtual Router Group Menu 265 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu 267 Virtual Router Group Configuration 269 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration 271 VRRP Interface Configuration 273 VRRP Tracking Configuration 274 Default Gateway Metrics 275 Security Configuration Menu 276 IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu 277 Pattern Matching Menu 278 Port Security Configuration Menu 279 UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu 280 Setup 281 Dump 281 Saving the Active Switch Configuration 282 Restoring the Active Switch Configuration 282 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 283 SLB Configuration 284 Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) 285 Real Server SLB Configuration 286 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration 290 Real server IDS Configuration Menu 290 Real Server Group SLB Configuration 292 SLB Health Check Types 294 Server Load Balancing Metrics 297 Virtual Server SLB Configuration 299 Virtual Server Service Configuration 301 Virtual Server RTSP Configuration 305 Cookie-Based Persistence 305 SLB Filter Configuration 307 Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters 311 Advanced Filter Configuration 312 Advanced Filter TCP Configuration 314 10 „ Contents 315393-E. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21.

Alteon OS 21. 351 Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options 352 Operations-Level IP Options 352 Operations-Level BGP Options 353 Activating Optional Software 353 Removing Optional Software 354 Contents 315393-E. October 2003 „ 11 .0 Command Reference IP Advanced Menu 315 ICMP Message Types 316 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu 317 SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu 319 Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu 320 Port SLB Configuration 321 Global SLB Configuration 323 GSLB Remote Site Configuration 326 GSLB Lookup Configuration 327 GSLB Internet Network Preference Lookup Configuration 328 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu 329 Web Cache Redirection Configuration 330 Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu 331 WAP Configuration 332 Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration 333 Peer Switch Configuration 334 Advanced Layer 4 Configuration 335 SYN Attack Detection Configuration 337 Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu 338 Scriptable Health Checks Configuration 339 SNMP Health Check Configuration 340 WAP Health Check Configuration 341 WSP Content Health Check 342 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu 343 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu For Alteon 2224 344 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu For Alteon 2424 345 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu For Alteon 3408 346 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 347 Operations Menu 347 Operations-Level Port Options 349 Operations-Level SLB Options 350 Operations-Level VRRP Options.

October 2003 .0 Command Reference Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 355 Boot Menu 355 Scheduled Reboot of the Switch 356 Scheduled Reboot Menu 356 Updating the Switch Software Image 356 Downloading New Software to Your Switch 356 Selecting a Software Image to Run 358 Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch 358 Selecting a Configuration Block 359 Resetting the Switch 360 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 361 Maintenance Menu 361 System Maintenance Options 363 Forwarding Database Options 363 Debugging Options 365 ARP Cache Options 366 ARP Entries on a Single Port 366 IP Route Manipulation 367 Uuencode Flash Dump 368 TFTP System Dump Put 368 Clearing Dump Information 369 Panic Command 369 Unscheduled System Dumps 370 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 371 LOG_WARNING 371 LOG_ALERT 372 LOG_CRIT 373 LOG_ERR 373 LOG_NOTICE 379 LOG_INFO 381 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 383 Appendix C: Performing a Serial Download 387 Glossary 389 12 „ Contents 315393-E.Alteon OS 21.

October 2003 „ 13 .0 Command Reference Index 393 Contents 315393-E.Alteon OS 21.

0 Command Reference 14 „ Contents 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 .

including a menu map.” provides an overview of the menu system. IP addressing.Preface The Alteon OS 21. IP Routing. and SNMP configuration parameters. For documentation on installing the switches physically.” shows how to view switch configuration parameters.” shows how to configure switch system parameters. October 2003 . Chapter 2 “First-Time Configuration.” describes how to connect to the switch and access the information and configuration menus. Port Mirroring. Chapter 6 “The Configuration Menu. the IEEE 802. SNMP. global commands. and menu shortcuts. see the Hardware Installation Guide for your particular switch model.” describes how to use the Setup utility for initial switch configuration and how to change the system passwords.” shows how to view switch performance statistics. Who Should Use This Book This Command Reference is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in configuring and maintaining a network. Chapter 4 “The Information Menu. Chapter 3 “Menu Basics. Chapter 5 “The Statistics Menu. How This Book Is Organized Chapter 1 “The Command Line Interface. VLANs. The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet concepts.0 Command Reference describes how to configure and use the Alteon OS software with your Alteon Application Switch. Spanning Tree Protocol. 15 315393-E. and more. Port Trunking. ports.1d Spanning Tree Protocol.

and how to clear part or all of the forwarding database. but do not alter permanent switch configurations (such as temporarily disabling ports). Appendix A. “Index” includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the book. and how to reset the software to factory defaults. Chapter 8 “The Operations Menu.” shows how to generate and access a dump of critical switch state information. “Alteon OS Syslog Messages.” shows a listing of syslog messages. Related Documentation „ „ Alteon OS 21. how to clear it.0 Application Guide (Part No. The menu describes how to activate or deactivate optional software features. Chapter 10 “The Maintenance Menu. and more. Appendix B.Alteon OS 21. and how to troubleshoot it. “Glossary” defines the terminology used throughout the book. Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) Quick Guide (315395-B) Provides a description of the Switch BBI and how to configure and access it on the Switch. “Performing a Serial Download. October 2003 . Appendix C.” shows how to configure Server Load Balancing. Filtering. „ Alteon OS 21.” lists the Management Interface Bases (MIBs) supported in the switch software.” describes the use of the primary and alternate switch images. „ Alteon Application Switch Hardware Installation Guide (315396-E) Provides a description of the Alteon Application Switch hardware—the physical features. Global Server Load Balancing.0 Command Reference Chapter 7 “The SLB Configuration Menu. “Alteon OS SNMP Agent. 315394-E) Provides application explanations and configuration examples for the Switch.” shows how to use commands which affect switch performance immediately. 16 „ Preface 315393-E.” shows how to directly load a binary software image into the switch for upgrade or maintenance.0 Release Notes (315397-E) This document provides a detailed description of any caveats and limitations. Chapter 9 “The Boot Options Menu. how to load a new software image. how to install it.

and directories used within the text. host# ls [-a] Preface 315393-E.0 Command Reference Typographic Conventions The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book. October 2003 „ 17 . AaBbCc123 This bold type appears in command examples. Do not type the brackets. Main# sys <AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command To establish a Telnet session. Replace host# telnet <IP address> the indicated text with the appropriate real name or value when using the command. Example View the readme. Read your User’s Guide thoroughly. or words to be emphasized. special terms.txt file. Table 1 Typographic Conventions Typeface or Symbol AaBbCc123 Meaning This type is used for names of commands. It also depicts on-screen computer output and Main# prompts. It shows text that must be typed in exactly as shown. enter: examples as a parameter placeholder. [ ] Command items shown inside brackets are optional and can be used or excluded as the situation demands. files.Alteon OS 21. Do not type the brackets. This also shows book titles.

refer to the following URL: http://www. To locate an ERC for your product or service. contact one of the following Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers: Technical Solutions Center Europe. If you purchased a Nortel Networks service program.html 18 „ Preface 315393-E.com/help/contact/erc/index. Middle East.com/help/contact/global An Express Routing Code (ERC) is available for many Nortel Networks products and services.nortelnetworks.Alteon OS 21. and Africa Telephone 00800 8008 9009 or +44 (0) 870 907 9009 (800) 4NORTEL or (800) 466-7835 (61) (2) 8870-8800 (800) 810-5000 North America Asia Pacific China Additional information about the Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers is available at the following URL: http://www. October 2003 . your call is routed to a technical support person who specializes in supporting that product or service.0 Command Reference How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller.nortelnetworks. When you use an ERC. contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance.

The extensive Alteon OS switching software included in your switch provides a variety of options for accessing and configuring the switch: „ „ „ „ A built-in. text-based command line interface and menu system for access via local terminal or remote Telnet session A GUI-based Element Management System (EMS) for interactive network access SNMP support for access through network management software such as HP OpenView Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) The command line interface is the most direct method for collecting switch information and performing switch configuration. Some of the more advanced features. however. and to perform any necessary configuration. October 2003 . you are presented with a hierarchy of menus that enable you to view information and statistics about the switch.CHAPTER 1 The Command Line Interface Your Alteon Application Switch is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box. require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively. Using a basic terminal. This chapter explains how to access the Command Line Interface (CLI) to the switch. 19 315393-E.

To establish the connection. October 2003 . You will next be required to enter a password for access to the switch. Procedure 1.Alteon OS 21. Connect the terminal to the Console port using the serial cable.0 Command Reference Connecting to the Switch You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways: „ „ „ Using a console connection via the console port Using a Telnet connection over the network Using an SSH connection to securely log into another computer over a network Establishing a Console Connection Requirements To establish a console connection with the switch. 2. press <Enter> a few times on your terminal. 3. (For more information. Power on the terminal. you will need the following: „ An ASCII terminal or a computer running terminal emulation software set to the parameters shown in the table below: Table 1-1 Console Configuration Parameters Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None „ A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics). see “Setting Passwords” on page 40). 20 „ Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E.

Using a BOOTP Server By default. The MAC address can be found on a small white label on the back panel of the switch. run the Telnet program on your workstation and issue the Telnet command. The switch must have an IP address. BOOTP is not supported. from a BOOTP server on your network Manually. To establish a Telnet connection with the switch. The switch can get its IP address in one of two ways: „ „ Dynamically. The MAC address can also be found in the System Information menu (see “System Information” on page 53). add the MAC address of the switch to the BOOTP configuration file located on the BOOTP server. you need to have a device with Telnet software located on the same network as the switch. when you configure the switch IP address (see “Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration” on page 29). the Alteon OS software is set up to request its IP address from a BOOTP server. If you have a BOOTP server on your network.0 Command Reference Establishing a Telnet Connection A Telnet connection offers the convenience of accessing the switch from any workstation connected to the network. To configure the switch for Telnet access. followed by the switch IP address: telnet <IP address> You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained on page 22. Telnet access provides the same options for user access and administrator access as those available through the console port. The port must be manually configured with the proper IP address. NOTE – If connecting to the management port. October 2003 „ 21 .Alteon OS 21. Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E. you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection. Running Telnet Once the IP parameters on the Alteon Application Switch are configured.

The switch can do only one session of key/cipher generation at a time.0.23 and SSH 1.Alteon OS 21.) F-Secure SSH 1. the system will fail to do the key generation if a SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time. DES User Authentication: Local password authentication.2. Thus. Inc. Running SSH Once the IP parameters are configured and the SSH service is turned on the Alteon Application Switch. October 2003 . To establish an SSH connection with the switch. The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below. SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure.1 for Windows (Data Fellows) NOTE – The Alteon OS implementation of SSH is based on SSH version 1. a SSH/SCP client will not be able to login if the switch is doing key generation at that time or if another client has just logged in before this client. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration.0 Command Reference Establishing an SSH Connection Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of an Alteon Application Switch via Telnet.3 (Van Dyke Technologies. followed by the switch IP address: >> # ssh <switch IP address> 22 „ Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E.2 and SecureCRT 3. „ „ „ „ Server Host Authentication: Client RSA-authenticates the switch in the beginning of every connection.0. this method does not provide a secure connection.2.5-1. Similarly. you can access the command line interface using an SSH connection. run the SSH program on your workstation by issuing the SSH command.5 and supports SSH-1. Key Exchange: RSA Encryption: 3DES-CBC.27 for Linux (freeware) SecureCRT 3. The SSH (Secure Shell) protocol enables you to securely log into another computer over a network to execute commands remotely. Radius The following SSH clients have been tested: „ „ „ SSH 1. SSH clients of other versions (especially Version 2) will not be supported.XX.X.

The default user names/password for each access level are listed in the following table. Conceptually. you are prompted to enter a password. and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks. Telnet. use the following command: >> # ssh -1 ace <switch IP address> You will then be prompted to enter your user name and password. access classes are defined as follows: „ User interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed on the Alteon Application Switch. they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes.0 Command Reference or. Administrators can access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the Alteon Application Switch. NOTE – It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. see “Setting Passwords” on page 40. Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications. if SecurID authentication is required. Because administrators can also make temporary (operator-level) changes as well. Once you are connected to the switch via local console. or SSH. Accessing the Switch To enable better switch management and user accountability. Web management functions. Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the switch configuration—changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch. These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. „ „ Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and passwords. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. October 2003 „ 23 . Levels of access to CLI. Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E. such as switch statistics and current operational state information. seven levels or classes of user access have been implemented on the Alteon Application Switch. For more information. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch. operators cannot severely impact switch operation. Operators can only effect temporary changes on the Alteon Application Switch.Alteon OS 21.

including filters and bandwidth management. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. In addition to oper SLB Operator functions. the Layer 4 Administrator can configure all parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus. The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus. The Layer 4 Administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. the SLB Administrator can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus. In addition to SLB Administrator functions. access to each user level can be disabled by setting the password to an empty value. the SLB Operator can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing operation menu. In addition to SLB Operator functions. slbadmin Layer 4 Operator Operator SLB Administrator Layer 4 Administrator l4admin Administrator admin NOTE – With the exception of the “admin” user. Password user SLB Operator The SLB Operator manages Web servers and other Internet ser.slboper vices and their loads.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference Table 1-2 User Access Levels User Account User Description and Tasks Performed The User has no direct responsibility for switch management. All user levels below “admin” will by default be initially disabled (empty password) until they are enabled by the “admin” user. He or she can view all switch status information and statistics. information. with the exception of not being able to configure filters or bandwidth management. October 2003 . the Operator can reset ports or the entire switch. and the access level is reserved for future use. and configuration commands on the Alteon Application Switch. The Layer 4 Operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the l4oper shared Internet services. This prevents inadvertently leaving the switch open to unauthorized users. The Operator manages all functions of the switch. to provide access to operational commands for operators managing traffic on the line leading to the shared Internet services. but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch. This user currently has the same access level as the SLB operator. The SLB Administrator configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. In addition to being able to view all switch information and statistics. 24 „ Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E.

which can be set from 1 to 60 minutes. Command Line History and Editing For a description of global commands. [Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command. see “System Configuration” on page 179. If the switch has already been configured. the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed instead. you are given complete access to the switch. If the switch is still set to its factory default configuration. Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E. shortcuts. October 2003 „ 25 .Alteon OS 21. For information on changing this parameter.0 Command Reference CLI Versus Setup Once the administrator password is verified. some menu options will not be available. The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges. see “Menu Basics” on page 45. “First-Time Configuration”). a utility designed to help you through the first-time configuration process. and command line editing functions. the system will ask whether you wish to run Setup (see Chapter 2. always available] NOTE – If you are accessing a user account or Layer 4 administrator account.” Idle Timeout By default. the switch will disconnect your console or Telnet session after five minutes of inactivity. This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter.

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference 26 „ Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E. October 2003 .

Using the Setup Utility Whenever you log in as the system administrator under the factory default configuration. duplex. Then return to this guide for configuration and management information on your Switch. flow control. and negotiation mode (as appropriate) † Whether to use VLAN tagging or not (as appropriate) 27 315393-E. This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and how to change system passwords. you are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility. the Alteon OS software includes a Setup utility. Information Needed For Setup Setup requests the following information: „ Basic system information † Date & time † Whether to use BOOTP or not † Whether to use Spanning Tree Protocol or not † Management port configuration „ Optional configuration for each port † Speed. October 2003 . you can use the Switch Setup Utility in the Alteon Application Switch 2000-SSL Series Quick Setup Guide (part number 215102-A) instead for setting up the Switch and the SSL Processor. NOTE – If you are configuring a 2000-SSL Series Switch. Setup can also be activated manually from the command line interface any time after login. The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to enter all the necessary information for basic configuration of the switch.CHAPTER 2 First-Time Configuration To help with the initial process of configuring your switch.

October 2003 . or if the administrator Main Menu appears instead. subnet mask. Enter admin as the default administrator password. „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. Would you like to run "Set Up" to configure the switch? [y/n]: NOTE – If the default admin login is unsuccessful. the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings. the login prompt will appear as shown below. and VLAN for each IP interface † IP addresses for up to four default gateways † Destination. see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 359.Alteon OS 21. subnet mask. If the factory default configuration is detected. 2003 The switch is booted with factory default configuration. the system prompts: Connected to Alteon Application Switch 2424 18:44:05 Wed Jan 1. and broadcast address. Connect to the switch console. 1. 3. 28 Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch. and gateway IP address for each IP static route † Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not † Whether the RIP supply is enabled or not Starting Setup When You Log In The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under the factory default settings. Enter Password: 2. To ease the configuration of the switch. After connecting.0 Command Reference „ Optional configuration for each VLAN † Name of VLAN † Which ports are included in the VLAN „ Optional configuration of IP parameters † IP address. or n to bypass the Setup facility. If you are certain that you need to return the switch to its factory default settings. a "Set Up" facility which will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to the operation of the switch is provided.

BOOTP. Port Speed/Mode. or by restarting the Setup facility. To keep the current year. For more information on configuring VLANs. the system will prompt: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter n to abort Setup. Enter the year of the current date at the prompt: System Date: Enter year [2003]: Enter the last two digits of the year as a number from 00 to 99. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"] -----------------------------------------------------------Will you be configuring VLANs? [y/n] 1. Next. “00” is considered 2000. the system prompts: "Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of System Date and Time. When you abort Setup. press <Enter>. If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session. 2. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning.0 Command Reference Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually Stopping Setup To abort the Setup utility. you can configure them later using the configuration menus. VLANs. October 2003 „ 29 . press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question. the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information. Otherwise enter n. Restarting Setup You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at the administrator prompt: # /cfg/setup Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration When Setup is started.Alteon OS 21. and IP interfaces. Spanning Tree. Management port. see the 21.0 Application Guide.

October 2003 . To keep the current second. press <Enter>. Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt: System Time: Enter hour in 24-hour format [18]: Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23. Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt: System Date: Enter month [1]: Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. 5. 4. 30 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. press <Enter>. press <Enter>. The system displays the date and time settings: System clock set to 18:55:36 Wed Jan 1. 2003. Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt: Enter seconds [37]: Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current day. 7.Alteon OS 21. Enter the day of the current date at the prompt: Enter day [3]: Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. To keep the current month. Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt: Enter minutes [55]: Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59. press <Enter>. 6. To keep the current hour. To keep the current minute. press <Enter>.0 Command Reference 3.

or skip port configuration at the prompt: Port Config: Enter port number: (1-28) If you wish to change settings for individual ports. press <Enter> without specifying any port and go to “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 33. Enter d to disable the use of BOOTP. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. enter the number of the port you wish to configure. Setup Part 2: Port Configuration NOTE – The port configuration options shown in these steps are for the Alteon OS 2424. If desired. press <Enter>. set up the management port: Management Port Config: Configure management port? [y/n] y If you answer y to configure the management port. October 2003 „ 31 .Alteon OS 21. or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on. some of the prompts and options may be different. To skip port configuration. broadcast address. Select the port to configure. a BOOTP server can supply the switch with IP parameters so that you do not have to enter them manually. subnet mask. 9. To keep the current setting. or enter e to enable the use of BOOTP. and other management port options. before the system will prompt for IP parameters. Enable or disable the use of BOOTP at the prompt: BootP Option: Current BOOTP usage: Enter new BOOTP usage [d/e]: disabled If available on your network. 1. Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt: Spanning Tree: Current Spanning Tree setting: ON Turn Spanning Tree OFF? [y/n] Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree.0 Command Reference 8. 2. default gateway. When configuring port options for other switches. you will be prompted for IP address. BOOTP must be disabled however.

If appropriate. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port duplex mode. To keep the current setting. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. press <Enter>. If appropriate. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. half for half-duplex. 6. press <Enter>. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable autonegotiation. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port speed. press <Enter>. To keep the current setting.0 Command Reference 3. both to enable both. To keep the current setting. 32 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. 5. or any to have the switch auto-negotiate. the system prompts: Port Mode: Current port 1 mode setting: any Enter new speed ["full"/"half"/"any"] Enter full for full-duplex. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. or none to turn flow control off for the port. If appropriate. tx for transmit flow control.Alteon OS 21. or enter any to have the switch auto-sense the port speed. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port flow control. the system prompts: Fast Link Configuration: Port Speed: Current Port 1 speed setting: 10/100 Enter new speed ["10"/"100"/"any"]: Enter the port speed from the options available. 4. October 2003 . off to disable it. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. the system prompts: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. If appropriate.

enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. the system prompts: Gig Link Configuration: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. both to enable both.Alteon OS 21. repeat the steps in this section. To keep the current setting. press <Enter>. If appropriate.0 Command Reference 7. configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters. press <Enter>. 9. To keep the current setting. Otherwise. 10. October 2003 „ 33 . If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. Setup Part 3: VLANs If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 1. configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable port autonegotiation. If configuring VLANs. If appropriate. the system prompts: Port VLAN tagging config (tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs) Current TAG flag: disabled Enter new TAG status [d/e]: Enter d to disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter e to enable VLAN tagging for the port. 8. The system prompts you to configure the next port: Enter port number: (1 to 28) When you are through configuring ports. skip to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 35. or none to turn flow control off for the port. off to disable it. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. press <Enter> without specifying any port. If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1. tx for transmit flow control.

0 Command Reference 1. When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN. NULL at end: Type the first port number to add to the current VLAN and press <Enter>. Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt: VLAN is newly created. press <Enter>. without quotes: Entering a new VLAN name is optional. 2. To use the pending new VLAN name. enter the number of the VLAN you wish to configure. October 2003 . press <Enter> without specifying any port. 34 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. NULL at end: Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured. The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090. 4. press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN. The system prompts you to define the first port in the VLAN: Define ports in VLAN: Current VLAN 2: empty Enter port numbers one per line. NULL at end: If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs.Alteon OS 21. type the port number and press <Enter> to move to the next line. press <Enter> without typing a VLAN number and go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 35. To skip VLAN configuration. When all VLANs have been configured. Pending new VLAN name: "VLAN 2" Enter new VLAN name. 3. or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090. The right angle prompt appears: > For each additional port in the VLAN. Enter the VLAN port numbers. Select the VLAN to configure. Repeat this until all ports for the VLAN being configured are entered.

press <Enter>. For the specified IP interface.0 To keep the current setting.0. At the prompt. if you disabled BOOTP. Select the IP interface to configure. press <Enter> without typing an interface number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 36. or skip interface configuration at the prompt: IP Config: IP interfaces: Enter interface number: (1-256) If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces. 3.Alteon OS 21. Up to 256 IP interfaces can be configured on the Alteon Application Switch.0. The IP address assigned to each IP interface provides the switch with an IP presence on your network. IP Interfaces IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs. No two IP interfaces can be on the same IP subnet. enter the number of the IP interface you wish to configure. The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for remote configuration. press <Enter>. 1. October 2003 „ 35 .0. the system prompts for IP parameters. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. skip to Setup Part 5: Final Steps.0.0 To keep the current setting.0 Command Reference Setup Part 4: IP Configuration If BOOTP was enabled back in Part 1. enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation: Current subnet mask: Enter new subnet mask: 0. To skip IP interface configuration. 2. enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. and for routing between subnets and VLANs (if used). Otherwise.

or n to leave it disabled: Enable IP interface? [y/n] 7. 36 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E.0. At the prompt. or press <Enter> without specifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting.Alteon OS 21.0 To keep the current setting. press <Enter> without specifying any interface number. When all interfaces have been configured. press <Enter>. Default Gateways 1. To skip default gateway configuration. select a default gateway for configuration.0 Command Reference 4.0. If configuring VLANs. 6. specify a VLAN for the interface. enter y to enable the IP interface. press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to “IP Routing” on page 37. enter the broadcast IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current broadcast address: Enter new broadcast address: 0. The system prompts you to configure another interface: Enter interface number: (1-256) Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured. October 2003 . At the prompt. This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1: Current VLAN: Enter new VLAN: 1 Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs. 5. At the prompt. or skip default gateway configuration: IP default gateways: Enter default gateway number: (1-259) Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured.

This eliminates the need to bounce inter-subnet communication off an external router device. October 2003 „ 37 . 3. 1. This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters. enable or disable the RIP supply: Enable RIP supply? [y/n] Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. Routing on more complex networks. IP routing between them can be performed entirely within the switch. At the prompt. The system prompts you to configure another default gateway: Enter default gateway number: (1-4) Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured. press <Enter> without specifying any number.0. At the prompt. enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing: Enable IP forwarding? [y/n] Enter y to enable IP forwarding. enter y to enable the default gateway. where subnets may not have a direct presence on the Alteon Application Switch. To disable IP forwarding. or n to leave it disabled: Enable default gateway? [y/n] 4. or press <Enter> without specifying an address to accept the current setting.Alteon OS 21. At the prompt. enter n and proceed to Step 2. 2.0 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation. IP Routing When IP interfaces are configured for the various subnets attached to your switch. When all default gateways have been configured. can be accomplished through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically. At the prompt.To keep the current setting. enter the IP address for the selected default gateway: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0.0. press <Enter>.0 Command Reference 2.

0 Command Reference Setup Part 5: Final Steps 1. Changes are normally applied. 5. 4. or n to continue without applying. At the prompt. decide whether to make the changes permanent: Save changes to flash? [y/n] Enter y to save the changes to flash. October 2003 . When prompted.Alteon OS 21. decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes: Review the changes made? [y/n] Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. or n to continue. decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt: Apply the changes? [y/n] Enter y to apply the changes. NOTE – After initial configuration is complete. Next. decide whether to restart Setup or continue: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning. Enter n to continue without reviewing the changes. When prompted. 2. If you do not apply or save the changes. We recommend that you review the changes. Changes are normally saved at this point. 3. Enter n to return to the Apply the changes? prompt. the system prompts whether to abort them: Abort all changes? [y/n] Enter y to discard the changes. Enter n to continue without saving the changes. 38 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. it is recommended that you change the default passwords as shown in “Setting Passwords” on page 40.

1. Apply and save SNMP and /or telnet configuration(s). Otherwise. enter n to disable it. Apply and save configuration if you are not configuring the switch with Telnet support. >> System# apply >> System# save If your network uses Routing Interface Protocol (RIP). By default. Otherwise apply and save after “Optional Setup for Telnet Support” on page 39. >> # /cfg/sys/access/snmp dis|read|write 2. >> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/rcomm|wcomm 3. they are public and private respectively. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on using SNMPbased tools. Set SNMP read or write community string. such as Alteon EMS. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to the switch through any telnet application. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. 1. Enable SNMP and select one of the options. October 2003 „ 39 . >> System# apply >> System# save Optional Setup for Telnet Support NOTE – This step is optional.0 Command Reference Optional Setup for SNMP Support NOTE – This step is optional. RIP listen is set by default. >> # /cfg/sys/access/tnet ena 2.Alteon OS 21. When RIP is enabled. Enable telnet. enter y to enable the RIP supply.

System-wide Parameter Menu port . and configuration commands. Passwords cannot be modified from the user command mode.Restore current configuration from tftp server 40 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. you must login using the administrator password.Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security .Port Mirroring Menu bwm .Layer 3 Menu slb .Port Menu pmirr .Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg . including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. The default password for the administrator account is admin. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. follow this procedure: 1. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# /cfg The Configuration Menu is displayed.0 Command Reference Setting Passwords It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies.Bandwidth Management Menu l2 . To change the default password. information. October 2003 . [Configuration Menu] sys .Alteon OS 21.Step by step configuration set up dump .Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg .Security Menu setup .Layer 2 Menu l3 . Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. From the Main Menu. 2. To change both the user password and the administrator password. Changing the Default Administrator Password The administrator has complete access to all menus.

Enter the current administrator password at the prompt: Changing ADMINISTRATOR password. Select the administrator password. use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys The System Menu is displayed. October 2003 „ 41 .. System# user/admpw 6.0 Command Reference 3.Alteon OS 21. From the Configuration Menu. use the following path to select the User menu: System# access/user 5.. [System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur - Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters 4. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. From the System menu. validation required. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode.

Enter the new administrator password at the prompt: Enter new administrator password: 8. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. you can view switch information and statistics.Alteon OS 21. From the Configuration Menu. again. but you can’t make configuration changes. The default password for the user account is user. October 2003 . Through a user account. use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys 4.0 Command Reference 7. 2. at the prompt: Re-enter new administrator password: 9. as shown in the following procedure. System# access/user/usrpw 42 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. 1. This password cannot be changed from the user account. Only the administrator has the ability to change passwords. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# cfg 3. Enter the new administrator password. Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save Changing the Default User Password The user login has limited control of the switch. Select the user password. From the Main Menu.

you must login using the administrator password. Enter the new user password at the prompt: Enter new user password: 7. To change any switch password.Alteon OS 21. Passwords cannot be modified from the Layer 4 administrator account or the user account. Entering the administrator password confirms your authority. Apply and save your changes: System# apply System# save Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password The Layer 4 administrator has limited control of the switch. but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. Select the Layer 4 administrator password: System# l4apw Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. Changing USER password. Through a Layer 4 administrator account. Enter the new user password. Enter current administrator password: 6. use the following path to access the user command: Main# /cfg/sys/access/user 3. at the prompt: Re-enter new user password: 8. Only the administrator can change the user password.. 2. October 2003 „ 43 . follow this procedure: 1. The default password for the Layer 4 administrator account is l4admin. To change the default password. From the Main Menu. again.. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt. you can view all switch information and statistics. validation required.0 Command Reference 5. Connect to the switch and log in using the administrator account.

Enter the new administrator password. Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save 44 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. Enter the new Layer 4 administrator password at the prompt: Enter new L4 administrator password: 6. Enter the current administrator password (not the Layer 4 administrator password) at the prompt: Changing L4 ADMINISTRATOR password.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference 4.. validation required. 5. again. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. October 2003 . at the prompt: Re-enter new L4 administrator password: 7..

the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of menus and sub-menus. Below each menu is a prompt where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu. along with a summary of what each command will do. the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of switch configuration. Each menu displays a list of commands and/or sub-menus that are available. October 2003 . In addition. always available] 45 315393-E. To make the CLI easy to use. and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI. NOTE – The ssl option is only visible on the Alteon Application Switch 2000-SSL Series. [Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command. The Main Menu The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login. This chapter describes the Main Menu commands.CHAPTER 3 Menu Basics The Alteon Application Switch’s Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for viewing switch information and statistics. Some features are not available under the user login. The following table shows the Main Menu for the administrator login.

Layer 4 settings. enabling you to generate a dump of the critical state information in the switch. „ Statistics Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying switch performance statistics. UDP. and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the ARP and routing tables.0 Command Reference Menu Summary „ Information Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch: from basic system settings to VLANs. „ Maintenance Menu This menu is used for debugging purposes. VRRP. IF. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service. Included are port. and enabling or disabling Server Load Balancing functions. and Layer 4 statistics. SNMP. routing. Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied. „ Boot Options Menu This menu is used for upgrading switch software. „ Configuration Menu This menu is available only from an administrator login. „ Operations Command Menu Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration. 46 „ Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-E. selecting configuration blocks. DNS. IP.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . TCP. and more. and for resetting the switch when necessary. It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages. It includes sub-menus for configuring every aspect of the switch. ARP. ICMP. performing port mirroring.

Go up one level in the menu structure. Apply pending configuration changes. Display the current menu. These commands are useful for obtaining online help. You will see the following screen: Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu] help up print lines verbose exit diff apply save ping traceroute telnet pushd popd pwd quit revert history The following are used to navigate the menu structure: . Print current menu . Show any pending configuration changes. Use this command to restore configuration parameters set since last “apply” command. lines diff apply save revert exit or quit Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-E. The default is 24 lines. Set the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time. or up / Action Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu. Otherwise. navigating through menus.. and for applying and saving configuration changes. Write configuration changes to non-volatile flash memory. Exit from the command line interface and log out. a summary of the global commands is displayed. or command separator ! Execute command from history Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ? command or help . October 2003 „ 47 . the current setting is displayed.Alteon OS 21. go to the Main Menu..0 Command Reference Global Commands Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line. or print . If placed at the beginning of a command. type help. For help on a specific command. When used without the command parameter. Remove pending configuration changes between “apply” commands. Move up one menu level / Top menu if first. When used without a value.

October 2003 . Sets the level of information displayed on the screen: 0 =Quiet: Nothing appears except errors—not even prompts. The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames (see “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 258). the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. If the management port is used.Alteon OS 21. When used without a value. but no menus. This command is used to telnet out of the switch. By default. By default. the current setting is displayed. If the management port is used. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. As with ping. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. The format is as follows: <hostname>|<IP address> [port] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data]. The format is as follows: traceroute <host name>| <IP address> [<max-hops (1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station. tries (optional) is the number of attempts (1-32).0 Command Reference Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ping Action Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. This command brings up the history of the last 10 commands. traceroute pwd verbose n telnet history 48 „ Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-E. By default. maxhops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-16 devices). and delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response. 2 =Verbose: Everything is shown. If the management port is used. Display the command path used to reach the current menu. specify the -m or -mgmt option. the DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. specify the -m or -mgmt option. Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network. The format is as follows: ping <host name>|<IP address> [tries (1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m| -mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between attempts. 1 =Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown. Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. specify the -m or -mgmt option.

(Also the up arrow key.) Recall the next command from the history list. Redraw the screen. October 2003 „ 49 . or edited using the options below. Clear the entire line. (Also the left arrow key. (Also the right arrow key. This can be used multiple times to work backward through the last 10 commands.) Recall the previous command from the history list. (Also the Delete key. Move cursor to the end of the command line. Kill (erase) all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line. <Ctrl-n> <Ctrl-a> <Ctrl-e> <Ctrl-b> <Ctrl-f> <Backspace> <Ctrl-d> <Ctrl-k> <Ctrl-l> <Ctrl-u> Other keys Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-E. (Also the down arrow key.0 Command Reference Command Line History and Editing Using the command line interface. Insert new characters at the cursor position. Repeat the last entered command. Repeat the nth command shown on the history list. The recalled command can be entered as is. This can be used multiple times to work forward through the last 10 commands. you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with just a few keystrokes.) Move the cursor forward one position to the right. The following options are available globally at the command line: Table 3-2 Command Line History and Editing Options Option history !! !n <Ctrl-p> Description Display a numbered list of the last 10 previously entered commands.) Move the cursor back one position to the left. Delete one character at the cursor position. The recalled command can be entered as is. Move the cursor to the beginning of command line. or edited using the options below.) Erase one character to the left of the cursor position.Alteon OS 21.

you can type multiple commands on a single line. For example. If only one command fits the input text when <Tab> is pressed.Alteon OS 21. separated by forward slashes (/). You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want. the CLI will display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter. For example. the currently active menu will be displayed. October 2003 . If the <Tab> key is pressed without any input on the command line. 50 „ Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-E. the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from the Main# prompt is as follows: Main# cfg/l2/stp/port Command Abbreviation Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the command from the others in the same menu or sub-menu.0 Command Reference Command Line Interface Shortcuts Command Stacking As a shortcut. the command shown above could also be entered as follows: Main# c/l2/st/p Tab Completion By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and hitting <Tab>. Entering additional letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed. waiting to be entered. that command will be supplied on the command line.

see page 59.Show enabled software features dump .Show Security status swkey .Show link status port .Layer 4-7 Information Menu link . October 2003 .CHAPTER 4 The Information Menu You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command modes. l2 Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu.Dump all information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-1 on page 51. see page 66.Layer 2 Information Menu l3 . l3 Displays the Layer 3 information menu. with pointers to where detailed information can be found.Show port information bwm . For details. For details.Layer 3 Information Menu slb . /info Information Menu [Information Menu] sys . Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays system menu information. 51 315393-E.System Information Menu l2 . see page 53.Show Bandwidth Management information security . This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch infor- mation. To view menu options.

Alteon OS 21. For details. yes. security Displays current UDP blast settings and the security status of the port. For details. swkey Displays a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch. or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. including: „ „ „ „ „ bwm Port number Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership For details. 10/100. full. or 1000) Duplex mode (half. see page 93. link Displays configuration information about each port. or auto) Link status (up or down) For details. see page 92.0 Command Reference Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Layer 4 Information Menu. To view menu options. To view a sample. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. depending on your configuration). dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more. 52 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. If you want to capture dump data to a file. Displays bandwidth management information. 100. see page 92. October 2003 . see page 90. see page 91. see page 82. including: „ „ „ „ „ Port number Port speed (10. For details see page 93. port Displays port status information.

See page 58 for a sample output. mgmt Displays Management port information. if one is configured See page 54 for a sample output. Management Processor Board Hardware. See page 55 for a sample output and detailed information. and date. October 2003 „ 53 . See page 56 for detailed information. dump Displays all system information.0 Command Reference /info/sys System Information Menu [System Menu] general log mgmt sonmp dump Show Show Show Show Dump general system information last 30 syslog messages Management Port information SONMP topology table information all system information Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage general Displays general system information including: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ System information like time. log Displays last 30 syslog messages. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. Switch model name and number How long the switch has been up Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor IP address of IP interface #1 Hardware order number and part numbers of the Mainboard Hardware. and Fast Ethernet Board Hardware „ Software image file and version number „ Configuration name „ Log-in banner.Alteon OS 21. day. sonmp Displays SONMP topology table information. See page 56 for detailed information.

2003 Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 0 days.0.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . 2003 (reset from console) MAC address: 00:09:97:5e:4c:00 IP (If 1) address: 1.1 Hardware Order No: EB1412011 Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P316017-A Rev: 03 Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: 02 Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Software Version 21. Last boot: 17:22:29 Mon Aug 25. There will be a warning from the software if any of the sensors exceeds this temperature threshold. 7 minutes and 21 seconds.0 (FLASH image2). Information about fan failures will also be displayed if one or more fans are not functioning. 54 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.0. active configuration. The switch will shut down if the power supply overheats and the temperature gets to 100oC.1.1. NOTE – The display of temperature will come up only if the temperature of any of the sensors exceeds 60oC. 0 hours.0 Command Reference /info/sys/general General System Information System Information at 17:29:51 Mon Aug 25.

4 Nov 19 16:54:13 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 17:20:37 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.1 operational Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.25.81. October 2003 „ 55 . One of eight different prefixes is used.22.22.81.80.80. as shown below.4 Nov 19 17:26:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.4 Nov 19 14:44:02 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:15:06 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:15:20 INFO mgmt: new configuration saved Nov 19 16:18:44 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:19:37 ERROR mgmt: Error: Apply not done Nov 19 16:19:57 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:34:35 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47. new root bridge Nov 19 13:52:03 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.1 Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.81.27.0 Command Reference /info/sys/log Show Last 30 Syslog Messages Date Time Criticality level Message Nov 19 12:16:51 ALERT stp: STG 1.22.22.1 Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.22.49 Nov 19 17:31:53 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Each syslog message has a criticality level associated with it.80.80.27.81. depending on the condition that the administrator is being notified of.27.1 enabled Nov 19 14:21:27 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47. „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ EMERG: indicates the system is unusable ALERT: Indicates action should be taken immediately CRIT: Indicates critical conditions ERR: indicates error conditions or error operations WARNING: indicates warning conditions NOTICE: indicates a normal but significant condition INFO: indicates an information message DEBUG: indicates a debut-level message Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.81.27.1 operational Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47. included in text form as a prefix to the log message.Alteon OS 21.1 enabled Nov 19 14:38:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.22.80.4 Nov 19 16:39:43 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:39:59 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.

20.88 255. or auto) Link (Up or down) IP address of the Interface IP address of the gateway.0 Command Reference /info/sys/mgmt Management Port Information Speed ----100 Duplex -----full Link ---up Interface information: 47. any. SONMP protocol is enabled on Alteon Application Switches using the /cfg/sys/ sonmp on command.1 47.When SONMP is enabled. October 2003 .20.20.255 Use this command to display Management port information on an Alteon Application Switch including: „ „ „ „ „ Port speed (10/100) Duplex mode (half.0 Gateway information: 47.80. full. a topology table is built like the one shown below. The IP address of the device is written into the hello packets. /info/sys/sonmp SONMP Information This command displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) topology table.80.255.255.Alteon OS 21. As the network devices exchange information. devices on the network exchange multicast packets namely: flatnet hellos and segment hellos. and is necessary so that an Alteon switch can be discovered by the Nortel Networks Optivity Switch Manager.80. 56 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.

----Alteon2224 true topChanged Passport1200 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat AlteonAD4 true topChanged Alteon184 true topChanged Chassis Type Table 4-3 SONMP Information Parameters Description Parameter Slot Port Description Specifies the slot and port on which the topology message was received.247 0 47.--47.80. „ new—sending agent is in new state. The current state of the sender of the topology message. The “segment identifier” of the segment from which the remote agent send the topology message.25 260 47.80.22.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 57 .241 257 50.----. not across a bridge) as the reporting agent. The chassis type of the device that sent the topology message.80. Different devices may use different methods for representing the segment identifier.1 263 IP address MAC address ----------------00:01:81:2e:a3:60 00:e0:16:7c:28:24 00:60:cf:81:54:28 00:60:cf:81:54:38 00:60:cf:43:a2:10 00:60:cf:46:d5:60 Local State Seg -----------------.25 259 47.10.23.10. This is the IP address of the sender of the topology message.e.23.0 Command Reference Slot Port ----0 /0 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 Seg Id --------------.23. IP Address Seg ID Mac Address Chassis Type Local Seg State Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.23. the values are: „ topChanged—topology information has recently changed „ heartbeat—topology information unchanged.80.1 770 47. The MAC address of the sender of the topology message.80. Indicates if the sender of the topology message is on the same Ethernet segment (i.

31. Last boot: 13:07:55 Mon Jun 2.23. active configuration. 2003 Interface information: Gateway information: Engine ID = 80:00:07:50:03:00:09:97:16:5F:00 User Name -------------------------------adminmd5 adminsha Protocol -------------------------------HMAC_MD5. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA. 2003 (reset from Telnet) MAC address: 00:09:97:16:5f:00 IP (If 1) address: 47.3.11 operational Jun 2 13:09:27 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Jun 2 13:09:32 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Jun 2 13:09:37 NOTICE slb: real server 172. 21 minutes and 36 seconds.3. 0 hours.80. Last 30 syslog message information: Jun 2 13:07:59 NOTICE system: link up on port 3 Jun 2 13:07:59 NOTICE system: link up on port 7 Jun 2 13:08:00 NOTICE system: link up on port 9 Jun 2 13:08:25 NOTICE slb: real server 172.10 operational Management port information: Speed ----10/100 Duplex -----any Link ---disabled 2.0 Command Reference /info/sys/dump System Information Dump System Information at 13:29:31 Mon Jun Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 0 days.81 Hardware Order No: EB1412003 Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P314090-A Rev: 03 Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: 02 Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Unreleased Software: FW_VERSION: #2 Mon Jun 2 11:37:20 PDT 2003 FW_VIEW: bshao_latest FW_CONTEXT: ALT-HW_CH_FE-6 / pass2 / 256m (FLASH image2). DES PRIVACY 58 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21.31. October 2003 .

For details. you can view the following STP bridge information: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State For details. vlan <VLAN number to display or carriage return to display all VLANs> Displays VLAN configuration information. For details. dump Displays all Layer 2 information. trunk When trunk groups are configured. including: „ „ „ „ VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Port membership of the VLAN For details. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. see page 62.Alteon OS 21. see page 64. October 2003 „ 59 . see page 60. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. see page 64.0 Command Reference /info/l2 Layer 2 Information Menu [Layer 2 Menu] fdb stg trunk vlan dump Forwarding Database Information Menu Show STG information Show Trunk Group information Show VLAN information Dump all layer 2 information Table 4-4 Layer 2 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu. stg <STG index to display or carriage return for all STGs> In addition to seeing if Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled or disabled.

0 for "unknown"> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. For example. The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address. 60 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. port <port number. 08:00:20:12:34:56. [Forwarding Database Menu] find .Show FDB entries on a single VLAN refpt . vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. Table 4-5 Layer 2 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You can also enter the MAC address using the format. xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the FDB entries referenced by a single port. For more information. For example.Show FDB entries referenced by a single SP dump .Show FDB entries on a single port trunk . Enter the MAC address using the format.Show all FDB entries NOTE – The master forwarding database supports up to 16K MAC address entries on the MP per switch. xxxxxxxxxxxx.Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan .Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port . October 2003 . dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. Each SP port supports up to 8K entries. see page 61. 080020123456. trunk <trunk group number> Displays all FDB entries on a single trunk.0 Command Reference /info/l2/fdb Layer 2 FDB Information The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control (MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned.Alteon OS 21.

the port field represents the trunk group number. Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database To delete a MAC address from the forwarding database (FDB) or to clear the entire FDB. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. When an address is in the unknown state.---.Alteon OS 21. although ports which reference the address as a destination will be listed under “Reference ports. the MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch. If the state for the port is listed as unknown (UNK).---. refer to “Forwarding Database Options” on page 363.” If the state for the port is listed as an interface (IF).-------------.------------00:02:01:00:00:00 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:01 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:02 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:03 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:04 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:05 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:06 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:07 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:08 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:09 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0a 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0b 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0c 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state.0 Command Reference /info/l2/fdb/dump Show All FDB Information MAC address VLAN Port State Referenced SPs Referenced ports ----------------. the MAC address is for a virtual server router—a virtual router with the same IP address as a virtual server. When in the trunking (TRK) state. but has only been seen as a destination address.----. the MAC address is for a standard VRRP virtual router. no outbound port is indicated. means that it has been learned by the switch. October 2003 „ 61 . If the state is listed as a virtual server (VIP).

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path.Alteon OS 21. you can view the following STP bridge information: „ „ „ „ „ Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time You can also see the following port-specific STP information: „ Port number and priority 62 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. NOTE – Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /info/l2/stg Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information When multiple paths exist on a network. In addition to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled. October 2003 .------- 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 The switch software uses the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).0 supports up to 16 multiple Spanning Tress or Spanning Tree Groups. Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Hello 2 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 MaxAge 20 Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------.

FORWARDING. in seconds. or DISABLED. The maximum age parameter specifies. MaxAge FwdDel Aging priority (port) Cost State Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. in seconds. LEARNING. the lower the path cost. The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. Table 4-6 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions Parameter Priority (bridge) Hello Description The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge. in seconds. LISTENING. how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). The aging time parameter specifies. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated.Alteon OS 21. The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STP network. The hello time parameter specifies. the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state. Generally speaking. October 2003 „ 63 .0 Command Reference „ „ „ „ Cost State Designated Bridge Designated Port The following table describes the STP parameters. The state field shows the current state of the port. The state field can be either BLOCKING. the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database. The forward delay parameter specifies. in seconds. the faster the port.

A trunk group is a group of ports that act together.Alteon OS 21. /info/l2/vlan VLAN Information VLAN ---1 Name Status Jumbo BWC Learn Ports -------------------------------. For example. multi-link connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk-capable devices. combining their bandwidth to create a single. When trunk groups are configured. The designated port identifies a physical port.----.---. Port membership is represented in slot/port format. Trunk group 1. larger virtual link. a physical port number four with bridge priority 32768 will be displayed as 32678+4=32772. VLAN information includes: 64 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. bw contract 256. This is a number that is the numerical sum of bridge priority and the actual physical port number. port state: 1: STG 1 forwarding 2: STG 1 forwarding NOTE – If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding. This bridge is displayed as character string starting with the bridge priority (1-65535) followed by a hyphen and six byte MAC address of that switch.----. Designated port /info/l2/trunk Trunk Group Information Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth. October 2003 .----Default VLAN ena n 256 ena 1-28 This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. the remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding.0 Command Reference Table 4-6 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions (Continued) Parameter Designated Bridge Description The designated bridge resides closest to the root bridge and is responsible for forwarding packets from LAN towards the root bridge.-----.

------ 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 65 .0 Command Reference „ „ „ „ „ „ „ VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Jumbo Frames Bandwidth Contract if BWM is enabled Source MAC Address Learning Port membership of the VLAN /info/l2/dump Layer2 Dump Information Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 MaxAge 20 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 Hello 2 Port -----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------.Alteon OS 21.

IP information.Alteon OS 21. For details. specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15 hops. the system displays the following for each configured or learned route: „ „ „ „ Route destination IP address. Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use. VLAN number. includes: „ „ „ „ „ IP interface information: Interface number. subnet mask. and operational status. To view menu options. see page 72. October 2003 . IP address. and gateway address Type of route Tag indicating origin of route Metric for RIP tagged routes.0 Command Reference info/l3 Layer3 Information Menu [Layer 3 Menu] route arp bgp ospf ip vrrp dump IP Routing Information Menu ARP Information Menu BGP Information Menu OSPF Routing Information Menu Show IP information Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information Dump all layer 3 information Table 4-7 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage route Displays the IP Routing Menu. subnet mask. ospf Displays OSPF routing information menu. gateway number. see page 69. For details. arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu. see page 67. and health status IP forwarding information: Enable status. bgp Displays BGP Information Menu. IP address. lnet and lmask Port status 66 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. Using the options of this menu. For details. broadcast address. or 16 for infinite hops) „ The IP interface that the route uses For details. ip Displays IP Information. see page 74. see page 79.

Show gw . /info/l3/route IP Routing Information [IP Routing Menu] find .17. 192. For details.44)> Displays routes to a single gateway. Table 4-8 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as.Alteon OS 21. For a description of IP routing types.101)> Displays a single route by destination IP address. 192.4. October 2003 „ 67 . dump Displays all Layer 3 information. For more information. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Displays routes of a single type. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays routes on a single interface. see page 79. For a description of IP routing types. see page 68.Show dump . see Table 4-10 on page 69.0 Command Reference Table 4-7 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vrrp Displays the VRRP Information Menu. you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in the switch. gw <default gateway address (such as.Show a single route by destination IP address routes to a single gateway routes of a single type routes of a single tag routes on a single interface all routes Using the commands listed below.Show if .17. see Table 4-9 on page 68. dump Displays all routes configured in the switch.Show tag .Show type . tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Displays routes of a single tag.4. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.

80.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------. Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch.255 broadcast broadcast 3 * 172.200 255.0.31.0.81 local addr 1 * 47.4.255.31.255.255 47.255.3.0 Command Reference /info/l3/route/dump Show All IP Route Information Status code: * .0 47.31.3.31.0 224. direct local broadcast martian multicast 68 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.3.255 172.255.255.255. Indicates a broadcast route.23.31.255.--------------.255.255 47.31.0 172.0.0 0.255 broadcast broadcast 2 * 224.--------------.31.0 255.255.3.255.255 255.255 255.255 255.3.255.255.80.0 255.0.200 direct vip * 172.255 172.255.* 0.80.0 255. Indicates a multicast route. Packets to this destination are discarded.81 direct fixed 1 * 47. October 2003 . The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out.255 172.255.1 255.0 47.4.31.0.255 broadcast broadcast Type Parameters The following table describes the Type parameters.0.0 0.80. Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.255.1 direct fixed 3 * 172.4.0.4.255.---.4.81 255.0.1 direct fixed 2 * 172.4.23.254.80.255.80.1 indirect static 1 * 47.22.23.31.4.4.255 broadcast broadcast 1 * 127.0 martian martian * 255.0 255.0.255 255.1 local addr 2 * 172.--------.--------.255.0.0 martian martian * 172.255.22. Table 4-9 IP Routing Type Parameters (/info/l3/route/dump/type) Parameter indirect Description The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the Gateway address.255.255 255.0.80.23.Alteon OS 21.3.0 0.255 172.0.255.0 172.31.23.31.31.1 255.31.31.255.255.0.0.0.0.1 local addr 3 * 172.255.255.255 172.

In any IP communication. The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump .Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt .Alteon OS 21. The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). Indicates a route destination that is a virtual server IP address. The address is a static route which has been configured on the Alteon Application Switch.Show a single ARP entry by IP address port .Show ARP address list Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP). October 2003 „ 69 . Table 4-10 IP Routing Tag Parameters (info/l3/route/tag) Parameter fixed static Description The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. The address belongs to a filtered group. The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Indicates a broadcast address. VIP routes are needed to advertise virtual server IP addresses via BGP. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory. [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find . Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet. addr rip ospf bgp broadcast martian vip /info/l3/Arp ARP Information Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer.Show ARP entries on a single port vlan .Show all ARP entries help . the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the router is present in the ARP cache. ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses.0 Command Reference Tag Parameters The following table describes the Tag parameters.Show help on the fields of ARP entries addr .

70 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. For example: IP address: Flags: IP address of ARP entry J . etc.0 Command Reference The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry. e. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN.g.Alteon OS 21. and VLAN flags. dump Displays all ARP entries. and port referencing information. see page 71. port <port number> Displays the ARP entries on a single port.Permanent ARP entry (not obtained via ARP request). VLAN and port for the address. IP mask. IP interface. address status flags (see Table 4-12 on page 71).17. help Displays help on the ARP field entries.Indirect ARP (cache) entry for IP address reachable via indirect routes (static/dynamic) 4 . VIP. 192. October 2003 . refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the ARP entries referenced by a single port. including: „ „ „ „ IP address and MAC address of each entry Address status flag (see below) The VLAN and port to which the address belongs The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP address shown) For more information.4.Layer 4 IP address (VIP) MAC address: VLAN: Port: Referenced SPs: MAC address of ARP entry VLAN of this ARP entry Physical port where this IP address owner is connected SPs on which this ARP entry is present addr Displays the ARP address list: IP address.ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN P .101> Displays a single ARP entry by IP address. Table 4-11 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. MAC address. R .

31. Indirect route entry.1 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 1-4 172.---------------1.1 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 1-4 10.10.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:86 1 23 empty 47. From the ARP entry (the referenced ports). If you have VMA turned off. The Flag field is interpreted as follows: Table 4-12 ARP Dump Flag Parameters Flag P P 4 Description Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.22.10. NOTE – If you have VMA turned on.1. R U Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.3.----------------. the designated port will be the normal ingress port.10 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 empty 172.80.23. Permanent entry created for Layer 4 proxy IP address or virtual server IP address. this traffic needs to be forwarded to the egress port (port 6 in the above example).11 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 empty Referenced ports are the ports that request the ARP entry.0 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/dump Show All ARP Entry Information IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------.11.10 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 1-4 47.3. the referenced port will be the designated port.80.---. October 2003 „ 71 .Alteon OS 21.3.---. The MAC address has not been learned. So the traffic coming into the referenced ports has the destination IP address.----. Unresolved ARP entry.31.31.81 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 1-4 172.

Show BGP routing table Table 4-13 BGP Peer Information Menu Options (/info/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer Displays BGP peer information.Alteon OS 21. up/down.255.255. See page 73 for a sample output. 72 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.23. message sent.4.255. [BGP Menu] peer .255.----00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:0e D 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 /info/l3/bgp BGP Information Menu Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks.1 47.10 1.255 255.11.1 172.31.Show all BGP peers summary .255 255.255.255 MAC address VLAN Flags ----------------. message received.Show all BGP peers in summary dump . state.31. See page 73 for a sample output.---.255. dump Displays the BGP routing table.80.255 255.10.255.1 172.200 172.31.81 IP mask --------------255. October 2003 .0 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/addr ARP Address List Information IP address --------------10. See page 74 for a sample output.255 255.255.3.255. For more information.4.1.255.255. refer to BGP section in chapter: “The Configuration Menu” on page 175 and the Application Guide. summary Displays peer summary information such as AS.10.255.255 255.

-------. LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 4: 2. Holdtime: 0. Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0.1.201. Local router ID: 1.201.1. BGP Peer Information: 3: 2. Old status: idle Total received packets: 0.0. version 0. Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0.4 . TTL 1 Remote AS: 0.0.0. version 0. Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0.-------.5 BGP status: idle.142 2: 205. Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0. Local router ID: 1.1. Local AS: 0. BGP Peer Summary Peer --------------1: 205.Alteon OS 21. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0).0.178.---------4 142 113 121 00:00:28 established 0 148 0 0 never connect Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0.23.1 . Old status: idle Total received packets: 0.0 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/peer BGP Peer information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/peer provides.5 BGP status: idle. TTL 1 Remote AS: 0.0.1. Holdtime: 0.148 Information: V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent Up/Down State . Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0.178. October 2003 „ 73 . Local AS: 0.15. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0).1.-------. LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 /info/l3/bgp/summary BGP Summary information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/summary provides.-------.1.0.

178.147 1 128 *> 205. In any AS with multiple areas.Show neighbor(s) information dbase .147 1 256 Path -------------147 148 i 0 i 147 i 147 i 147 {35} ? The 13.EGP.0. For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch.Show NSSA summary address list routes .21.Show details of virtual links nbr . All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone.178.0 205.0 205. >> BGP# dump Status codes: * valid.0.0. [OSPF Information Menu] general .Show area(s) information if . i .15.17.0 is filtered out by rrmap. The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas. The Alteon OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583. The backbone acts as the central OSPF area. known as the backbone. /info/l3/ospf OSPF Information Menu Alteon OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol.--------------.0.Show general information aindex .Show OSPF routes 74 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. refer to the OSPF section in chapter “The Configuration Menu” on page 175 and your Alteon OS Application Guide.0 205.0 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/dump Dump BGP Information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/dump provides.incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght --------------. which then distributes it to other areas as needed. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS).0 0.0. > best.---.178.IGP.147 1 256 *>i205.Alteon OS 21. ? .Database Menu sumaddr .21. e .21. October 2003 .Show interface(s) information virtual . or.0.21.0.178.178. one area must be designated as area 0.0 * 205.178.147 1 128 13.internal Origin codes: i .0.----*> 10.Show summary address list nsumadd . a loop detected.----.

If no parameter is supplied. See page 76 for a sample output. nbr <nbr router-id (A. it displays the information about all the current neighbors. dbase Displays OSPF database menu.B. See page 78 for a sample output. routes Displays OSPF routing table.0 Command Reference Table 4-14 OSPF Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays general OSPF information. If no router ID is supplied.C. If no parameter is supplied. see page 77. To view menu options. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. it displays information for all the interfaces. October 2003 „ 75 . See page 76 for a sample output. it displays area information for all the areas. if <interface number [1-256]> Displays interface information for a particular interface. virtual Displays information about all the configured virtual links. sumaddr <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays area information for a particular area index.Alteon OS 21. nsumadd <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas.D)> Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID.

12.1.10.12.10. October 2003 .10.10. Retransmit 5. Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.Alteon OS 21. 2 are =FULL state Number of areas is 2. Transit delay 1 Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4. Authentication type none 76 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.14. Dead 40.0. Poll interval 0. Hello 10.247 Started at 95 and the process uptime is 352315 Area Border Router: yes. Admin Status UP Router ID 10.10. Area 0.10. Ip Address 10.1.0. 2 are >=EXCH state.1. State DR. of which 2 are >=INIT state.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.2 Timer intervals.12.10.23.0 Authentication : none Import ASExtern : yes Number of times SPF ran : 8 Area Border Router count : 2 AS Boundary Router count : 0 LSA count : 5 LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B Summary : noSummary /info/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Information Ip Address 10.1.1.0 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/general OSPF General Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 47.80. Wait 1663. Ip Address 10.0.10. AS Boundary Router: no LS types supported are 6 External LSA count 0 External LSA checksum sum 0x0 Number of interfaces in this router is 2 Number of virtual links in this router is 1 16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 10 Database checksum sum 0x0 Total neighbors are 1.0. of which 3-transit 0-nssa Area Id : 0.

1.Network LS Database info nssa .C. October 2003 „ 77 .NSSA External LS Database info rtr . The usage of this command is as follows: a) asbrsum adv-rtr 20.B.1. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising router 20.C. b) asbrsum link_state_id 10.LS Database info for an Advertising Router asbrsum .1.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link state ID 10.D)> Takes advertising router as a parameter.D)>|<self> Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. b) the total number of LSAs for each area.Self Originated LS Database info summ . d) asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs.1.External LS Database info nw . dbsumm Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format: a) the number of LSAs of each type in each area.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.ASBR Summary LS Database info dbsumm .B.1. c) asbrsum self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs. c) the total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined.1.1.D)>|<link_state_id (A.1. d) the total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined. for example: 20.Network-Summary LS Database info all .Router LS Database info self .All Table 4-15 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage advrtr <router-id (A. asbrsum <adv-rtr (A.Alteon OS 21. ext <adv-rtr (A.C.1.D)>|<self> Displays ASBR summary LSAs.B. No parameters are required.B.1.LS Database summary ext .D)>|<link_state_id (A. Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in the LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID.C.0 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/dbase OSPF Database Information [OSPF Database Menu] advrtr .1.B.C.1.

B.1. N1 .network LS database. N2 .B.0/24 via 20.1.1. nssa <adv-rtr (A.2 E2 172.8/32 via 30.1.1. October 2003 .C.OSPF inter area.B.C.1.18.Alteon OS 21.1.D)>|<link_state_id (A.1. /info/l3/ospf/routes OSPF Information Route Codes Codes: IA .C.C.18.18.6/32 via 30.1.C.2 E2 172.1.1.B.1.2 E2 172.C.5/32 via 30.1.1.1/32 via 30.18.1.2 E2 172.B.OSPF external type 1.D)>|<link_state_id (A.1.2 78 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.2 IA 80.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.2 E2 172.1.D)>|<self> Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA.2 IA 140.0/16 via 200.1.2 E2 172. E2 .18.1.D)>|<self> Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.2 IA 150.D)>|<self> Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.D)>|<link_state_id (A. summ <adv-rtr (A.1.1.1.2 IA 100.2 E2 172.18. self Displays all the self-advertised LSAs. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.1.D)>|<self> Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.1.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.0.0 Command Reference Table 4-15 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage nw <adv-rtr (A.1.18.OSPF NSSA external type 1.0/27 via 20. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. No parameters are required.1.10.1.1.18.2 E2 172.1.B.1.1.2 IA 40. rtr <adv-rtr (A.1.3/32 via 30.7/32 via 30.C.1.B.OSPF external type 2 IA 10.B. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.1.C.0/24 via 200.0/28 via 20.1. all Displays all the LSAs.1.0/28 via 200.D)>|<link_state_id (A.4/32 via 30.1.1.2/32 via 30.OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 .

255. October 2003 „ 79 .0 3: 172.23.1.4. up vlan 1.254.31.255.3. 172.31.0 2: 172.1 255.1.80.1 lsdb limit 0 /info/l3/vrrp VRRP Information Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN.255.255.23.255. up vlan 1.255. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master.255.81 255.80.1 255.3. vlan any. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for more information on VRRP. up Default gateway information: metric strict 2: 47. based on a number of priority criteria.4.0 Command Reference /info/l3/ip IP Information Interface information: 1: 47. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address.80. If the master fails. up Current IP forwarding settings: ON. dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current OSPF settings: ON Default route none Router ID: 1.1. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.255. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.0 47.Alteon OS 21.31.22.31. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. vlan 1. 172.

backup 13. 205. October 2003 .1. prio 110.204. prio 102.2. 28: vrid 28. server 1. master 12.1. Activity status † master identifies the elected master virtual router. 13: vrid 13.0 Command Reference VRRP information: 10: vrid 10. prio 102. 254: vrid 254.202.2.210. 80 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. prio 102. „ Server status. 20. The server state identifies virtual routers that support Layer 4 services. master. backup 172. These are known as virtual server routers: any virtual router whose IP address is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. master 11. 20: vrid 20. 13.8.1.178.200. renter. proxy When virtual routers are configured.2. renter. 14: vrid 14. prio 118.1. During the election process.2. renter.2. renter. 205. the virtual router with the highest priority becomes master. backup 20. you can view the status of each virtual router using this command.200.18. server VRRP information: 1: vrid 2.200.8.1. renter. master if 27.2. master 14.21.18. prio 110.2. backup 1. 28. if if if if if if if if if if 10.200. prio 118.18.21. VRRP information includes: „ „ „ „ Virtual router number Virtual router ID and IP address Interface number Ownership status † owner identifies the preferred master virtual router. prio 118.1. master. 172. 14.200. renter.2. if 172.2. A virtual router is the owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same. renter. server 172: vrid 172.1. 10. if 2: vrid 1. 11: vrid 11. master 28. prio 110. 11. master. if 3: vrid 3. 205. 27. prio 118. prio 102. master.200. if 28. 172. prio 100. master 27. 100: vrid 100.200. renter. renter. renter. 28.100.2. backup. 27. 12. renter. 12: vrid 12.200. server 255: vrid 255. renter. 27: vrid 27. „ „ Priority value. † renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device.200. renter.1. renter.178. 1.100.178.1. † backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode. prio 100.Alteon OS 21. prio 110.1.100. renter. prio 100.

255. vlan 1. minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must be configured.0 47.255.1 255. where the virtual router shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address. vlan any.4.3.22.254. up Default gateway information: metric strict 2: 47. The use of virtual proxy routers enables redundant switches to share the same IP address.31.31. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers.255. up Current IP forwarding settings: ON.255. up vlan 1.0 Command Reference „ Proxy status.80.Alteon OS 21.31. October 2003 „ 81 .255. up vlan 1.1.23. /info/l3/dump Layer3 Dump Information IP information: AS number 0 Interface information: 1: 47.4.0 2: 172.81 255.31.0 3: 172.80.3.23.80.1 255.255.255. 172. 172. dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.255.

Show Global SLB information idshash .Show real server information virt .Session Table Information Menu real . based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms.Show port information gslb .Decode the HEX value to get the VIP and RIP synatk . server port mapping. 82 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> „ Displays Virtual Server State: Virtual server number.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /info/slb Layer 4 Information Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Alteon Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services.Show real server selected by hash or minmisses metric cookie . MAC address.Show virtual server information filt . real IP address. the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server.Show filter information port . virtual MAC address „ Virtual Port State: Virtual service or port. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for detailed information on this feature.Show IDS server selected by hash or minmisses metric bind . IP address. If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand.Show SYN attack detection information dump . see page 84. In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing. VLAN. group backup server. and health check result. it can become overutilized.Show all layer 4 information Table 4-16 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sess Displays the Session Table Information Menu.: [Server Load Balancing Information Menu] sess . each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services. real server group. With this software feature. real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays Real server number. To view menu options. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations. physical switch port. layer where health check is performed. October 2003 .

This feature requires dbind to be enabled.Alteon OS 21. real server group. cookie <16 bytes cookie value in hexadecimal format as 0XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX> Decodes the hexadecimal value to get the virtual server IP address and real server IP address. October 2003 „ 83 . group backup server. synatk Displays SYN attack detection information. and client and/or server Layer 4 activity. proxy IP address. bind <IP address> <mask> <group number> Displays the real server selected by hash or minmisses metric. see page 89. dump Displays all Layer 4 information for the switch. IP address. URL for health checks. real server port. a list of applied filters. IP address. destination port. idshash <IP address 1> <IP address 2> Displays the Intrusion Detection System server selected by hash or minmisses metric. To identify whether or not the server is under SYN attack. gslb Displays the remote switch number. and health status. for example. every two seconds. filter status. backup server. health check layer. IP subnet mask.0 Command Reference Table 4-16 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage filt <filter ID (1-2048)>|list|allow|deny|redir|nat Displays the filter number. For details. and status. port <port number> Displays the physical port number. the number of new half open sessions is examined within a set period of time. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. and real server group.

See “Session dump information in Alteon OS” on page 87 for a description of these options. 84 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.Show all session entries with real IP address sp .0 Command Reference /info/slb/sess Session Table Information [Session Table Information Menu] cip .Show all session entries with proxy port filter .Show all session entries with source port dip . flag <E|L|N|P|S|Rt|Ru|Ri|U|W> Displays all session entries with matching flag.Show all session entries with destination port pip .Show all session entries with ingress port real .Show all session entries with matching flag port . dip <Destination IP address> Displays all session entries with the destination IP address.Show all session entries on sp dump .Show all session entries with destination IP address dport . pport <proxy port> Displays all session entries with proxy port.Show all session entries with matching filter flag .Show all session entries with proxy IP address pport .Show all session entries with source IP address cport .Show all session entries help . filter <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays all session entries with matching filter. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21. cport <real port> Displays all session entries with source (client) port. pip <Proxy IP address> Displays all session entries with proxy IP address.Session entry description Table 4-17 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage cip <IP address> Displays all session entries with client’s source IP address. dport <Destination real port> Displays all session entries with destination port.

dump Displays all session entries. 01: 1.1 4586.Alteon OS 21. 1 to 13 associated with a session as identified in the above example. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.2 3567 3.3.1.1.1 http age 6 f:10 EUSPT c (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7a) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) Note: The fields. Information similar to the following may appear in a session entry dump: 3.2.3. real <IP address> Displays all session entries with real server IP address. 2. help Displays the description of the session entry.1.2. sp <port number (1-4)> Displays all session entries on switch processor.0 Command Reference Table 4-17 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays all session entries on the ingress port.1 http -> 1.1. October 2003 „ 85 . are described in “Session dump information in Alteon OS” on page 87.

205.200 44687.31.8.4. 39.2.168.1 rtsp -> 47.2.200 ftp ->172.144.19 6970. 172.12.21.3. October 2003 . 39.2.84 http -> 192.31. 172.12.1 http -> 47. the destination port shows “rtsp” and server port shows “0” L7 WCR RTSP 3.21.05: 172.81.21.31.0.31.09: 172.13 rtsp age 10 EU 3.1.2.144. 39.51 http -> 192.81.21.1 21220 -> 47.144.21.31.2. 10.16 2559.162.01: 172.2.81.8.19 1040.12.07: 10.144.31.00: 172.2.20 ftp-data age 10 E NAT 2.21.79 http age 4 L4-L7 WCR HTTP 2.00: 237.81.3.01: 172.4.Alteon OS 21.4.09: 172.21.2.11 wcr age 4 f:12 E 3.13 urlwcr age 10 f:100 EU 3.31.2.144.01: 172.24.13 21220 age 10 P The first session is RTSP TCP control connection.81.19 4586.81.215 4098.26 http NAT age 2 f:24 E Persistent session 3. 3.26 1706.1 rtsp -> 47.4.19 4586.20 ftp age 10 EU 1. 39. 172.13 0 age 10 P During client-server port negotiation.21.24.123 160.4.20.01: 172.3. 86 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.8. The second session is RTSP UDP data connection.1.4.2.19 6970.14.215 80.12.01: 172.79 urlwcr age 6 f:123 E RTSP L4-L7 RTSP 3.81.16: 172. 39.4. real server IP and server port are not shown for persistent session.01: 172.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E FTP 1.21.12.31.1 rtsp -> 47.30 age 4 EPS C:3 The destination port.200 0 172. 39. 172.215 4102. 39.0.2.19 1040.11 age 8 EP c:1 1.200 ftp-data ->172.2.10.1.31.168.01: 172.12.0 Command Reference Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications L4 HTTP 3.12.178.2.21.13 21220 age 10 P Filtering LinkLB 2.1 21220 -> 47.2.1 http -> 47.52.19 6970.

DENY or NAT instead. If the switch does not find live server. It will show ALLOW.Alteon OS 21.1 http -> 3.07: 1.2. Deny or NAT.2.2. for load balancing.1 1040.1. For example: 3.1 6970. October 2003 „ 87 .1.1 http age 10 f:11 2. 2. This field identifies the destination port from client’s TCP/UDP packet.1 http age 10 3.1.1. This field identifies the destination IP address from the client’s TCP/UDP packet.1. 2. 2. 2. This field identifies the source port from the client’s TCP/UDP packet.2.1 http-> 192. this field is the same as destination IP address (5).01: 1.2. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow. this field contains the same as the destination IP address mentioned in field (5).10 linklb age 8 f:10 E (8) Real Server IP Address Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. Deny or NAT.3. This field contains the real server IP address of the corresponding server that the switch selects to forward the client packet to.1 1706. this field also shows the real server IP address. For example: 3.01: 1. If the switch does not find a live server. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow. This field also shows the real server IP address for filtering.1 21220 age 10 P For filtering.1 rtsp -> 2.1.2.168.3.2.1 1040.0 Command Reference Session dump information in Alteon OS Field (1) SP number Description This field indicates the Switch Port number that created the session.4. (2) Ingress port (3) Source IP address (4) Source port (5) Destination IP address (6) Destination port (7a) Proxy IP address (7) Proxy Port This field identifies the TCP/UDP source port substituted by the switch. For load balancing.01: 1.1 http -> 3. This field contains the source IP address from the client’s IP packet. This field shows the physical port through which the client traffic enters the switch.2. This field contains the Proxy IP address substituted by the switch. this field contains the IP address of the real server that the switch selects to forward client packet to.3.3.1. “DENY” or “NAT” instead.1.2.2. It will show “ALLOW”.

(10) Age (11) Filter number (12) Flag This is the session timeout value. October 2003 . (13) Persistent session user count This counter indicates the number of client sessions created to associate with this persistent session. “S”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and the application is SSL session ID. “L”: Indicates the session is a link load balance session. or Cookie Pbind. For RTSP UDP session. This field indicates the session created by filtering code as a result of the IP header keys matching the filtering criteria. If no packet is received within the value specified. Fields (6). the session is freed. “W”: Indicates the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding layer 7 WCR traffic to the real server. “E”: Indicates the session is in use and will be aged out if no traffic is received within session timeout value. It is for internal use only.Alteon OS 21. “P”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and is not to be aged out. “Ru”: Indicates UDP rate limiting per client entry. “linkslb” or “nonat”.0 Command Reference Field (9) Server port Description This field is the same as the destination port (field 6) for load balancing except for the RTSP UDP session. this server port is obtained from the client-server negotiation. “Ri”: Indicates ICMP rate limiting per client entry. “idslb”. This field is the filtering application port for filtering. “Rt”: Indicates the session is TCP rate limiting per-client entry. 88 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. “wcr”. This field can be “urlwcr”. (7) and (8) cannot have persistent session. “N”: Indicates the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding client traffic to the real server. “U”: Indicates the session is L7 delay binding and switch is trying to open TCP connection to the real server.

up Virtual server state: 1: 20.1. filters: 200 filt disabled. up 20. health 3.2. up 210.Alteon OS 21.200. 1 ms.200. backup none.1. October 2003 „ 89 . vlan 1. up 20. port 8. backup none proxy enabled.101.20.20. radius snoop disabled real servers: 1: 210.1.20.2.1.1. filters: 200 idslb filt enabled. backup none. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 1: any 2: urlone 27: 20. up Port 1: 2: 3: 4: state: filt disabled. vlan 1.20. 2 ms.101. 00:03:47:07:a4:9e.20. port 6. backup none. 2 ms. group 88. vlan any 200: group 1. vlan 1. backup none. port 7. 00:01:02:c1:4b:48. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 3: urltwo 4: urlthree Redirect filter state: Action redir dport http. up 2: 210. vlan 1. filters: 80 idslb filt enabled. health 3.20.20. dbind HTTP Application: urlslb real servers: 26: 20.2. health 3.0 Command Reference /info/slb/dump Show All Layer 4 Information Real 1: 2: 26: 27: server state: 210.102. 00:01:02:71:9c:a6. 3 ms.102. filters: 50 200 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.1. 00:01:02:70:4d:4a. rport 3128.20.20. backup none. 00:60:cf:47:5c:1e virtual ports: http: rport http. health 3.2. port 1.200. health 3.20.

or auto) Link status (up or down) 90 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. any.0 Command Reference /info/link Link Status Information Port ---1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Speed Duplex -----------10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 100 full 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 100 full 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any Flow Ctrl --TX-----RX-yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Link -----down down down down up down down down down down down down down down up down down down Use this command to display link status information about each port on an Alteon Application Switch slot. or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. 100. including: „ „ „ „ „ Port number Port speed (10. or 1000) Duplex mode (half. yes. full. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21. 10/100.

0 Command Reference /info/port Port Information Port ---1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Tag --n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n RMON ---e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e PVID ---300 2 4000 4000 4000 4000 7 4000 4000 4000 11 300 300 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 BWC ----256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 NAME -------------ixia2-2 pc03p bps3 bps4 bps5 bps6 pc07f bps8 bps9 bps10 pc04u ixia2-4 ixia2-3 8600-1-14 8600-1-15 8600-1-16 8600-1-17 35k-1 35k-2 35k-3 VLAN(s) ------------------300 2 4000 4000 4000 4000 7 4000 4000 4000 11 300 300 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Port information includes: „ „ „ „ „ „ Port number Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n) Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership Whether RMON is enabled or disabled on the port Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 91 .Alteon OS 21.

It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic. October 2003 . BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information. receive higher priority versus non-critical traffic.com’ at host ’47. such as e-commerce transactions.Alteon OS 21. You can see the following information on your switch when you execute this command: Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement:enabled BWM history will be mailed in 9 minute(s) to ’abhijitk@nortelnetworks.26’ BWM history will be mailed in 9 minute(s) to ’abhijitk@nortelnetworks.81.0 Command Reference /info/bwm <contract number> Bandwidth Management Information Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications.26’ Contract Policy wTOS Traffic Num Name Prec Hard Soft Resv oTOS uTOS State Shaping 1 filter_number01 64 1 100M 1M 500K 0D 0 E D 2 filter_number02 64 1 100M 1M 500K 0D 0 E D 3 filter_number03 64 1 100M 1M 500K 0D 0 E D 4 filter_number04 64 1 100M 1M 500K 0D 0 E D NOTE – The contract number is optional. /info/security Security Information This command brings up the information about the current security settings that includes: „ „ „ „ „ rate threshold for security logging whether the out-of-order IP fragment packets have the option of allow or deny on the filters the current IP addresses in the Access Control List (ACL) the current UDP blast protection settings the current port security settings 92 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.138.com’ at host ’47.81.138.

see “How to Get Help” on page 18.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference Current security settings: seclog 128 fragment allow Current IP address ACL settings: Number Address Mask -------. For information on ordering optional software license keys. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.---------------Current UDP blast protection settings: Port security state: /info/swkey Software Enabled Keys For optional Layer 4 switching software. the information would be displayed as follows: Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Bandwidth Management Security Pack Software key information includes a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch. If you want to capture dump data to a file.---------------. This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance. depending on your configuration). Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 93 . /info/dump Information Dump Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more.

Alteon OS 21. October 2003 .0 Command Reference 94 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.

Bandwidth Management Stats Menu mp .SP-specific Stats Menu security . October 2003 . This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics.Layer 3 Stats Menu slb .Management Port Stats dump .Server Load Balancing (L4-7) Stats Menu bwm .Security Stats Menu snmp .Port Stats Menu l2 .Show SNMP stats mgmt .Dump all stats 95 315393-E.MP-specific Stats Menu sp . /stats Statistics Menu [Statistics Menu] port .Layer 2 Stats Menu l3 .CHAPTER 5 The Statistics Menu You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes.

bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Menu. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. see page 162. To view menu options. mgmt Displays interface statistics for the Management Port. To view menu options. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing (SLB) Menu. security Displays Security Statistics Menu. To view menu options. See page 173 for sample output. mp Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. Use this command to display traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. dump Dumps all switch statistics. see page 127. October 2003 . see page 152. For details. see page 164. 96 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. To view menu options. see page 174.0 Command Reference Table 5-1 Statistics Menu Options (/stats) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port. see page 158. snmp Displays SNMP Statistics. See page 170 for a sample output and description of SNMP statistics. To view menu options. l3 Displays Layer3 Statistics Menu. If you want to capture dump data to a file. To view menu options. see page 110. sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays Switch Processor-Specific Menu. Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects. see page 97. Use this command to view information on how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated.Alteon OS 21. l2 Displays Layer 2 Statistics Menu. see page 109. To view menu options. To view menu options. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command.

Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats if . ether Displays Ethernet (“dot1”) statistics for the port.Show RMON stats clear . rmon Displays RMON statistics for the port. See page 104 for a sample output and the description of statistics.Show bridging ("dot1") stats ether . clear This command clears all the statistics on the port. See page 102 for a sample output and the description of statistics. if Displays interface statistics for the port.Clear all port stats Table 5-2 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port) Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. See page 98 for a sample output and the description of statistics.Alteon OS 21. See page 105 for a sample output and the description of statistics. [Port Statistics Menu] brg .Show interface ("if") stats ip . See page 106 for a sample output and the description of statistics. October 2003 „ 97 .Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats link . ip Displays IP statistics for the port.Show link stats rmon . link Displays link statistics for the port. See page 99 for a sample output and the description of statistics.0 Command Reference /stats/port <port number> Port Statistics Menu This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics include SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects.

The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function. it indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges. it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent. filtered) by the Forwarding Process. It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges. Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is. The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state. including bridge management frames.0 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/brg Bridging Statistics This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port. Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: dot1PortOutFrames: dot1PortInDiscards: dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: dot1StpPortForwardTransitions: 63242584 63277826 0 0 NA NA 0 Table 5-3 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg) Statistics dot1PortInFrames Description The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment.Alteon OS 21. If this counter is increasing. If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing. The number of frames discarded by this port due to an excessive size. which have been or would have been learnt. October 2003 . dot1PortOutFrames dot1PortInDiscards dot1TpLearnedEntry Discards dot1BasePortDelay ExceededDiscards dot1BasePortMtu ExceededDiscards dot1StpPortForward Transitions 98 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function. The total number of Forwarding Database entries. but have been discarded due to a lack of space to store them in the Forwarding Database. The number of frames discarded by this port due to excessive transit delay through the bridge. including bridge management frames.

This count does not include frames received with frametoo-long or frame-too-short errors. dot3StatsFCSErrors Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user). Note: Coding errors detected by the physical layer for speeds above 10 Mb/s will cause the frame to fail FCS check. October 2003 „ 99 . counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are.3 Layer Management.0 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/ether Ethernet Statistics This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: dot3StatsFCSErrors: dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsSQETestErrors: dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: dot3StatsLateCollisions: dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]: 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsAlignment Errors Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user).Alteon OS 21. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. according to the conventions of IEEE 802.

or ifOutBroadcastPkts.2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit/s system. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. ifOutMulticastPkts. or ifOutBroadcastPkts. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision. section 7.31998 Edition. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sub layer for a particular interface. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of other collision-related statistics. dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames dot3StatsSQETestErrors dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions dot3StatsLateCollisions 100 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object. A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy. The SQE TEST ERROR is set in accordance with the rules for the verification of the SQE detection mechanism in the PLS Carrier Sense Function as described in IEEE Std. Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrame object.0 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames Description A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.4. ifOutMulticastPkts. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.Alteon OS 21.2.802. The count represented by an instance of this object does not include frames involved in collisions. The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than one slotTime into the transmission of a packet. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. October 2003 .6. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts.

October 2003 „ 101 . The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user).0 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsExcessive Collisions Description A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions. or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object. an instance of this object may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented at most once per transmission attempt. The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a particular interface. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object.Alteon OS 21. even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a transmission attempt. the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. In particular. A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object. dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors dot3StatsFrameTooLongs dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.3 Layer Management. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. an instance of this object may represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. In particular.

which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. ifHCInUcastPkts ifHCInBroadcastPkts ifHCInMulticastPkts 102 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sublayer. including the MAC header and FCS. Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters Octets: 51697080313 UcastPkts: 65356399 BroadcastPkts: 0 MulticastPkts: 0 Discards: 0 Errors: 0 ifHCOut Counters 51721056808 65385714 6516 0 0 0 Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCInOctets Description The number of octets in valid MAC frames received on the interface. The number of packets delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub) layer. The number of packets. No other instance of dot3CollFrequencies would be incremented in this example. /stats/port <port number>/if Interface Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. October 2003 . For example.0 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3CollFrequencies Description A count of individual MAC frames for which the transmission (successful or otherwise) on a particular interface occurs after the frame has experienced exactly the number of collisions specified by the index. For a MAC layer protocol.layer. a frame which is transmitted after experiencing exactly 4 collisions would be indicated by incrementing only dot3CollFrequencies [4]. this includes both Group and Functional addresses. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub. which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.layer.Alteon OS 21. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub. The number of packets. This does include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames received on this interface.

dot3StatsFrameTooLongs. including those that were discarded or not sent. dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions. This does not include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface. and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer. dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors and dot3StatsSymbolErrors. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. For a MAC layer protocol. dot3StatsLateCollisions. The number of octets transmitted in valid MAC frames on this interface. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. this includes both Group and Functional addresses.0 Command Reference Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCInDiscards Description The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. including the MAC header and FCS. and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. The sum for this interface of: dot3statsSQETestErrors.Alteon OS 21. including those that were discarded or not sent. including those that were discarded or not sent. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors and dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. The sum for this interface of dot3statsAlignmentErrors. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. ifHCInErrors ifHCOutOctets ifHCOutUcastPkts ifHCOutBroadcastPkts ifHCOutMulticastPkts ifHCOutDiscards ifHCOutErrors Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. dot3StatsFCSErrors. October 2003 „ 103 .

The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. October 2003 . this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos ipInDiscards ipInDelivers ipTtlExceeds 104 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination. The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. including those received in error.0 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/ip Interface Protocol Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. this counter will include only those packets which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch). as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. but which were discarded (for example. The number of IP datagram for which an ICMP TTL exceeded message was sent. This count includes invalid addresses (for example. The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP).0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example. IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipTtlExceeds: ipLANDattacks: 0 0 0 0 0 0 ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: 0 0 Table 5-6 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. for lack of buffer space).Route option processing was successful. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways. 0.0. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header’s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). and the Source.Alteon OS 21. Class E).

0 Command Reference Table 5-6 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipLANDattacks Description The number of packets that have the same source and destination IP address.Alteon OS 21. Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 4 Table 5-7 Link Statistics (/stats/port/link) Statistics linkStateChange Description The total number of link state changes. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. /stats/port <port number>/link Link Statistics This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port. October 2003 „ 105 .

RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: 0 3727038769 69869242 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 102426 6050515 12293234 24586063 49171870 47539775 Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsDrop Events Description The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.0 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/rmon RMON Statistics This menu option enables you to display the remote monitor statistics of the selected port. and the number of seconds in the interval is Interval. Note that this number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped. If greater precision is desired.4 . These values are used to calculate the utilization as follows: Pkts u 9.Alteon OS 21. This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of utilization (which is the percent utilization of the ethernet segment).6 + 6. it is just the number of times this condition has been detected. The differences in the sampled values are Pkts and Octets. respectively. The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval.

8 . + Octets u 0.

Utilization = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Interval u 10 000 The result of this equation is the percent value of utilization. October 2003 . etherStatsOctets 106 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.

2. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).0 Command Reference Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsPkts Description The total number of packets (including bad packets. but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. (A runt is a packet that is less than 64 bytes. and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits.) The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits. but including FCS octets).3 section 8. October 2003 „ 107 . This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.5 (10Base-5) and section 10. broadcast packets.Alteon OS 21. but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. Note that this does not include multicast packets. but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.1. These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms. and multicast packets) received. Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE802. The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 milliseconds and 150 milliseconds. etherStatsBroadcastPkts etherStatsMulticastPkts etherStatsCRCAlign Errors etherStatsUndersizePkts etherStatsOversizePkts etherStatsFragments etherStatsJabbers Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. inclusive.1.4 (10Base-2). The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.3. but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets. The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.

Thus probes placed on a station and a repeater. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).4 (10Base-T) of IEEE standard 802. etherStatsPkts64Octets etherStatsPkts65to127Octets etherStatsPkts128to255Octets etherStatsPkts256to511Octets etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets 108 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.1.3 defines a collision as the simultaneous presence of signals on the DO and RD circuits (transmitting and receiving at the same time). in the receive mode. Section 8.1. Probe location plays a much smaller role when considering 10Base-T.2. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).3k) plus receiver collisions observed on any coax segments to which the repeater is connected.1.0 Command Reference Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsCollisions Description The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.3. if three or more stations are transmitting simultaneously.3 (10Base-5) and section 10. Note also that an RMON probe inside a repeater should ideally report collisions between the repeater and one or more other hosts (transmit collisions as defined by IEEE 802.Alteon OS 21. Thus a probe placed on a repeater port could record more collisions than a probe connected to a station on the same segment would.3 (10Base-2) of IEEE standard 802. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).3 states that a station must detect a collision. should report the same number of collisions. A repeater port must detect a collision when two or more stations are transmitting simultaneously. 14. A 10Base-T station can only detect collisions when it is transmitting. October 2003 . The value returned will depend on the location of the RMON probe.2. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

including the number of new entries. Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database. Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database. Number of entries found or created in the Forwarding Database. finds. October 2003 „ 109 . lookup fails find fails overflows Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Number of successful searches in the Forwarding Database.0 Command Reference /stats/l2 Layer 2 Statistics Menu [Layer 2 Statistics Menu] fdb . and unsuccessful searches. Number of entries overflowing the Forwarding Database. Number of entry lookups in the Forwarding Database. FDB statistics are described in the following table: Table 5-9 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/l2/fdb) Statistic creates current lookups finds find_or_c’s deletes hiwat Description Number of entries created in the Forwarding Database.Alteon OS 21. Number of entries deleted from the Forwarding Database.Show FDB stats /stats/l2/fdb FDB Statistics FDB statistics: creates: current: lookups: finds: find_or_c’s: 30503 83 511889 21801 36140 deletes: hiwat: lookup fails: find fails: overflows: 30420 855 1126 0 0 This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database. Number of unsuccessful searches made in the Forwarding Database. Number of search failures in the Forwarding Database.

October 2003 .Show TCP stats udp .Show UDP stats ifclear .Dump layer 3 stats Table 5-10 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays OSPF statistics Menu.Show ARP stats vrrp .Alteon OS 21.Show IP stats route .OSPF Statistics Menu ip .Show DNS stats icmp . but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) See page 120 for sample output. arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics. See page 121 for sample output. See page 111 for sample output. route Displays route statistics. See page 116 for sample output.Show VRRP stats dns .Show route stats arp . vrrp When virtual routers are configured. icmp Displays ICMP statistics. ip Displays IP statistics. See page 118 for sample output.Show IP interface ("if") stats tcp . See page 121 for sample output.0 Command Reference /stats/l3 Layer 3 Statistics Menu [Layer 3 Statistics Menu] ospf .Show ICMP stats if . 110 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Displays Domain Name Server/System (DNS) statistics.Clear IP interface ("if") stats ipclear . See page 119 for sample output. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: „ „ „ dns Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received.Clear IP stats dump .

See page 125 for sample output. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging Layer 3 switch performance. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. dump Dumps all Layer 3 switch statistics. See page 123 for sample output. See page 126 for sample output. udp Displays UDP statistics. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays interface statistics. ipclear Clears IP statistics. tcp Displays TCP statistics. See page 112 for sample output and details.Alteon OS 21. aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays area index statistics. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP statistics.Show area(s) stats if .Show global stats aindex . ifclear Clears IP interface statistics. If you want to capture dump data to a file. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP interface statistics. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. October 2003 „ 111 .0 Command Reference Table 5-10 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays IP interface statistics for the management processors. /stats/l3/ospf OSPF Statistics Menu [OSPF stats Menu] general .Show interface(s) stats Table 5-11 OSPF Statistics Menu (/stats/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays global statistics.

OSPF stats ---------Rx/Tx Stats: Pkts hello database ls requests ls acks ls updates Nbr change stats: hello start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down Timers kickoff hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export Rx -------0 23 4 3 7 9 Tx -------0 518 12 1 7 7 Intf change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer backup nbr change 2 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 2 0 0 1 4 2 0 0 2 0 5 514 1028 0 0 0 0 0 112 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf/general OSPF Global Statistics The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

October 2003 „ 113 . The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.Alteon OS 21. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.0 Command Reference Table 5-12 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) Statistics Rx/Tx Stats: Rx Pkts The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Description Tx Pkts Rx Hello Tx Hello Rx Database Tx Database Rx ls Requests Tx ls Requests Rx ls Acks Tx ls Acks Rx ls Updates Tx ls Updates Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

in the initial state of a neighbor conversation) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave relationship has been negotiated. Description Start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down 114 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. in an adjacency’s final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets. Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF areas. The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this router and other neighboring routers. The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received that either: a) Has an unexpected DD sequence number b) Unexpectedly has the init bit set c) Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a Database Description packet. October 2003 . The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors.0 Command Reference Table 5-12 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics Nbr Change Stats: hello The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is. an indication that Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. and sequence numbers have been exchanged. in which this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas. The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all OSPF areas and interfaces.Alteon OS 21. across all OSPF areas and interfaces.

The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired. The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer has been fired.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference Table 5-12 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics Intf Change Stats: hello down loop The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas. The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired. Description unloop wait timer backup nbr change Timers Kickoff: hello The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of interfaces. October 2003 „ 115 . The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all OSPF areas and interfaces. connected to the attached network in all OSPF areas. indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup) Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas. The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired. The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas. The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces.

The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways. errors discovered in processing their IP options. and so forth.Route option processing was successful. version number mismatch. 0. The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers.0 Command Reference /stats/l3/ip IP Statistics IP statistics: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipOutDiscards: ipReasmReqds: ipReasmFails: ipFragFails: ipRoutingDiscards: ipReasmTimeout: 3115873 35447 500504 2334166 4 0 0 0 0 5 ipInHdrErrors: ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: ipOutRequests: ipOutNoRoutes: ipReasmOKs: ipFragOKs: ipFragCreates: ipDefaultTTL: 1 0 0 1010542 4 0 0 0 255 Table 5-13 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. other format errors.0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example. which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch). including those received in error. including bad checksums. this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. Class E). October 2003 . time-to-live exceeded. this counter will include only those packets.0. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination. and the Source. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header’s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch).Alteon OS 21. ipInHdrErrors ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos 116 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. This count includes invalid addresses (for example. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination.

The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. but which were discarded (for example. and so forth). Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down.0 Command Reference Table 5-13 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInDiscards Description The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams. Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. which meet this no-route criterion. The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity (the switch). ipInDelivers ipOutRequests ipOutDiscards ipOutNoRoutes ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails ipFragCreates Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. but which were discarded (for example.assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out. The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity (the switch) but could not be. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams. Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion. The number of IP datagrams successfully re. The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity (the switch).assembled. The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity (the switch).Alteon OS 21. The number of failures detected by the IP re. because their Don’t Fragment flag was set. October 2003 „ 117 . for lack of buffer space). errors. The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination. The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). for example.

The maximum number of routes that are supported.Alteon OS 21. The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch). 118 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity (the switch). The total number of RIP advertisement packets sent.0 Command Reference Table 5-13 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipRoutingDiscards Description The number of routing entries. ipDefaultTTL ipReasmTimeout /stats/l3/route Route Statistics Route statistics: ipRoutesCur: ipRoutesMax: RIP statistics: ripInPkts: ripDiscardPkts: BGP statistics: bgpInPkts: bgpBadPkts: bgpRoutesAdded: bgpRoutesCur: bgpRoutesIgnored: 7 1024 ipRoutesHighWater: 7 0 ripOutPkts: 0 ripRoutesAgedOut: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 bgpOutPkts: bgpSessFailures: bgpRoutesRemoved: bgpRoutesFailed: bgpRoutesFiltered: 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-14 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route) Statistics ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax RIP statistics: ripInPkts ripOutPkts The total number of good RIP advertisement packets received. October 2003 . The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table. whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol. Description The total number of outstanding routes in the route table. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries. The maximum number of seconds. which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid.

October 2003 „ 119 . The total number of failed sessions. The total number of current BGP routes. The total number of routes that were added to the routing table.0 Command Reference Table 5-14 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route) Statistics ripDiscardPkts Description The total number of RIP advertisement packets received that were dropped. bgpRoutesFiltered /stats/l3/arp ARP statistics This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics. The total number of routes ignored because the peer was not connected locally or multihop was not configured. ARP statistics: arpEntriesCur: arpEntriesMax: 3 4096 arpEntriesHighWater: 4 Table 5-15 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp) Statistics arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax Description The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table. The total number of routes that were removed from the routing table. The total number of BGP packets sent. The total number of routes dropped by the filter. ripRoutesAgedOut BGP statistics: bgpInPkts bgpOutPkts bgpBadPkts bgpSessFailures bgpRoutesAdded bgpRoutesRemoved bgpRoutesCur bgpRoutesFailed bgpRoutesIgnored The total number of BGP packets received. The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported. The total number of BGP packets dropped. The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table. The total number of routes learned via RIP that has aged out. The total number of BGP routes that failed to add in the routing table. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21.

October 2003 . The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped. 120 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master.Alteon OS 21. The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent. based on a number of priority criteria. When virtual routers are configured. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: „ „ „ Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received.0 Command Reference /stats/l3/vrrp VRRP Statistics Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed: VRRP statistics: vrrpInAdvers: vrrpOutAdvers: 0 0 vrrpBadAdvers: 0 Table 5-16 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp) Statistics vrrpInAdvers vrrpBadAdvers vrrpOutAdvers Description The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been received. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.

The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted. October 2003 „ 121 . Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.0 Command Reference /stats/l3/dns DNS Statistics This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics. DNS statistics: dnsInRequests: dnsBadRequests: 0 0 dnsOutRequests: 0 Table 5-17 DNS Statistics (/stats/l3/dns) Statistics dnsInRequests dnsOutRequests dnsBadRequests Description The total number of DNS request packets that have been received.Alteon OS 21. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped. /stats/l3/icmp ICMP Statistics ICMP statistics: icmpInMsgs: icmpInDestUnreachs: icmpInParmProbs: icmpInRedirects: icmpInEchoReps: icmpInTimestampReps: icmpInAddrMaskReps: icmpOutErrors: icmpOutTimeExcds: icmpOutSrcQuenchs: icmpOutEchos: icmpOutTimestamps: icmpOutAddrMasks: 245802 41 0 0 244350 0 0 0 0 0 253777 0 0 icmpInErrors: icmpInTimeExcds: icmpInSrcQuenchs: icmpInEchos: icmpInTimestamps: icmpInAddrMasks: icmpOutMsgs: icmpOutDestUnreachs: icmpOutParmProbs: icmpOutRedirects: icmpOutEchoReps: icmpOutTimestampReps: icmpOutAddrMaskReps: 1393 0 0 18 0 0 253810 15 0 0 18 0 0 Table 5-18 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInMsgs Description The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received.

The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors. and so forth). The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received. this object will always be zero. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received. October 2003 . The total number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) attempted to send.0 Command Reference Table 5-18 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInErrors Description The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received. icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInTimeExcds icmpInParmProbs icmpInSrcQuenchs icmpInRedirects icmpInEchos icmpInEchoReps icmpInTimestamps icmpInTimestampReps icmpInAddrMasks icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutMsgs icmpOutErrors icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutRedirects 122 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. For a host. bad length. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received. since hosts do not send redirects. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full.Alteon OS 21. The number of ICMP Redirect messages received. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that contribute to this counter’s value. stop sending data) messages received. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received. stop sending data) messages sent. The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram.

ifInUcastPkts ifInNUCastPkts ifInDiscards Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. /stats/l3/if <interface number> Interface Statistics IP interface 1 statistics: ifInOctets: 48948386 ifInNUCastPkts: 167895 ifInErrors: 0 ifOutOctets: 27100789 ifOutNUcastPkts: 218652 ifOutErrors: 0 ifInUcastPkts: ifInDiscards: ifInUnknownProtos: ifOutUcastPkts: ifOutDiscards: ifStateChanges 220553 0 0 441938 0 1 Table 5-19 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifInOctets Description The total number of octets received on the interface. This object is deprecated in favor of ifInMulticastPkts and ifInBroadcastPkts. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent. which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent. The number of packets. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.0 Command Reference Table 5-18 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpOutEchos icmpOutEchoReps icmpOutTimestamps icmpOutTimestampReps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpOutAddrMaskReps Description The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. The number of packets. The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.Alteon OS 21. including framing characters. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. October 2003 „ 123 . delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer). delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer).

including framing characters. ifInUnknownProtos ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifStateChanges 124 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The number of outbound packets. which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. including those that were discarded or not sent. For packet-oriented interfaces. the number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. the number of outbound transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces which support protocol multiplexing the number of transmission units received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. this counter will always be 0. and which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. The number of times an interface has transitioned from either down to up or from up to down. The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface. For packet-oriented interfaces. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces.0 Command Reference Table 5-19 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifInErrors Description For packet-oriented interfaces. the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. For any interface which does not support protocol multiplexing. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. October 2003 . For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. This object is deprecated in favor of ifOutMulticastPkts and ifOutBroadcastPkts. the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. including those that were discarded or not sent.Alteon OS 21.

The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. measured in milliseconds. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state.Alteon OS 21. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. tcpRtoMin tcpRtoMax tcpMaxConn tcpActiveOpens tcpPassiveOpens tcpAttemptFails Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. October 2003 „ 125 . an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state.0 Command Reference /stats/l3/tcp TCP Statistics TCP statistics: tcpRtoAlgorithm: tcpRtoMax: tcpActiveOpens: tcpAttemptFails: tcpInSegs: tcpRetransSegs: tcpCurBuff: tcpOutRsts: 4 240000 252214 528 756401 0 0 417 tcpRtoMin: tcpMaxConn: tcpPassiveOpens: tcpEstabResets: tcpOutSegs: tcpInErrs: tcpCurConn: 0 512 7 4 756655 0 3 Table 5-20 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpRtoAlgorithm Description The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets. In particular. In particular. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state. measured in milliseconds. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). this object should contain the value -1. The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity (the switch) can support.

The total number of segments retransmitted .that is. including those received in error. bad TCP checksums).0 Command Reference Table 5-20 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpEstabResets Description The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSEWAIT state.Alteon OS 21. The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port. including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets. tcpInSegs tcpOutSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpInErrs tcpCurBuff tcpCurConn tcpOutRsts /stats/l3/udp UDP Statistics UDP statistics: udpInDatagrams: udpInErrors: 54 0 udpOutDatagrams: udpNoPorts: 43 1578077 Table 5-21 UDP Statistics (/stats/l3/udp) Statistics udpInDatagrams udpOutDatagrams udpInErrors Description The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch. The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch). October 2003 . The total number of segments sent. The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag. The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port. This count includes segments received on currently established connections. the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets. The total number of segments received. udpNoPorts 126 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened. The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol stack. The total number of segments received in error (for example.

Clear non-operational Server Load Balancing stats aux .Show Global SLB stats layer7 .Show Layer 7 stats ssl . see page 132. real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the following real server statistics: „ „ „ „ „ Number of times the real server has failed its health checks Number of sessions currently open on the real server Total sessions the real server was assigned Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server Real server transmit/receive octets See page 129 for sample output.Show FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats rtsp .Show real server stats group . Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.Show DNS SLB stats wap .Show virtual server stats filt . Real server transmit/receive octets. see page 129.Show real server group stats virt .Show WAP SLB stats maint . To view menu options.Dump all SLB statistics Table 5-22 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the server load balancing statistics menu. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group. group <real server group number (1-256)> Displays the following real server group statistics: „ „ „ „ Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group.0 Command Reference /stats/slb Load Balancing Statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu] sp . For per-service octet counters.Alteon OS 21.Show RTSP SLB stats dns .Show SSL SLB stats ftp . See page 133 for sample output.Show filter stats gslb . October 2003 „ 127 .Show maintenance stats clear . Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server.Show auxiliary session table stats dump .SLB Switch SP Stats Menu real .

resetting them to zero. Real server transmit/receive octets. ssl Displays SSL server load balancing statistics. See page 133 for sample output. wap Displays WAP SLB statistics. All related SNMP counters. See page 145 for sample output. layer7 Displays Layer 7 statistics.Alteon OS 21. dns Displays DNS SLB statistics. See page 137 for sample output. October 2003 . See page 142 for sample output. rtsp Displays RTSP SLB statistics. To view the statistics reset by this command. maint Displays SLB maintenance statistics. see page 133. Displays auxiliary session table statistics. See page 141 for sample output. See page 145 for sample output. See page 134 for sample output. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the total number of times any filter has been used. ftp Displays FTP SLB parsing and NAT statistics. See page 147 for sample output. see page 134. refer to Table 5-40 on page 150. gslb Displays the Global SLB Statistics Menu. See page 149 for sample output. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. clear [y|n] Clears all non-operating SLB statistics on the Alteon Application Switch. For more information.0 Command Reference Table 5-22 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the following virtual server statistics: „ „ „ „ Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server. This command does not reset the switch and does not affect the following counters: „ „ aux Counters required for Layer 4 and Layer 7 operation (such as current real server sessions). 128 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. For per-service octet counters. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server.

maint Displays the SP maintenance statistics.0 Command Reference Table 5-22 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage dump Dumps all switch SLB statistics.Show filter stats maint . To save dump data to a file. clear Deletes all the SP statistics. /stats/slb/sp Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing SP Statistics Menu] real . aux Displays the statistics of the auxiliary session table. See page 131 for a sample output. October 2003 „ 129 .Show real server stats group . Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command.Show real server group stats virt . See page 130 for a sample output.Show virtual server stats filt .Alteon OS 21.Show auxiliary session table stats clear . See page 130 for a sample output. See page 130 for a sample output.Clear SP stats Table 5-23 SP Statistics Menu options (/stats/slb/sp) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays real server statistics of the switch port. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance.Show maintenance stats aux . filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays statistics of the filter. See page 131 for a sample output. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays real server group statistics of the switch port. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays statistics of the virtual server.

--------------.-------.100.-------.---------.---------.--------------.10.-------.15 20 77 12 ---.100.-------1 200.Alteon OS 21.--------------.10.10.-------200.100.---------.15 20 77 12 ---.10.14 20 60 9 2 200.-------1 200.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp/real <real server number> SP Real Server Statistics Port 1 Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Octets: 3 3 24 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/group <real group server number> SP Real Group Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.100 40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 130 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.10.-------40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/virt <virtual server number> SP Virtual Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.100.-------.--------------.100. October 2003 .---------.14 20 60 9 2 200.

October 2003 „ 131 .Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/filt <filter number> SP Filter Statistics Poet 1 Filter 30 stats: Total Firings: 2 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/maint SP Maintenance Statistics SP 1 SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: Non TCP/IP frames: TCP fragments: UDP datagrams: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: Total IP fragment sessions: IP fragment sessions: IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: 523264 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 /stats/slb/real <real server number> Real Server SLB Statistics Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Highest sessions: Octets 129 65478 4343 523824000 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.

Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Per Service Octet Counters For each load-balanced real server. two groups would be configured: one for handling HTTP and one for handling FTP.1. Configure a separate IP address for each service on each server being load balanced. The total number of octets sent by the particular real server. you can configure IP address 10. Thus. you can accomplish this through the following configuration: 1. two real servers would be configured for the physical server (representing each real service). The octet counters are provided per server–not per service.20 for HTTP services. configure one real server group for each type of service. Table 5-24 Real Server SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/real) Statistics Current sessions Description The total number of outstanding sessions that are established to the particular real server. 132 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. On the Alteon Application Switch. 10 real servers would have to be configured: five for the HTTP services on each physical server. 3. These counters are then added to report the total octets for each virtual server. and 10.0 Command Reference NOTE – Octets are provided per server. The highest number of sessions ever recorded for the particular real server. On the Alteon Application Switch. 2.1. in keeping with our example. If there were five physical servers providing the two services (HTTP and FTP).21 for FTP services on the same physical server. Continuing the example above. unless configured as described in “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 132. and group each appropriate real server IP address into the group that handles the specific service. October 2003 . For instance. If you need octet counters on a perservice basis.1.1.Alteon OS 21. the octet counters represent the combined number of transmit and receive bytes (octets). configure a real server with a real IP address for each service above. not per service. and five for the FTP services on each physical server. The total number of sessions that have been established to the particular real server.

10.0 Command Reference 4.10.-------1 200.--------------. Virtual server statistics include the following: Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.100. below the real server IP addresses.14 20 60 9 2 200.---------.-------.100.10.---------.-------1 200.10.15 20 77 12 ---.--------------.-------40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 Real server group statistics include the following: „ „ „ „ Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group. /stats/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Statistics Virtual server 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group.15 20 77 12 ---.20 40 309 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 NOTE – The virtual server IP address is shown on the last line.-------.---------.100.10.Alteon OS 21. /stats/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.--------------. For per-service octet counters. Real server transmit/receive octets.--------------.---------.-------200.100.100.14 20 60 9 2 200. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. see the procedure on “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 132. Configure a virtual server and add the appropriate services to that virtual server. October 2003 „ 133 .-------.-------.

Show Real server Global SLB stats group . For per-service octet counters.Show Virtual server Global SLB stats maint . see page 135.Show Real server group Global SLB stats virt . Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen. maint To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen. Real server transmit/receive octets. see page 135.Alteon OS 21. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server. 134 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. see page 135. To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen.0 Command Reference „ „ „ „ Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server. /stats/slb/gslb Global SLB Statistics Menu [Global SLB Statistics Menu] real . group <real server group number (1-1024)> To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen. October 2003 .Show Global SLB maintenance stats Table 5-25 Global SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Where the real server number represents the real server ID on this switch. see page 136. /stats/slb/filt <filter number> Filter SLB Statistics Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 1011 You can obtain the total number of times any filter has been used. see “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 132. under which the remote server is configured.

54 1240 2 205.55 16 21190 205.55 4 31032 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.13.------------. the following statistics can be viewed: „ „ Number of DNS hand-offs sent by the remote real server/real server group Number of HTTP redirects sent by the remote real server/real server group /stats/slb/gslb/group <group number> Real Server Group Global SLB Statistics Real server group 1 Global SLB stats: Real server IP address DNS Handoffs ----------.178.-----------------205.Alteon OS 21.---------------1 205.13.178.-----http v1 http r1 telnet v1 Global SLB stats: IP address Response time Min sessions avail --------------.--------------.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb/real <real server number> Real Server Global SLB Statistics Real server 1 global stats: DNS handoffs: HTTP redirects: 3210 12 For any remote real server configured for Global Server Load Balancing.178.13.178.13.--------------.54 10 24120 205. October 2003 „ 135 .13.---------------Totals 1848 HTTP Redirects --------------30 12 --------------42 Real server group global statistics include the following: „ „ „ Number of DNS hand-offs to each remote real server in the group Number of HTTP redirects to each remote real server in the group Total DNS hand-offs and HTTP redirects to the remote real servers in the group /stats/slb/gslb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics Virtual server 1 Service Server ------.223 608 ----------.178.

This number will change as client traffic loads change. /stats/slb/gslb/maint Global SLB Maintenance Statistics Global SLB maintenance stats: Updates received: Bad updates received: Bad requests received: 0 0 0 Global SLB maintenance statistics include the following: „ „ The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) updates/packets received from remote sites. The number of bad/dropped client HTTP requests. † v# represents a local virtual server number † r# represents a remote site. „ „ „ IP address of the server Response time: the average time (current weight) that each service takes to respond to information exchanges with its peers. The time is specified in ticks of 65 milliseconds. the number represents the real server ID on this switch. Minimum sessions available: the current number of sessions available for serving client requests. Bad updates or dropped packets usually indicate that there is a GSLB switch configuration problem. Client HTTP GET request packets that do not contain the entire URL are considered bad and are dropped. check your syslog for configuration error messages. „ 136 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Virtual server global statistics include the following: „ „ Service: type of service running on the virtual server Server: type of server configuration and server ID number. Since each remote sites is configured on its peers as if it were a real server (with certain special properties). October 2003 . If bad updates or dropped packets occur.Alteon OS 21. or as real servers under the virtual server or remote sites go in or out of service. under which the remote server is configured. The number of bad/dropped DSSP updates/packets received from remote sites.

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu [Layer 7 Statistics Menu] redir .Show Layer 7 Maintenance stats Table 5-26 SLB Layer 7 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/layer7) Command Syntax & Usage redir Displays URL Redirection statistics.Show URL Redirection stats str . str Displays SLB string statistics. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Total origin server hits The total number of HTTP requests forwarded to the origin server. /stats/slb/layer7/redir Layer7 Redirection Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total URL based web cache redirection stats: cache server hits: origin server hits: straight to origin server hits: none-GETs hits: ’Cookie: ’ hits: no-cache hits: RTSP cache server hits: RTSP origin server hits: HTTP redirection hits: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-27 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Description Total cache server hits The total number of HTTP requests redirected to the cache server. October 2003 „ 137 . See page 138 for a sample output. Total straight to ori. maint Displays Layer 7 maintenance statistics. See page 137 for a sample output. Total none-GETs hits The total number of none GET requests forwarded to the origin server. See page 139 for a sample output.The total number of HTTP requests forwarded from straight to the gin server hits origin server.Show SLB String stats maint .

[nopqrstuvwxyz]*.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*. The total number of instances that are load-balanced due to matching of the particular URL ID.com 4 www.junk. /stats/slb/layer7/str Layer 7 SLB String Statistics SLB String stats: ID SLB String 1 any 2 www.com 5 www.[abcdefghijklm]*.org Hits 1527115 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-28 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/str) Statistics ID SLB String Hits Description The user-defined strings being used in URL matching. The total number of requests containing no-cache header forwarded to the origin server.com 6 www.0 Command Reference Table 5-27 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Total ’Cookie:’ hits Total no-cache hits Total RTSP cache server hits Total RTSP origin server hits Total HTTP redirection hits Description The total number of cookie requests forwarded to the origin server. The total number of RTSP requests forwarded to the origin server. The total number of RTSP requests redirected to the cache server.Alteon OS 21.[abcdefjhijklm]*. The total number of HTTP requests that were redirected by redirection filter.org 7 www. October 2003 .com 3 www.abc. 138 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.

Ubufs: Max sessions per bucket: 0 Max frames per session: Max bytes buffered (sess): 0 1310 1310 1310 1310 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-29 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Clients reset by switch on client side Description The number of reset frames sent to the client by the switch during server connection termination. This means that when the switch could not connect to the real sever and the client’s retries exceeded the threshold due to delayed binding. The total number of connection swapping between different real servers in supporting multiple HTTP/1.1: 0 Invalid HTTP methods: 0 Aged delayed binding sessions: 0 Half open connections: 0 Switch retries: 0 Random early drops: 0 Requests exceeded 4500 bytes: 0 Invalid 3-way handshakes: 0 Exceeded max frame size: 0 Current SP[1] memory units: 1310 Lowest: Current SP[2] memory units: 1310 Lowest: Current SP[3] memory units: 1310 Lowest: Current SP[4] memory units: 1310 Lowest: Current SP memory units: 5240 Current SEQ buffer entries: 0 Highest: Current Data buffer use: 0 Highest: Current SP buffer entries: 0 Highest: Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc: 0 Total SEQ Buffer Allocs: 0 Total SEQ Frees: Total Data Buffer Allocs: 0 Total Data Frees: Alloc Fails . Clients reset by switch on server side Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1.1 client requests.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7/maint Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics Layer 7 maintenance stats: Clients reset by switch on client side: 0 Clients reset by switch on server side: 0 Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 139 .Seq buffers: 0 Alloc Fails .1 Invalid HTTP methods Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The number of reset frames sent to the server by the switch during server connection termination due to delayed binding. the switch will send a reset frame to the client to terminate the connection.0 The total number of HTTP requests that contain invalid methods sent by the client.

Switch retries Random early drops Requests exceeded 4500 bytes Invalid 3-way handshakes Exceeded max frame size Current SP memory units Current SEQ buffer entries Highest SEQ buffer entries Current Data buffer use Highest Data buffer use Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc Total SEQ Buffer Allocs Total SEQ Frees Total Data Buffer Allocs Total Data Frees 140 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.2 The total number of sequence buffer allocations.2 The total of number buffers freed. The total number of sequence buffer is freed. The total number of buffers allocated to store client request. The highest number of sequence buffers ever used. The total numbers of outstanding TCP connections that are half opened. The total number of dropped frames because of invalid 3-way hand shakes. The number of outstanding sequence buffers used.0 Command Reference Table 5-29 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Aged delayed binding sessions Half open connections Description The total number of aged delayed binding sessions caused by failed connection initialization between the switch and the server. The total number of sequence buffer allocated. It is incremented when the switch responds to TCP SYN packet and decremented upon receiving TCP SYN ACK packet from the requester. The total number of SYN frames dropped when the buffer is low. The number of outstanding data buffers used. October 2003 . The current available SP memory units. The highest number of data buffers ever used. The total number of GET requests that exceeded 4500 bytes. The total number of switch retries to connect to the real server. The total number of switch-generated frames that exceeded the maximum allowed frame size.Alteon OS 21.

these should all bind to the same server. The maximum number of items (sessions) allowed in the session table hash bucket chain.Seq buffers Alloc Fails . The table shows the Current Sessions. SSL connections Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The number of different TCP connections using SSL service.Alteon OS 21.-------. October 2003 „ 141 . The number of times the URL data buffer allocation failed. This number shows the number of unique SSL sessions seen on the switch. Max frames per session The maximum number of frames to be buffered per session.-------Unique SessionIds 0 0 0 SSL connections 0 0 0 Persistent Port Sessions 0 0 0 Table 5-30 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl) Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats SessionId allocation fails Description Debug stats for SSL SessionId based persistence.---------.Ubufs Max sessions per bucket Description The number of times sequence buffer allocation failed. /stats/slb/ssl SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats: SessionId allocation fails: 0 Current Total Highest Sessions Sessions Sessions ------------------------. Max bytes buffered (sess) The maximum number of bytes to be buffered per session. The number of times allocation of a session table entry failed when attempting to store a SessionId in the table.0 Command Reference Table 5-29 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Alloc Fails . the total sessions seen on the switch since last reset and the high water mark of current sessions for the following: Unique SessionIds Many SSL sessions can use the same SessionId.

October 2003 . parsing Shows parsing statistics. See page 144. dump Shows all FTP SLB/NAT statistics. See page 143 for sample output. See page 143 for sample output. 142 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. /stats/slb/ftp/active Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats(PORT): Total FTP: Total New Active FTP Index: Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-32 Active FTP Slb Parsing and Filter statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/active) Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats (PORT) Description The number of times the switch receives the port command from the client.Show parsing .0 Command Reference Table 5-30 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl) Statistics Persistent Port Sessions Description The number of SessionIds maintained to allow for persistence across different client ports.Show maint .Show dump . See page 142 for sample output. /stats/slb/ftp File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu [FTP SLB parsing and active .Dump Filter Statistics Menu] active FTP NAT filter stats FTP SLB parsing server stats FTP maintenance stats all FTP SLB/NAT stats Table 5-31 FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/ftp) Command Syntax and Usage active Shows active FTP SLB parsing and filter statistics. maint Shows maintenance statistics.

The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs FTP SLB parsing. Total New FTP SLB parsing Index FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff /stats/slb/ftp/maint FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics FTP mode switch error: 0 Table 5-34 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/maint) Statistics FTP mode switch error Description The number of times the switch is not able to switch modes from active to passive and vice versa. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the Switch needs for packet adjustment. October 2003 „ 143 .Alteon OS 21. /stats/slb/ftp/parsing Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics Total FTP SLB Parsing Stats(PASV): Total FTP: Total New FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-33 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/parsing) Statistics Total FTP Description The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The number of times the switch creates a new index due to port command from the client.0 Command Reference Table 5-32 Active FTP Slb Parsing and Filter statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/active) Statistics Total FTP Total New Active FTP Index Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff Description The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections. The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client.

The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs for FTP SLB parsing. Total FTP NAT Filtered The total number of FTP NAT filter sessions that occurred.Alteon OS 21. The total number of times the adjustment between ACK and SEQ occurred on the filter.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/ftp/dump FTP SLB Statistics Dump Total FTP : Total FTP NAT Filtered: Total new active FTP NAT Index: Total new FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: FTP mode switch error: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-35 FTP SLB Statistics Dump (/stats/slb/ftp/dump) Statistics Total FTP Description The total number of FTP sessions that occurred. The number of times the switch could not switch mode from active to passive and vice versa. 144 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff FTP mode switch error The total number of new data sessions created for FTP NAT filter in active mode. October 2003 . The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client.

The number depends upon the type of media player being used.Alteon OS 21. The total number of times the buffer allocation failed.---------.-------0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-36 RTSP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/rtsp) Statistics ControlConnection UDP Streams Description The total number of TCP connections for RTSP control connection.---------. The total number of UDP connections for data channels. The total number of times the connections got denied due to shortage of resources or the real server being down. The total number of buffer allocations used.---------. Redirect ConnectionDenied BufferAllocs AllocFailures /stats/slb/dns DNS SLB Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total number number number number number number number of of of of of of of TCP DNS queries: UDP DNS queries: invalid DNS queries: multiple DNS queries: domain name parse errors: failed real server name matches: DNS parsing internal errors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.---------.---------.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/rtsp RTSP SLB Statistics Control UDP Connection Buffer Alloc SP Connection Streams Redirect Denied Allocs Failures -.---------. The total number of times the connection got redirected. October 2003 „ 145 .---------.---------.---------.---------1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 -.---------.

Alteon OS 21. October 2003 .0 Command Reference Table 5-37 DNS SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/dns) Statistics Total number of TCP DNS queries Total number of UDP DNS queries Total number of invalid DNS queries Total number of multiple DNS queries Description The total number of DNS queries that received through TCP connections. The total number of times the user failed to find a real server which has the same layer 7 strings that match the domain name to be resolved. The total number of out of memory and other unexpected errors the user gets while processing the DNS query. Total number of domain name parse errors Total number of failed real server name matches Total number of DNS parsing internal errors 146 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Currently only one domain name resolution per request is supported. The total number of malformed DNS queries received. The total number of DNS queries that have short or invalid domain names to be resolved. The total number of DNS queries received through UDP requests. The total number of DNS queries that contain more than one domain name to be resolved.

TPCP External Notification stats: Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. Indicates instances where the switch ran out of available bindings for a port. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit.SP dead: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs: 0 acct wrap reqs: 0 acct start reqs: 0 acct update reqs: 0 acct stop reqs: 0 acct bad reqs: 0 acct reqs(FIP): 0 acct reqs(no FIP): 0 add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails. incorrect VIPs incorrect Vports no available real server requests to wrong SP The number of session add/delete requests sent to the wrong SP.SP dead: 0 req fails. October 2003 „ 147 .DMA: 0 Table 5-38 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics Description WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions allocation failures The number of session bindings currently in use.SP dead: 0 req fails.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/Wap WAP SLB Statistics WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions: 0 allocation failures: 0 incorrect VIPs: 0 incorrect Vports: 0 no available real server: 0 requests to wrong SP: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails. This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured.Alteon OS 21. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client.

Alteon OS 21.SP dead Description The number of WAP session add requests via TPCP. The number of RADIUS Accounting Stop frames received. The number of wrapped RADIUS Accounting frames received. October 2003 .DMA 148 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs acct wrap reqs The number of RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of RADIUS Accounting Start frames received. The number of add-request failures due to dead target SP. The number of bad RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of RADIUS Accounting Update frames. The number of WAP session delete requests via RADIUS snooping. acct start reqs acct update reqs acct stop reqs acct bad reqs add session reqs del session reqs req fails. The number of add/delete request failures due to dead target SP. The number of add/delete requests failed due to DMA write failure. The number of WAP session add requests via RADIUS snooping.0 Command Reference Table 5-38 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics add session reqs req fails.SP dead req fails.

Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on. Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds). Allocation Failures Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port. Terminated Sessions Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled. Table 5-39 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported. Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/maint SLB Maintenance Statistics SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: TCP fragments: UDP datagrams: Non TCP/IP frames: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Backup server activations: Overflow server activations: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: Total IP fragment sessions: Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: 2097104 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SLB Maintenance statistics are described in the following table. TCP Fragments UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs Indicates the number of TCP fragments encountered by the switch. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Layer 4 processing might not handle TCP fragments. depending on configuration.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 149 . Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured.

October 2003 . This counter indicates how many times session table is full. Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames LAND attacks Total IP fragment sessions Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards IP fragment table full This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online. This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has processed so far. This represents the current number of fragment sessions. This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports. The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources. but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN. This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because they matched an active filter with the deny action set. This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference Table 5-39 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Incorrect Vports Description This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. /stats/slb/clear Clearing the SLB Statistics The following statistics are reset to zero when the clear command is given and confirmed: Table 5-40 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Real server stats: Description Health check failures Total sessions Highest sessions Octets 150 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. No Server Available This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client.

0 Command Reference Table 5-40 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Real server group stats: Description Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total firings Real server stats: Octets. per port Global SLB stats URL SLB and Redirection stats SSL SLB stats FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats Real server stats Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 151 . Total sessions Virtual server: Octets. Total sessions Real server group: Octets.Alteon OS 21. Total sessions Total firings: Octets Per real server: DNS handoffs HTTP redirects Per server group: DNS handoffs HTTP redirects Redir: Total cache server hits Total origin server hits Total none-GETs hits Total ’Cookie: ’ hits Total no-cache hits LB: ID SLB String hits Total Sessions Highest Sessions Total FTP Total FTP NAT Filtered Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff Health check failures Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Virtual server stats Filter stats SLB switch port stats.

Show BWM maint statistics dump . hist Displays bandwidth management history statistics.Switch Port Contract Stats Menu cont . rcont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics. see page 153. 152 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. maint Displays bandwidth management maintenance statistics.Clear BWM statistics Table 5-41 Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Switch Port Contract Statistics Menu.BW History stats maint .0 Command Reference Table 5-40 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Real server group stats Description Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Virtual server stats /stats/bwm BWM Statistics Menu [Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu] port . See page 158 for sample output.BW Contract stats rcont .Dump all BWM statistics clear . See page 154 for details. October 2003 . To view menu options. See page 156 for sample output. dump Displays all bandwidth management statistics.Alteon OS 21. See page 155 for details.BW Contract rate stats hist . cont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics.

------.--------------. /stats/bwm/port <port number>/cont BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.---------.-----1 cont1 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 674252832 1798583472 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 772710 0 0 16320 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 5-41 Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage clear Clears all bandwidth management statistics.Alteon OS 21.---------. See for a sample output. rcont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics. /stats/bwm/port <port number> BWM Switch Processor Statistics [Bandwidth Management Port Statistics Menu] cont .BW Contract rate stats Table 5-42 Management Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm/sp) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics. October 2003 „ 153 .BW Contract stats rcont .

---------. The contract name. Table 5-43 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics Contract Name Octets Description The contract number.------. Discards 154 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits.------.--------------.---------.---------. The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted.-----1 cont1 223868832 568900584 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 224149728 568632456 16384 456960 25 cont25 0 0 0 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 401270 0 0 456960 The following description of statistics applies on a specific SP (switch processor-equivalent to switch port) for all contracts irrespective of whether the contract is enabled or disabled.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /stats/bwm/port <port number>/rcont BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.--------------. October 2003 .---------.----1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5230 682947936 1822133376 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 0 773974 0 0 16320 1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5238 684289056 1825753104 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 0 774114 0 0 16320 /stats/bwm/cont <contract number> BWM Contract Statistics BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.---------.

---------. Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted. Rate at which the packets are going out of the switch on a particular contract. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The contract name. BufMax /stats/bwm/rcont BWM Contract Rate Statistics Use this command to show the rate statistics of all the enabled contracts.Alteon OS 21. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied.---------.----1 cont1 5222 285408288 735607152 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 285720864 735308784 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 4 517182 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5230 286747296 739228896 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5230 287059872 738930528 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 8 519400 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5222 288084192 742853160 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 288400992 742550760 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 8 521578 0 0 456960 Table 5-44 Bandwidth Management Contract Rate Statistics (/stats/bwm/rcont) Statistics Contract Name Rate (in Kbps) Description The contract number.------.0 Command Reference Table 5-43 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics BufUsed Description The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted. BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.--------------.---------. October 2003 „ 155 .

124 2 filter_number02 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23.124 8 filter_number08 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47. Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted.Alteon OS 21.80. October 2003 .23.23.23.124 9 filter_number09 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23.23. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limits.124 5 filter_number05 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.---------.23.80.124 1 filter_number01 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47. Discards BufUsed BufMax /stats/bwm/hist BWM History Statistics Discards TimeStamp YyyyMmDd:Hr:Mi/TmZone --------------. 156 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.80. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied.80.80.---------47.124 3 filter_number03 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.124 256 Default 608 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 Switch IP Cont Name Octets You can dump the stats kept in the SMTP history buffer that get dumped periodically when an E-mail is sent.124 6 filter_number06 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.124 7 filter_number07 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.80.23.0 Command Reference Table 5-44 Bandwidth Management Contract Rate Statistics (/stats/bwm/rcont) Statistics Octets Description The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted.124 4 filter_number04 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.---.23. The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted.124 10 filter_number10 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.---------------. This command is used to keep long term history only for the contracts that are enabled and have history command turned on.80.23.23.---------.

Table 5-45 Bandwidth Management History Statistics (/stats/bwm/hist) Statistics Contract Octets Discards Description The contract number for which history is enabled. October 2003 „ 157 .0 Command Reference Use this command to show the history of all the contracts for which history command is enabled. The number of octets discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits. The number of octets sent out on a particular contract. Indicates the time the packets were received or discarded. TimeStamp Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The sampling is done at one-minute intervals.Alteon OS 21.

see page 161. October 2003 . 158 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. To view a sample output and a description of the stats.Alteon OS 21.Show All Socket FD in use cpu .0 Command Reference /stats/bwm/maint BWM Maintenance Statistics BWM Maint statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for rate limiting contracts Discard pkts 0 Discard octets 0 Out pkts 35932 Out octets 4015993 Transmit failed 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for traffic shaping contracts QFull Discard pkts 0 QFull Discard octets 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Transmit failed 0 TDT set when qfull 0 TDT set between soft and hard 0 TDT set at soft 0 /stats/mp Management Processor Statistics [MP-specific Statistics Menu] pkt .Show All TCP control blocks in use ucb . To view a sample output and a description of the stats. to check for leads and load. see page 159.Show Packet stats tcb .Show CPU utilization Table 5-46 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp) Command Syntax and Usage pkt Displays packet statistics. tcb Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use.Show All UDP control blocks in use sfd .

To view a sample output and a description of the stats. To view a sample output. Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. To view a sample output. Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. /stats/mp/pkt MP Packet Statistics Packet counts: allocs: mediums: jumbos: smalls: alloc fails: TCP counts: allocs: current: alloc fails: 89262 0 0 0 0 4866 46 0 frees: mediums hi-watermark: jumbos hi-watermark: smalls hi-watermark: packet discards: frees: current hi-watermark: alloc discards: 89262 4 0 4 0 4827 146 0 Table 5-47 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics Packet counts: allocs Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. and 64 seconds. see page 161.Alteon OS 21. cpu Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1. 4. Description frees mediums jumbos Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Total number of packet allocations with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. see page 162. October 2003 „ 159 . see page 162. sfd Displays all Socket File Descriptors that are in use.0 Command Reference Table 5-46 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp) Command Syntax and Usage ucb Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use.

Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. October 2003 . The packets are discarded because MP memory resources are not available. The highest number of TCP packet allocation from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The number of TCP packets that are discarded by the MP. smalls hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.Alteon OS 21. Total number of times the TCP packet buffers are freed (released) to MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack.0 Command Reference Table 5-47 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics smalls Description Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. TCP counts: allocs Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. alloc fails frees mediums hi-watermark jumbos hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packets freed from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. packet discards The number of packets that are discarded by the MP. current alloc fails frees current hi-watermark alloc discards 160 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Total number of TCP packet allocation failures from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The packets are discarded because buffer resources are not available or the buffer threshold is reached and the low priority packets are discarded. The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

October 2003 „ 161 .23.0/47.27.0.23.80.5 1171 <=> 47.0 0 <=> 0.0.0.0.0 10ad5790: 47.81.243 80 23 listen established Table 5-48 MP Specified TCP Statistics (/stats/mp/tcb) Statistics 10ad41e8/10ad5790 0.243 80/23 listen/established Description Memory Destination IP address Destination port Source IP Source port State /stats/mp/ucb UCB Statistics All UDP allocated control blocks: 161: listen 1985: listen 3122: listen Table 5-49 UCB Statistics on MP (/stats/mp/ucb) Field 161/1985/3122 Listen Description UDP port number State Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.0.80.0.0.0/47.5 0/1171 0.0 Command Reference /stats/mp/tcb TCP Statistics All TCP allocated control blocks: 10ad41e8: 0.0.27.81.Alteon OS 21.

0 0<=>47.108.0.0.150 5341<=>47. October 2003 .129. CPU utilization: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds: 100% 100% 100% Table 5-50 CPU Statistics (stats/mp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil1Second cpuUtil4Seconds cpuUtil64Seconds Description The percentage of CPU utilization over a one second interval.161 23 accept TCP server /stats/mp/cpu CPU Statistics This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics.0 0<=>47.153. The percentage of CPU utilization over a four second interval. The percentage of CPU utilization over a 64 second interval.108.0 Command Reference /stats/mp/sfd MP-Specific SFD Statistics All Socket FD allocated: max_fdi=2 fdi=0 fd=15 pfdi=-1 10c27fd8: 0.Show maintenance stats clear .108. /stats/sp <SP Number> SP Specific Statistics [SP-specific Statistics Menu] maint .0.0.161 23 listen TCP server fdi=2 fd=17 pfdi=1 10c27c78: 47.Show CPU utilization 162 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.133.Clear maintenance stats cpu .Alteon OS 21.161 80 listen TCP server fdi=1 fd=16 pfdi=-1 10b9564c: 0.133.133.

October 2003 „ 163 . Displays what percentage of the CPU has been utilized. /stats/sp <SP number>/maint SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics Maintenance statistics for SP 1: Receive Letter success from MP: 318730 Receive Letter success from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 4: 0 Receive Letter errors from MP: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 4: 0 Send Letter success to MP: 224822 Send Letter success to SP 2: 0 Send Letter success to SP 3: 0 Send Letter success to SP 4: 0 Send Letter failures to MP: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 2: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 3: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 4: 0 learnErrNoddw: 0 resolveErrNoddw: ageMPNoddw: 0 deleteMiss: pfdbFreeEmpty: 0 arpDiscards: 0 icmpDiscards: tcpDiscards: 0 udpDiscards: 0 0 0 0 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 5-51 SP Specific Statistics (/stats/sp) Statistics maint clear cpu Description Indicates the total number of all the letter statistics received or sent from this SP.Alteon OS 21. See page 163 for a sample output. Deletes all the maintenance statistics.

To view a sample output and a description of the statistics.Alteon OS 21. dump Displays all security statistics. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. udpblast Displays the UDP Blast statistics menu.IP Address ACL Statistics Menu udpblast . see page 167. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics. pgroup Displays the Pattern Match Group statistics menu.UDP Blast Statistics Menu pgroup . see page 165. see page 166.0 Command Reference /stats/security Security Statistics [Security Statistics Menu] dos . To view a sample output and a description of the stats.DoS Attack Statistics Menu ipacl . see page 168. 164 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.Show pattern match group statistics ratelim . ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting statistics menu. ipacl Displays the IP Address Access Control List statistics menu. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics. October 2003 .Dump all security statistics Command Syntax and Usage dos Displays the DOS Attack statistics menu.Show rate limiting statistics dump . see page 166.

You can use the help command to obtain a brief explanation of each type of DOS attack detected by the switch. Nullscan. dump Displays the number of times the packets were dropped on the switch. Fraggle. Types of DOS Attacks Alteon OS can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf. and ScanSynFin. Fraggle. Xmascan. Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack.0 Command Reference /stats/security/dos DOS Attack Statistics Menu [DoS Attack Statistics Menu] port . Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for a detailed description of DOS attacks. LandAttack.Clear all DoS attack statistics help . ScanSynFin.Port DoS attack statistics dump .Dump all DoS attack statistics clear . Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Xmascan. on the selected port only.DoS attack statistics description Table 5-52 DOS Attacks Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/dos) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the number of times the packets were dropped for each of the following types of DOS attacks. October 2003 „ 165 . clear Deletes all DOS attack statistics. LandAttack. PortZero. PortZero. for each of the following types of DOS attacks: Smurf. help Displays a description of each type of DOS attack by name and how it works. see “Types of DOS Attacks” on page 165.Alteon OS 21. Blat For a description of these different types of DOS attacks. Nullscan.

/stats/security/udpblast UDP Blast Statistics [UDP Blast Statistics Menu] dump .x.Alteon OS 21.IP address access control Stats clear .x. ScanSynFin: SYN and FIN bits are set in the packet.255). URG and PSH bits are set. Blat: TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT.x. PortZero: TCP/UDP Packets with either source/destination port is zero.255).Clear all access control Stats Table 5-53 IPACL Security Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/ipacl) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the accumulated blocked packets for each IP address and mask pair. Fraggle: The UDP packet to a broadcast destination IP(x. LandAttack: Packets with source IP equal destination IP. Nullscan: TCP sequence number is zero and all control bits are zeros.Clear all UDP Blast Stats 166 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. October 2003 . /stats/security/ipacl IP Access Control List Statistics The following IP Access Control List statistics can be viewed with this command: [IP ACL Statistics Menu] dump . Xmascan: TCP sequence number is zero and the FIN.x.0 Command Reference >> /stats/security/dos help Smurf: The ICMP ping request to a broadcast destination IP(x. clear Deletes all the statistics of accumulated blocked packets.UDP Blast Stats clear .

/stats/security/pgroup UDP Pattern Match Statistics Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name 1 Hits 0 This menu displays how many times each configured pattern group has been matched and a subsequent filtering action performed. clear Deletes all the accumulated blocked packets.Alteon OS 21. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The number of blocked packets. Pattern groups are configured in the “Pattern Matching Menu” on page 278. and the current packet rate per second. See page 167 for a sample output and a description of the statistics. October 2003 „ 167 . /stats/security/udpblast/dump UDP Blast Dump Statistics UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets ------------------------Current Packet Rate/Second -------------------------- Table 5-55 UDP Blast Dump Statistics Parameters (/stats/security/udpblast/dump) Field UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/ Second Description UDP ports that experienced UDP blast attacks.0 Command Reference Table 5-54 UDP Blast Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/udpblast) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all the accumulated blocked packets for each port. Displays the current rate of packet to the UDP port.

168 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference /stats/security/ratelim Rate Limiting Statistics Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-56 Rate Limiting Statistics (/stats/security/ratelim) Field Total holds down triggered Current per-client state entries Description The total number of packets dropped after the hold-down period expired. The total number of per-client state entries for TCP/UDP/ICMP rate limiting. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21.

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /stats/security/dump Dump Statistics for Security IP ACL stats: Address Blocked Packets ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/Second ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name Hits 1 0 100 0 101 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: 0 0 0 0 0 0 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 169 .

Alteon OS 21. snmpInBadVersions snmpInBadC’tyNames snmpInBadC’tyUses snmpInASNParseErrs 170 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Note: OSI’s method of specifying abstract objects is called ASN. defined in X. October 2003 .1 is a flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of data types.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when decoding SNMP Messages received. The total number of SNMP Messages. The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP entity which used an SNMP community name not known to the said entity (the switch). and one set of rules for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the BER (Basic Encoding Rules. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version.1 type as a string of eight-bit octets. The total number of ASN. The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the Message. BER describes how to represent or encode values of each ASN. from simple types such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and sequences.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One.209).0 Command Reference /stats/snmp SNMP Statistics SNMP statistics: snmpInPkts: snmpInBadC’tyNames: snmpInASNParseErrs: snmpOutPkts: snmpInTooBigs: snmpInBadValues: snmpInGenErrs: snmpInTotalSetVars: snmpInGetNexts: snmpInGetResponses: snmpOutTooBigs: snmpOutBadValues: snmpOutGenErrs: snmpOutGetNexts: snmpOutGetResponses: 9592 0 0 9592 0 0 0 0 5676 0 0 0 0 0 9592 snmpInBadVersions: snmpInBadC’tyUses: snmpEnableAuthTraps: snmpInBadTypes: snmpInNoSuchNames: snmpInReadOnlys: snmpInTotalReqVars: snmpInGetRequests: snmpInSetRequests: snmpInTraps: snmpOutNoSuchNames: snmpOutReadOnlys: snmpOutGetRequests: snmpOutSetRequests: snmpOutTraps: 0 0 0 0 0 0 15268 3916 0 0 0 0 81814 0 0 Table 5-57 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInPkts Description The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport service.208). ASN. defined in X.

As such. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs).Alteon OS 21. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr.0 Command Reference Table 5-57 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpEnableAuth Traps snmpOutPkts Description An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this entity (the switch). this object is provided as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP. which have been altered successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP SetRequest Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport service. The total number of SNMP Messages which failed ASN parsing. October 2003 „ 171 . The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is noSuchName. The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP GetRequest and Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is ‘read-Only’. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is too big. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue. It should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU. The total number of MIB objects. which contains the value ‘read-Only’ in the error-status field. snmpInBadTypes snmpInTooBigs snmpInNoSuchNames snmpInBadValues snmpInReadOnlys snmpInGenErrs snmpInTotalReqVars snmpInTotalSetVars snmpInGetRequests snmpInGetNexts snmpInSetRequests Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.

which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is genErr. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus is noSuchName.Alteon OS 21. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. October 2003 . The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is too big. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is badValue. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). snmpInTraps snmpOutTooBigs snmpOutNoSuchNames snmpOutBadValues snmpOutReadOnlys snmpOutGenErrs snmpOutGetRequests snmpOutGetNexts snmpOutSetRequests snmpOutGet Responses snmpOutTraps 172 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs).0 Command Reference Table 5-57 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInGetResponses Description The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. Not in use.

The number of bad packets received.0 Command Reference /stats/mgmt Management Port Statistics Management port interface RX bytes: RX packets: RX errors: RX dropped: RX overruns: RX frame errors: RX multicast: statistics: 0 TX bytes: 0 TX packets: 0 TX errors: 0 TX dropped: 0 TX overruns: 0 TX carrier errors: 0 TX collisions: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-58 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt) Statistics RX bytes Description The total number of incoming bytes successfully transferred by the interface. The number of incoming packets that were dropped due to lack of receive buffers. The number of incoming packets dropped due to IP framing errors.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 173 . RX packets RX errors RX dropped RX overruns RX frame errors RX multicast TX bytes TX packets TX errors TX dropped TX overruns TX carrier errors Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The number of multicast packets received. The total number of outgoing bytes successfully transferred by the interface. The total number of outgoing packets successfully transferred by the interface. Not applicable. The number of packets dropped due to transmission problems. The total number of incoming packets successfully transferred by the interface. The number of received packets that were dropped because their size exceeded that of the receive queue. The number of packets dropped due to lack of transmit buffers. The number of packets dropped because size exceeded that of the transmit queue.

This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . depending on your configuration). set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. 174 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Collisions occur when two or more stations are transmitting signals at the same time.0 Command Reference Table 5-58 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt) Statistics TX collisions Description The number of collisions due to congestion on the medium. If you want to capture dump data to a file. /stats/dump Dump Statistics Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more.

the menu options under the Server Load Balancing Menu (/cfg/slb) are in Chapter 7. October 2003 . and saving switch configuration changes.System-wide Parameter Menu port .Step by step configuration set up dump . To view menu options.Layer 3 Menu slb .Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security . viewing. display more or different information than in the previous version. To view menu options. 175 315393-E.Port Menu pmirr . /cfg Configuration Menu [Configuration Menu] sys . port <port number> Displays the Port Configuration Menu. see page 179.Port Mirroring Menu bwm .Layer 2 Menu l3 . see page 197.Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg .CHAPTER 6 The Configuration Menu This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making. although not new.Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg . To make finding information easier. Many of the commands. Important difference are called out in the text.Security Menu setup .Bandwidth Management Menu l2 .Restore current configuration from tftp server Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Configuration Menu.

gtcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Restores current configuration from TFTP server. To view menu options. any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved. Applying. To view menu options. see page 282. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu. Viewing. l2 Displays Layer 2 Configuration Menu. To view menu options. For details. For details. “The SLB Configuration Menu”. To view menu options. To view menu options. l3 Displays Layer 3 Configuration Menu. see page 212. see Chapter 7. you can do the following: „ „ „ View the pending changes Apply the pending changes Save the changes to flash memory 176 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Also. and Saving Changes As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters. see page 226. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21. ptcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Backs up current configuration to TFTP server. see page 211. To view menu options. setup Step-by-step configuration set-up of the switch. the changes you make do not take effect immediately. see page 281. see page 282. All changes are considered “pending” until you explicitly apply them. For details. While configuration changes are in the pending state. see page 281.0 Command Reference Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage pmirr Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu. see page 276. For details. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Configuration Menu. see page 217. dump Dumps current configuration to a script file. security Displays security menu.

you can enter diff at any prompt in the CLI. save them (see below). Saving the Configuration In addition to applying the configuration changes. To apply configuration changes. you can enter apply at any prompt in the administrative interface. enter the following command at any CLI prompt: # save Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. NOTE – The diff command is a global command. except for starting Spanning Tree Protocol. To save the new configuration. NOTE – If you do not save the changes.0 Command Reference Viewing Pending Changes You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at the menu prompt. NOTE – All configuration changes take effect immediately when applied. and then reset the switch (see “Resetting the Switch” on page 360). Therefore. October 2003 „ 177 .Alteon OS 21. you must apply them. Therefore. # apply NOTE – The apply command is a global command. enter apply at any prompt in the CLI. To turn STP on or off. you can save them to flash memory on the Alteon Application Switch. you must apply the changes. Applying Pending Changes To make your configuration changes active. they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted.

For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset. The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block. 178 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. enter the following instead: # save n You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch.Alteon OS 21. Your options include: „ „ „ The active configuration block The backup configuration block Factory default configuration You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory using the diff flash command. If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block. the changes are saved to the active configuration block. October 2003 . see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 359. It is a global command that can be executed from any menu.0 Command Reference When you save configuration changes.

Alteon OS 21. sshd Displays the SSH Server Menu. mmgmt Displays Management Port Menu. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 187. Web-based management settings. see page 185. see page 188.0 Command Reference /cfg/sys System Configuration [System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator privilege mode passwords. Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage syslog Displays the Syslog Menu. October 2003 „ 179 . see page 181. To view menu options. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. see page 182. radius Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu. and management access list. To view menu options. ntp Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu. To view menu options.

health Displays system health check menu. It is also displayed as part of the output from the /info/sys command. When a user or administrator logs into the switch. maximum 80 characters> Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. This command is disabled by default. ssnmp Displays the System SNMP Menu.0 Command Reference Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage sonmp Displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) menu. access Displays System Access Menu. see page 190. The default is 5 minutes. from 1 to 60 minutes. This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new lines. If you enable BOOTP. time Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format. see page 193. To view menu options.Alteon OS 21. affects both console and Telnet> Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions. date Prompts the user for the system date. which is used for sending bandwidth management history information. To view menu options. the switch will query its BOOTP server for all of the switch IP parameters. bannr <string. the login banner is displayed. To view menu options. notice <max 1024 char multi-line login notice> <’-’ to end> Displays login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. cur Displays the current system parameters. October 2003 . smtp <SMTP host name or IP address> Sets the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) host. see page 189. bootp disable|enable Enables or disables the use of BOOTP. idle <idle timeout in minutes. see page 192. To view menu options. hprompt disable|enable Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command Line Interface (CLI). 180 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.

cur Displays the current syslog settings. filter). 192. The default is 7.Alteon OS 21. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity. see page 182.17.0 Command Reference /cfg/sys/syslog System Host Log Configuration [Syslog Menu] host host2 sever sever2 facil facil2 console log cur Set IP address of first syslog host Set IP address of second syslog host Set the severity of first syslog host Set the severity of second syslog host Set facility of first syslog host Set facility of second syslog host Enable/disable console output of syslog messages Enable/disable syslogging of features Display current syslog settings Table 6-3 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog) Command Syntax and Usage host <new syslog host IP address (such as.223)> Sets the IP address of the second syslog host. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. console disable|enable Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. which means log all the seven severity levels. It is enabled by default. see page 182. You can choose to enable/ disable specific features (such as vlans.4. When necessary. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity. disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages. sever2 <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed. log all the seven severity levels. log <feature|all> <enable|disable> Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated. which means. The default is 0. The default is 0. or enable/disable syslog on all available features.223)> Sets the IP address of the first syslog host.4. 192. facil <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed. host2 <new syslog host IP address (such as. facil2 <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed. The default is 7. sever <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed. October 2003 „ 181 . gslb.17.

7. 1: Alert. This means that the system has errors that should be corrected. /cfg/sys/mmgmt Management Port Configuration Menu The Management port is a Fast Ethernet port that is used exclusively to manage the switch. This means that the condition of the system is normal but with significant conditions that need attention. or HTTP. broadcast address. and default gateway. SNMP. If this port is disabled. by using the operational commands to set these options on a one-time basis. This means that corrective action must be taken immediately.0 Command Reference Seven Levels of Severity Following is the description of the seven levels of severity: 0: Emergency. October 2003 . or in some cases. This means that the system is unusable. This means that the system is working but giving out information about certain unfavorable conditions. While the switch can be managed from any network port. subnet mask. This port manages the switch using either telnet CLI. and must be enabled before it can be used. 3: Error. This means that the system is giving out debug-level messages. the Management port saves consuming a port that could otherwise be used for processing data and traffic. 6: Informational. The Management port must be configured with a static IP address. the network ports have to perform all switch management (other than the switch management using the console). Debug. You can change the defaults by configuring these features to permanently use the management port. This means that the system is giving a warning. 4: Warning.Alteon OS 21. This port is isolated from and does not participate in the networking protocols that run on the network ports. 2: Critical. 182 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. 5: Notice. the factory default settings for some of the management features remain with the network ports. If this port is enabled. This means the condition of the system is critical.

Alteon OS 21.17.4. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set default port for DNS ntp . To view the menu options.101)> Sets the IP address.Disable management port cur . intr <interval (0 . mask <subnet mask (such as. ntp default port mgmt|data Sets NTP over management or data ports.255.Set default port for SNMP traps syslog .60 seconds)> Sets the interval between gateway ping attempts. see page 185.4.Set default gateway address intr . The default is data port. 192. 192.Set default port for SYSLOG sonmp . retry <number of attempts (1-120> Sets the number of failed ping attempts before a gateway is declared DOWN. October 2003 „ 183 .Enable management port dis .17.Display current configuration Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage port Displays the management port link menu.Management Port Phy Menu addr .Set subnet mask gw .255.Set default port for SMTP snmp . dns default port mgmt|data Sets DNS over management or data port.Set default port for NTP radius . 255.Set default port for TFTP ena . addr <IP address (such as.Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN dns . gw <gateway address (such as. [Management Port Menu] port . Default is data port.Set default port for RADIUS smtp .Set default IP for SONMP hello packets tftp .0)> Sets the subnet mask.Set interval between gateway ping attempts retry .0 Command Reference NOTE – This port does not support BOOTP.1)> Sets the IP address for the default gateway.Set IP address mask .

October 2003 . Default is data port. tftp default port mgmt|data Sets TFTP over management or data port. Default is data port. Default is data port. dis Disables the Management port. smtp default port mgmt|data Sets SMTP over management or data ports. syslog default port mgmt|data Sets syslog host access over management or data ports. When this option is set to mgmt then the Management Port IP address is used in the SONMP hello packets transmitted by the switch. sonmp default port mgmt|data Sets default IP address for SONMP hello packets. snmp default port mgmt|data Sets SNMP trap host over management or data ports. Default is data port. 184 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. cur Displays the current configuration.0 Command Reference Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage radius default port mgmt|data Sets RADIUS over management or data ports. then the IP address of the data port interface specified by srcif (/cfg/sys/sonmp/srcif) command is used in the hello packets. But if it is set to data. ena Enables the Management port. Default is data port.Alteon OS 21.

It is widely used by network administrators to control Web and other kinds of servers remotely. October 2003 „ 185 . and rcp. rsh. SSH commands are encrypted and secure in several ways. is a UNIX-based command interface and protocol for securely getting access to a remote computer. SSH is actually a suite of three utilities .that are secure versions of the earlier UNIX utilities. auto on|off Sets auto negotiation for the port.Display current link configuration Table 6-5 Management Port Link Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mgmt/port) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the speed of the link with the Management port. and passwords are protected by being encrypted. mode full|half|any Sets half or full duplex mode.Set autonegotiation cur .0 Command Reference /cfg/sys/mmgmt/port Management Port Link Menu [Management Port Link Menu] speed . sometimes known as Secure Socket Shell.slogin. Both ends of the client/server connection are authenticated using a digital certificate.Alteon OS 21.Set full or half duplex mode auto . Default is any. ssh. rlogin. By default this command is turned on. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Default is any.Set link speed mode . and scp . SSH uses RSA public key cryptography for both connection and authentication. /cfg/sys/sshd SSH Server Configuration Menu Secure Shell (SSH). cur Displays the current link configuration.

When you enter this command. RSA host key generation starts immediately. cur Displays the current SSH server configuration.Alteon OS 21. hkeygen Generates the RSA host key. this menu enables Secure Shell access from any SSH client. on Enables the SSH server. SSH scripts can be viewed by using the /cfg/dump command (see page 281). sshport <TCP port number> Sets the SSH server port number. scpadm Sets the Secure Copy (SCP)-only admin password. 186 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. When you enter this command. dis Disables SCP. skeygen Generates the RSA server key. October 2003 .0 Command Reference [SSHD Menu] intrval scpadm hkeygen skeygen sshport ena dis on off cur - Set Interval for generating the RSA server key Set SCP-only admin password Generate the RSA host key Generate the RSA server key Set SSH server port number Enable the SCP apply and save Disable the SCP apply and save Turn SSH server ON Turn SSH server OFF Display current SSH server configuration For the Alteon Application Switch. RSA server key generation starts immediately. ena Enables SCP. Table 6-6 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <interval (0-24)> Sets the interval for generating the RSA server key.

timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds (1-10)> Sets the amount of time. The default is 1645. between 1500 . telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the RADIUS back door for telnet.3000. retries <RADIUS server retries (1-3)> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server.Set RADIUS server retries timeout . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Turn RADIUS authentication ON off . default 1645> Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured. port <RADIUS port to configure. on Enables the RADIUS server. Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections. before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. secsrv <IP address> Sets the secondary RADIUS server address.Enable or disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet on . in seconds.Set secondary RADIUS server address secret .Alteon OS 21.Turn RADIUS authentication OFF cur .Set RADIUS secret port . secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s).0 Command Reference NOTE – The top four commands are only accessible at the serial port /cfg/sys/radius RADIUS Server Configuration [RADIUS Server Menu] prisrv .Display current RADIUS configuration Table 6-7 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Sets the primary RADIUS server address. The default is 3 seconds. The default is 3 requests. October 2003 „ 187 .Set RADIUS server timeout telnet .Set RADIUS port retries .Set primary RADIUS server address secsrv .

in HH:MM> Prompts for the NTP time zone offset. By default.Turn NTP service ON off . When enabled.Set NTP server address intrval . of the switch you are synchronizing from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). 188 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. By default.Set NTP timezone offset from GMT dlight .Display current NTP configuration This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server.Set NTP server resync interval tzone .Enable or disable NTP daylight savings time on . how often.0 Command Reference Table 6-7 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage off Disables the RADIUS server. October 2003 . this option is disabled. dlight disable|enable Disables or enables daylight savings time in the system clock. the switch will add an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent with the local clock. in minutes (1-2880). cur Displays the current RADIUS server parameters. that is. Table 6-8 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp) Command Syntax and Usage server <NTP Server IP address> Prompts for the IP addresses of the NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. intrval <resync interval in minutes> Specifies the interval. in hours and minutes. tzone <offset from GMT.Alteon OS 21. this option is disabled.Turn NTP service OFF cur . to re synchronize the switch clock with the NTP server. /cfg/sys/ntp NTP Server Configuration [NTP Server Menu] server .

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-8 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp)
Command Syntax and Usage on Enables the NTP synchronization service. off Disables the NTP synchronization service. cur Displays the current NTP service settings.

/cfg/sys/sonmp
SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration
[SONMP Menu] srcif on off cur Set source interface to be used in hello packets Turn Ethernet Autotopology ON Turn Ethernet Autotopology OFF Display current SONMP configuration

SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) is a proprietary network management protocol that is used by Nortel Networks Optivitiy Switch Manager (OSM) to discover Alteon Application Switches on the network. The following commands add support for the Ethernet Autotopology alogrithm and the Bay Topology MIB. The topology algorithm is executed by each Alteon switch on which SONMP is enabled. Table 6-9 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sonmp)
Command Syntax and Usage srcif <interface number (1-256)> This command specifies the IP address to be used in the hello packets. If the interface specified by this command is not up, then the first interface which is up and running is used in the hello packets. on This command enables the SONMP protocol, and turns Ethernet Autotopology on. off This command disables the SONMP protocol, and turns Ethernet Autotopology off. cur This command displays the current SONMP configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

189

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp
System SNMP Configuration
[System SNMP Menu] name - Set SNMP "sysName" locn - Set SNMP "sysLocation" cont - Set SNMP "sysContact" rcomm - Set SNMP read community string wcomm - Set SNMP write community string trap1 - Set first SNMP trap host address trap2 - Set second SNMP trap host address t1comm - Set community string for first trap host t2comm - Set community string for second trap host timeout - Set timeout for the SNMP state machine auth - Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap" linkt - Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap cur - Display current system SNMP configuration

The Alteon OS software supports SNMP-based network management. If you are running an SNMP network management station on your network, you can manage the switch using the following standard SNMP MIBs: „ „ „ MIB II (RFC 1213) Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643) Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)

SNMP parameters that can be modified include: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ System name System location System contact Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function Read community string Write community string Trap hosts Trap community strings

190

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-10 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp)
Command Syntax and Usage name <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name for the system. The name can have a maximum of 64 characters. locn <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system location. The location can have a maximum of 64 characters. cont <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system contact. The contact can have a maximum of 64 characters. rcomm <new SNMP read community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP read community string. The read community string controls SNMP “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default read community string is public. wcomm <new SNMP write community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP write community string. The write community string controls SNMP “set” and “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default write community string is private. trap1 <new SNMP trap host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Configures the IP address of the first SNMP trap host using dotted decimal notation. The SNMP trap host is the device that receives SNMP trap messages from the switch. trap2 <new SNMP trap host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Configures the IP address of the second SNMP trap host using dotted decimal notation. t1comm <new trap host community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the community string for the first trap host. The default community string for the first trap host is public. t2comm <new trap host community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the community string for the second trap host. The default community string for the second trap host is public. timeout <SNMP state machine timeout minutes, 1-30> Defines the timeout period for SNMP state machine. When you use diff and apply, memory is allocated to store the output of the command. The timeout period determines when the resources/memory allocated for the output will be freed. auth disable|enable Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. The default setting is disabled.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

191

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-10 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp)
Command Syntax and Usage linkt <port> <disable|enable> Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps. The default setting is enabled. cur Displays the current STP port parameters.

/cfg/sys/health
System Health Check Configuration Menu
[System TCP Health Menu] add - Add TCP services to listen for health check rem - Remove TCP services from listening on - Turn system TCP health services ON off - Turn system TCP health services OFF cur - Display current TCP health services configuration

Table 6-11 System Health Check Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/health)
Command Syntax and Usage add <TCP port (2-65534)> Adds TCP services to listen to the health checks. Specify a TCP service port number, such as 80 for HTTP. rem <TCP port (2-65534)> Removes TCP services that were added for listening to health checks. Specify a TCP service port number, such as 80 for HTTP. on Turns on the TCP health check services. off Turns off the TCP health check services. cur Displays the current TCP health check services configuration.

192

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/access
System Access Control Configuration
[System Access Menu] mgmt - Management Network Definition Menu user - User Access Control Menu (passwords) http - Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access wport - Set HTTP (Web) server port number snmp - Set SNMP access control tnet - Enable/disable Telnet access tnport - Set Telnet server port number rlimit - Set max rate of ARP, ICMP, TCP, or UDP packets to MP cur - Display current system access configuration

Table 6-12 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access)
Command Syntax and Usage mgmt Displays the Management Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 194. user Displays the User Access Control Menu. To view menu options, see page 195. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the browser-based interface. It is disabled by default. wport <TCP port number (1-65535)> Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content. The default is HTTP port 80. If Global Server Load Balancing is to be used, set this to a different port (such as 8080). snmp disable|read-only|read-write Sets the snmp user access level to either disabled, read-only, or read-write. tnet Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch. This command is disabled by default. You will see this command only if you are connected to the switch through the console port. tnport <TCP port number> Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a non-standard port.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

193

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-12 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access)
Command Syntax and Usage rlimit <arp|icmp|tcp|udp> <max rate, 0-65535> Sets switch-wide rate limiting on traffic entering the switch over ARP, ICMP, TCP, or UDP protocols. Specify which protocol you wish to limit. Then specify the maximum rate, which the maximum number of packets per second that is allowed to enter the switch. cur Displays the current configuration.

/cfg/sys/access/mgmt
Management Networks Menu
This menu is used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for management purposes. NOTE – The add and rem commands below replace the /cfg/sys/mnet and /cfg/ sys/mmask commands found in earlier releases of Alteon OS.

[Management Networks Menu] add - Add mgmt network definition rem - Remove mgmt network definition cur - Display current mgmt network definitions

Table 6-13 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt)
Command Syntax and Usage add <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed through Telnet, SNMP, RIP, or the Alteon OS browser-based interface. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask address. Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted-decimal notation.

NOTE – If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces, it will cause the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and will create a “Network Down” state on the network.

194

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-13 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt)
Command Syntax and Usage rem <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Removes a defined network, which consists of a management network address and a management network mask address. cur Displays the current configuration.

/cfg/sys/access/user
User Access Control Menu
[User Access Control Menu] usrpw - Set user password (user) sopw - Set SLB operator password (slboper) l4opw - Set L4 operator password (l4oper) opw - Set operator password (oper) sapw - Set Slb administrator password (slbadmin) l4apw - Set L4 administrator password (l4admin) admpw - Set administrator password (admin) cur - Display current user statistics

NOTE – Passwords can be a maximum of 15 characters. Table 6-14 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user)
Command Syntax and Usage usrpw Sets the user (user) password. The user has no direct responsibility for switch management. He or she can view switch status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration changes. sopw Sets the SLB operator (slboper)password. The SLB operator manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing configuration menus. Access includes “user” functions. l4opw Sets the Layer 4 operator (l4oper)password. The Layer 4 operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. He or she can view all switch information and statistics. Access includes “slboper” functions.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

195

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-14 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user)
Command Syntax and Usage opw Sets the operator (oper)password. The operator password can have a maximum of 15 characters. The operator manages all functions of the switch. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch. Access includes “l4oper” functions. sapw Sets the SLB administrator (slbadmin) password. Administrator who configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. He or she can view all switch information and statistics, but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. Note that the Filter Menu options are not accessible to the SLB administrator. Access includes “l4oper” functions. l4apw Sets the Layer 4 administrator (l4admin) password. The Layer 4 administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, with the exception of not being able to configure filters. Access includes “slbadmin” functions. admpw Sets the administrator (admin) password. The super user administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands on the Alteon Application Switch, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. Access includes “oper” and “l4admin” functions. cur Displays the current user status.

196

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

SFP GBIC Ports The following figure displays the LC jack connector and the SFP that fits into the port socket. October 2003 „ 197 . The LC jack is used for connecting Gigabit Ethernet fiber optic segments.Alteon OS 21. The SFP modules are not shipped with the product. Port configuration is different on Alteon Application Switch 2000 series and 3000 series. For more information on connectors. The commands on Alteon Application Switch 2000 series and their description are as follows: Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. You may order the SFP modules from Nortel Networks. auto-negotiating. Alteon Application Switch 2000 Series The following table displays the number of Fast Ethernet ports and SFP GBIC ports with the numbering of the ports on Alteon Application Switch 2000 series: Table 6-15 Port Configuration and Numbering on Alteon Application Switch 2000 Series Model Alteon 2208 (1U) Alteon 2216 (1U) Alteon 2224 (1U) Alteon 2424 (1U) 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Port Numbers Numbers 1–8 1–16 1–24 1–24 9–10 17–18 25–26 25–28 Fast Ethernet Ports The RJ-45 jack is used for connecting 10/100 Mbps Ethernet segments to the port.0 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number> Port Configuration The Port Menu enables you to configure settings for individual switch ports. The ports are auto-sensing. and support half or full-duplex operation. This command is enabled by default. please refer to the Hardware Installation Guide for Alteon Application Switch.

this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. The default number is 1. To view menu options.Alteon OS 21. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. see page 208. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. October 2003 . It is disabled by default. see page 208. 198 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. To view menu options. It is disabled by default. this option displays the Fast Ethernet Physical Link Menu. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. 1-4090> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged.0 Command Reference [Port 1 Menu] fast gig pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Fast Phy Menu Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-16 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage fast If a port is configured to support Fast Ethernet. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. The default is set to none. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. pvid <VLAN number. ena Enables the port. gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. It is disabled by default.

Link menu options are described in Table 6-24 and appear on the fast and gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. The choices include: „ „ „ Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected. NOTE – Since the speed and mode parameters cannot be set for Gigabit Ethernet ports.Display current fast link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. October 2003 „ 199 . /cfg/port <port number> fast|gig Port Link Configuration [Fast Link Menu] speed . Not all options are valid on all ports. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Table 6-17 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/fast|gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the link speed. you can set port parameters such as speed.Set full or half duplex mode fctl .0 Command Reference Table 6-16 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables the port.Set link speed mode . these options do not appear on the Gigabit Link Menu.Set auto negotiation cur .Set flow control auto . flow control.Alteon OS 21. and negotiation mode for the port link. Using these configuration menus.) cur Displays the current port parameters. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 210.

200 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. cur Displays the current port parameters. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.The choices include: „ „ „ „ Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port.0 Command Reference Table 6-17 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/fast|gig) Command Syntax and Usage mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control.The choices include: „ „ „ Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.

2. These ports are designed to operate at 1000 Mbps and full duplex mode only. See “Dual-Mode Ports” on page 207 for more details. 5. 4. When the 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC port is selected as the preferred link. October 2003 „ 201 . refer to the Alteon Application Switch Hardware Installation Guide Part Number 315393-E. 8 Dual-Mode Port Numbers 3–6 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Numbers 9–12 Alteon 3408 (1U) Port Configuration on Alteon Application Switch 3408 The Alteon Application Switch 3408 contains 12 ports. Their description is as follows: „ „ Four 1000BaseT ports (1.0 Command Reference Alteon Application Switch 3000 Series The following table displays the port configuration and numbering on Alteon Application Switch 3408: Table 6-18 Port configuration on Alteon Application Switch 3408 Model 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Port Numbers 1. The ports are autonegotiating and support half or full duplex operation. full-duplex with autonegotiation turned on. autonegotiation must be turned on. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. if 1000 Mbps is selected. However. and 8) with RJ-45 connectors. and 6). „ NOTE – For more information on connectors. These ports have two interfaces each: 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC and 10/100/1000Base-T Copper. it is fixed at 1000 Mbps. it can be configured at any speed. You can set either interface as the preferred or backup link. 7. 2. When the 10/100/1000Base-T copper port is selected as the preferred link. Four Small Form Pluggable (SFP) GBIC Fiber Optic ports (9–12). Four dual-mode ports (3. 7.

The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port.0 Command Reference Single-Mode ports 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Ports When you select a single-mode copper port (1. this option displays the Copper Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. see page 203. 2. you see the menu below: [Port 1 Menu] gig pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Copper Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-19 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. It is disabled by default. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port.) 202 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. The default number is 1.Alteon OS 21. The default is set to None. or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. It is disabled by default. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. 7. To view menu options. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. ena Enables the port. or 8). 7. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. It is disabled by default. 2. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. October 2003 . refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 210. dis Disables the port.

Link menu options are described in Table 6-24 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch.Alteon OS 21. 2. or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current port parameters.Set link speed mode . Not all options are valid on all ports.The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu „ 203 .Set auto negotiate cur . /cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu [GE Copper Link Menu] speed . October 2003 Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. The choices include: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 6-19 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. 7. 2. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu. you can set port parameters such as speed. 7.Set duplex mode fctl . and negotiation mode for the port link. flow control.Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. Table 6-20 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. Using these configuration menus. or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed.Set flow control auto .

or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port. 2. see page 206.Alteon OS 21. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. The default number is 1. To view menu options. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters. 204 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. October 2003 . you see a slightly different menu as below: [Port 9 Menu] gig pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Optical Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-21 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. 7. It is disabled by default. 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Fiber Optic Ports When you select a single-mode fiber optic port (9–12). The default is set to None. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. this option displays the Optical Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu.0 Command Reference Table 6-20 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port.

dis Disables the port. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 210. It is disabled by default. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes.Alteon OS 21. ena Enables the port. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames.0 Command Reference Table 6-21 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 205 . It is disabled by default.) cur Displays the current port parameters.

and negotiation mode for the port link. 206 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. you can set port parameters such as flow control.Set flow control auto . The choices include: „ „ „ „ Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port.0 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode Fiber Optic Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu [GE Optical Link Menu] fctl .Display current optical gig link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. Using these configuration menus. October 2003 . Link menu options are described in Table 6-24 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet Fiber Optic link port parameters.Alteon OS 21. Table 6-22 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/ port <9-12>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control.Set auto negotiate cur .

the port will not switch automatically to the backup port if the preferred port goes down.Alteon OS 21. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. opt Displays Gigabit Fiber Optic Physical Link Menu. You cannot set the preferred port as the backup port.0 Command Reference Dual-Mode Ports When you select any one of the dual-mode ports (3–6). see page 208. The default number is 1. To view menu options. The default is set to None. back copper|optical|none Sets the preference for the backup link if the preferred port is not available. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. you see the menu below: [Port 4 Menu] cop opt pref back pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Copper Gig Phy Menu Optical Gig Phy Menu Set preferred link Set backup link Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-23 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage cop Displays Copper Gigabit Physical Link Menu. To view menu options. October 2003 „ 207 . pref copper|optical Sets the port preference between copper or optical mode. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. see page 210. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. If you choose none. The selected port will be used as the preferred port if both the ports are available.

Alteon OS 21. It is disabled by default. 208 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set flow control auto . you can set port parameters such as speed. ena Enables the port.Set auto negotiate cur .0 Command Reference Table 6-23 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. It is disabled by default. dis Disables the port. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port.Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. Using these configuration menus. Link menu options are described in Table 6-24 and appear on the cop port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames.Set link speed mode . It is disabled by default. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 210. flow control. October 2003 .Set duplex mode fctl . /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> cop Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration [GE Copper Link Menu] speed . and negotiation mode for the port link.) cur Displays the current port parameters. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes.

The choices include: Any for autonegotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control.Alteon OS 21. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters. October 2003 „ 209 . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Not all options are valid on all ports. The choices include: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port.0 Command Reference Table 6-24 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>/cop) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed.

See the “Operations Menu” on page 347 for other operations-level commands.0 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> opt Dual-Mode Fiber Optic Port Link Configuration Menu [GE Optical Link Menu] fctl . enter the following command at any prompt: Main# /oper/port <port number>/dis Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port.Display current optical gig link configuration Table 6-25 Dual-Mode Fiber Optic Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3-6>/opt) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. you do not need to use apply or save. 210 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set flow control cur . The choices include: „ „ „ „ cur Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control Displays the current Optical Gigabit link port configuration. October 2003 . Temporarily Disabling a Port To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes. The port state will revert to its original configuration when the Alteon Application Switch is reset.Alteon OS 21.

0 Command Reference /cfg/pmirr Port Mirroring Menu [Port Mirroring mirror monport cur Menu] Enable/Disable Mirroring Monitoring Port based PM Menu Display All Mirrored and Monitoring Ports Port mirroring is disabled by default.Display current Port-based Port Mirroring configuration Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. cur Displays the current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports. /cfg/pmirr/monport Port-Mirroring Menu [Port 1 Menu] add . network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port.Alteon OS 21. The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure. see page 211. you can collect detailed information about your network performance and usage. enable. Table 6-26 Port Mirroring menu options (/cfg/pmirr) Command Syntax and Usage mirror disable|enable Enables or disables port mirroring monport <monitoring port (port to mirror to)> Displays port-mirroring menu.Add "Mirrored" port and VLANs rem . and disable the monitored port. When enabled.Rem "Mirrored" port and VLANs cur . By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port. October 2003 „ 211 . To view menu options.

such as e-commerce transactions. receive higher priority versus non-critical traffic. If you do not specify a VLAN. It is necessary to specify the direction because: If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress). rem <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Removes the mirrored port. /cfg/bwm Bandwidth Management Configuration Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications. the frame is sent to the monitoring port. all traffic on that port will be mirrored. You can add specific VLAN(s) to a be monitored even if there are multiple VLANs associated with that port. out. If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or both. VLAN-based port mirroring allows the user to monitor traffic based on VLANs associated with a port. Refer to your Application Guide for more information. BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation.Set SMTP server user name force .0 Command Reference Table 6-27 Port-Based Port-Mirroring Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr/monport) Command Syntax and Usage add <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <direction (in.Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing OFF cur .Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing ON off . It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic.Enable or disable enforce policies on . This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic.Contract Menu policy .Display current Bandwidth Management configuration By default. or both)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Adds the port to be mirrored. the frame is sent to the mirrored port. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information.Policy Menu user .Alteon OS 21. BWM is turned off 212 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. October 2003 . cur Displays the current settings of the monitoring port. [Bandwidth Management Menu] cont .

specifying the guaranteed bandwidth rates. policy <BW policy number (1-64)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Policy Menu. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 213 . the reordering of the packets does not occur. By default. A bandwidth policy is often based on a rate structure whereby a Web host could charge a customer for bandwidth utilization. For further details. this option is disabled. off Globally disables Bandwidth Management on this switch. To view menu options. you must create one or more bandwidth management contracts. The switch uses these contracts to limit individual traffic flows. see the Alteon OS 21. When disabled. The default is set to None. To manage bandwidth on an Alteon Application Switch. To view menu options. force disable|enable Enables or disables the enforcement of bandwidth policy on the traffic. see page 214. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management configuration.0 Application Guide. Bandwidth policies are bandwidth limita- tions defined for any set of frames.0 Command Reference NOTE – Up to 256 bandwidth management contracts can be configured on Alteon OS. This means that no bandwidth limit is applied on the queues. this option is enabled. By default. Table 6-28 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW contract number (1-256)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Contract Menu. For further details. see page 215. The packets will exit in the order they came in. on Globally enables Bandwidth Management on this switch.Alteon OS 21. user <user name> Sets the SMTP user name to whom the history statistics will be mailed. see the Alteon OS 21.0 Application Guide.

policy <Bandwidth policy number (1-64)> Sets the policy number for this Bandwidth Management contract. By default. it is disabled.Set Contract Precedence history .Set Contract name policy . By default. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management contract configuration. shaping means buffering a packet and keeping it ready to be sent.Disable BW Contract del .Delete BW Contract cur . wtos disable|enable Disables or enables overwriting the IP Type of Service (TOS) for this contract.Alteon OS 21.Enable BW Contract dis . 214 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. October 2003 . In this context. history disable|enable Disables or enables saving statistics for this contract on the server.Enable/disable overwriting IP TOS for this Contract shaping .Display current BW Contract configuration Table 6-29 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont) Command Syntax and Usage name <15 character name> Sets the name for this Bandwidth Management contract. del Removes this contract from the switch. dis Disables this Bandwidth Management contract.Enable/disable traffic shaping for this contract ena .Set Contract Policy prec .0 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/cont <contract number> Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration [BW Contract 1 Menu] name . shaping disable|enable Disables or enables shaping of the traffic for this contract. prec <Bandwidth precedence value (1-255)> Sets the precedence value for this Bandwidth Management contract. it is enabled. ena Enables this Bandwidth Management contract. The default policy number is 64. The default value is 1.Enable/disable Saving Contract stats history wtos .

” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value. The default value is 8192 bytes.” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value. The default value is 1000 kbps. buffer <Maximum buffer space (bytes) (8192-128000)> Sets the buffer limit for this policy. With this option set to the default value of “0. cur Displays the current value of the bandwidth policy configuration.0 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/policy <policy number> Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration [Policy 1 Menu] hard soft resv utos otos buffer del cur Set hard Limit Set soft Limit Set Reservation Limit Set underlimit (soft limit) TOS Set overlimit (soft limit) TOS Set Buffer Limit Delete BW Policy Display current Policy configuration Table 6-30 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol) Command Syntax and Usage hard <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the hard bandwidth limit for this policy. del Deletes the bandwidth management policy. This is the highest amount of bandwidth available to this policy. This is the amount of bandwidth always available to this policy. utos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new utos (underlimit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is under the soft limit. soft <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the soft bandwidth limit for this policy. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. The default value is 2000 kbps. resv <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the reserve limit for this policy. otos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new otos (over the limit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is over the soft limit. With this option set to the default value of “0. October 2003 „ 215 .Alteon OS 21. The default value is 500Kbytes.

0 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/cur Bandwidth Management Current Configuration Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement: enabled SMTP server user name: Contract Name Policy Prec Hist TOS State Shaping 1 cont_1 1 1 E E E E 2 cont_2 2 1 E D D D 256 Default -0 E D E D *Default contract gets all the BW that is available on a port after the active contracts reserved BW is taken.Alteon OS 21. Policy 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Hard 25M 10M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M Soft 20M 8M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M Resv oTOS uTOS Buffer 500K 150 100 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 216 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. October 2003 .

trunk <trunk group number (1-12)> Displays Trunk Group Menu. The ntmstg enabled device will not work with the device configured for Cisco implementation of Spanning Tree BPDUs. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays VLAN Menu. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. see page 224.0 Command Reference /cfg/l2 Layer 2 Configuration Menu [Layer 2 Menu] stg trunk vlan ntmstg cur Spanning Tree Menu Trunk Group Menu VLAN Menu Enable/disable Nortel multiple STG mode Display current layer 2 parameters Table 6-31 Layer 2 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2) Command Syntax and Usage stg <group number [1-16]> Displays Spanning Tree Group Menu. ntmstg disable|enable Enables or disables Nortel Multiple Spanning Tree Group mode. To view menu options. October 2003 „ 217 . cur Displays the current Layer 2 parameters. When Nortel multiple STG mode is enabled. You need to reset the switch with the command /boot/reset for the Spanning Tree Group configuration to change to ntmstg enabled. the Nortel implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 218. see page 222.Alteon OS 21. the Cisco implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. When Nortel multiple STG mode is disabled. The factory default value of this command is Nortel multiple STG mode disabled.

1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).Globally turn Spanning Tree ON off . Spanning Tree can be enabled or disabled for each port.Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF default . See your Application Guide for a detailed description of this feature and how to configure Spanning Tree Groups on the switch.0 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stg Spanning Tree Group Configuration When multiple paths exist on a network. Multiple Spanning Trees can be enabled on tagged or untagged ports. This command is turned on by default.Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group on .Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group clear . Alteon OS supports the IEEE 802. If that path fails. The default Spanning Tree group (1) can have more than one VLAN.Port parameter menu add . Each VLAN can be placed in only one Spanning Tree group per switch except for the default Spanning Tree group (STG 1). When multiple paths exist. October 2003 . All other Spanning Tree groups (2-16) can have only one VLAN associated with it.Alteon OS 21.Display current bridge parameters 218 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Spanning Tree configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path.Bridge parameter menu port .Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur .Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group remove . STP is used to prevent loops in the network topology. [Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu] brg . Alteon OS supports up to 16 instances of Spanning Trees or Spanning Tree groups. Spanning Tree automatically sets up another active path on the network to sustain network operations. STP forces redundant data paths into a standby (blocked) state. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) detects and eliminates logical loops in a bridged or switched network. Thus.

Table 6-32 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stp) Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu. add <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter. on Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol.Alteon OS 21. remove <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter. cur Displays the current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters. off Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol. clear Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree. default Resets STG and Group member parameters to factory default. To view menu options. STP must be enabled. see page 220. see page 221. To view menu options.0 Command Reference NOTE – When VRRP is used for active/active redundancy. October 2003 „ 219 . port <port number> Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.

mxage <new bridge max age (6-40 secs)> Configures the bridge maximum age.The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). hello <new bridge hello time (1-10 secs)> Configures the bridge hello time.Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs] mxage . The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures the STP network.Set bridge Priority [0-65535] hello . STP bridge parameters include: „ „ „ „ „ Bridge priority Bridge hello time Bridge maximum age Forwarding delay Bridge aging time Table 6-33 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new bridge priority (0-65535)> Configures the bridge priority. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. The range is 0 to 65535.Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs) aging . The range is 4 to 30 seconds.Set bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs.0 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stg/brg Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration [Bridge Spanning Tree Menu] prior . the higher the bridge priority. configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network.Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs) fwd . The lower the value. fwd <new bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)> Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. The range is 1 to 10 seconds. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state. and the default is 20 seconds. The range is 6 to 40 seconds. 0 to disable) cur . and the default is 32768. 220 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STP root bridge. To make this switch the root bridge. and the default is 2 seconds. October 2003 .Display current bridge parameters Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STP operation of the switch. and the default is 15 seconds.

When configuring STP bridge parameters. set this parameter to 0.Set port Path Cost (1-65535.Turn port’s Spanning Tree ON off . STP port parameters include: „ „ Port priority Port path cost Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds.Turn port’s Spanning Tree OFF cur .Alteon OS 21.Display current port Spanning Tree parameters Spanning Tree port parameters are used to modify STP operation on an individual port basis. 0 to disable)> Configures the forwarding database aging time. October 2003 „ 221 .0 Command Reference Table 6-33 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg) Command Syntax and Usage aging <new bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs. The aging time specifies the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the forwarding database. the following formulas must be used: „ „ 2*(fwd-1) > mxage 2*(hello+1) < mxage /cfg/l2/stg <STG Group Index>/port <port #> Spanning Tree Port Configuration [Spanning Tree Port 1 Menu] prior . To disable aging. 0 for default) on .Set port Priority (0-255) cost . and the default is 300 seconds. cur Displays the current bridge STP parameters.

October 2003 . The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. Up to eight ports/trunks can belong to the same trunk group. Table 6-34 Spanning Tree Port Menu (/cfg/l2/stp/port) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new port Priority (0-255)> Configures the port priority. The range is 0 to 255. the faster the port. Up to 12 trunk groups can be configured on the Alteon Application Switch. off Disables STP on the port. Generally speaking. multi-link connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk-capable devices. 0 for default)> Configures the port path cost. Best performance is achieved when all ports in a trunk are configured for the same speed. combining their bandwidth to create a single. /cfg/l2/trunk <trunk group number> Trunk Configuration Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk capable devices. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together.Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. The default is 10 for 100Mbps ports.Alteon OS 21. cur Displays the current STP port parameters. with the following restrictions: „ „ „ „ Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group. When trunk groups are configured. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. larger virtual link. and 1 for Gigabit ports.0 Command Reference The port option of STP is turned on by default. and the default is 128. on Enables STP on the port. the lower the path cost. 222 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. cost <new port Path Cost (1-65535. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. The range is 1 to 65535. A value of 0 indicates that the default cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. Trunking from non-Alteon devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology.

Disable trunk group del . the trunk group is empty and disabled. dis Turns the current trunk group off.Add port to trunk group rem .Delete trunk group cur . October 2003 „ 223 . cur Displays the current trunk group parameters. del Removes the current trunk group configuration. rem <port number> Removes a physical port from the current trunk group.Alteon OS 21. add <port number> Adds a physical port to the current trunk group.Remove port from trunk group ena . ena Enables the current trunk group.Set BW contract for this trunk group add .Enable trunk group dis .0 Command Reference By default.Display current Trunk Group configuration Table 6-35 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this trunk group. By default. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. the contract number is 256 for AD3 and 1024 for AD4. [Trunk group 1 Menu] cont .

The default VLAN name is the first one. 224 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference /cfg/l2/vlan <VLAN number> VLAN Configuration VLANs are commonly used to split up groups of network users into manageable broadcast domains. stg <Spanning Tree Group index (1-16)> Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group. rem <port number> Removes port(s) or trunk group(s) from this VLAN. to create logical segmentation of workgroups. The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes. The default contract number is 256 on AD3 and 1024 on AD4.Alteon OS 21. and to enforce security policies among logical segments. By default. the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1. For more information on configuring VLANs. see “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 33. and change the port membership of the VLAN. delete the VLAN. add <port number> Adds port(s) or trunk group(s) to the VLAN membership. cont <BW Contract number. change the status of the VLAN. October 2003 . (1-256)> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for this VLAN. [VLAN 1 Menu] name stg cont add rem def jumbo learn ena dis del cur - Set VLAN name Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group Set BW contract Add port to VLAN Remove port from VLAN Define VLAN as list of ports Enable/disable Jumbo Frame support Enable/disable smac learning Enable VLAN Disable VLAN Delete VLAN Display current VLAN configuration Table 6-36 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage name Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. which is enabled all the time.

dis Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration. ena Enables this VLAN. You cannot remove a port from VLAN #1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN. October 2003 „ 225 . cur Displays the current VLAN configuration. Every port must be a member of at least one VLAN.Alteon OS 21. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. jumbo disable|enable Enables or disables jumbo frame support on this VLAN. Also.0 Command Reference Table 6-36 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage def <list of port numbers> Defines which ports are members of this VLAN. it defines ports between 1-28 for VLAN 1. NOTE – All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. You need to reset the switch using /boot/reset command to enable jumbo frames on the switch. you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on (see the tag command on page 202). del Deletes this VLAN. learn disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address learning on this VLAN. Any port which is removed from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN #1. By default.

To view menu options see page 236. frwd Displays the IP Forwarding Menu. nwf <Network filter number (1-256)> Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu. see page 231. To view menu options. route Displays the IP Static Route Menu. rmap <route map number (1-32)> Displays the Route Map Menu. To view menu options. see page 230. gw <default gateway number (1-259)> Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3 Layer 3 Configuration Menu [Layer 3 Menu] if gw route arp frwd nwf rmap rip1 ospf bgp port dns bootp vrrp rtrid metrc cur Interface Menu Default Gateway Menu Static Route Menu ARP Menu Forwarding Menu Network Filters Menu Route Map Menu Routing Information Protocol Menu Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu Border Gateway Protocol Menu IP Port Menu Domain Name System Menu Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu Set router ID Set default gateway metric Display current IP configuration Table 6-37 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the IP Interface Menu. To view menu options. arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol menu. To view menu options. see page 240. 226 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. see page 229. To view menu options. To view menu options. To view menu options see page 235. October 2003 . see page 228. rip1 Displays the Routing Interface Protocol version 1 Menu.Alteon OS 21. see page 233.

17. To view menu options. October 2003 „ 227 . see page 260 rtrid <IP address (such as. see page 258.4. vrrp Displays Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu. To view menu options. 192.Alteon OS 21. bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Menu. see page 257. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. To view menu options.101)> Defines the router ID.0 Command Reference Table 6-37 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays the OSPF Menu. To view menu options. cur Displays the current IP configuration. see page 251. To view menu options. see page 259. metrc strict|roundrobin Sets the default gateway metric for strict or roundrobin. port <port number> Displays the IP Port Menu. see page 275. see page 241. For more information on gateway metrics. To view menu options. dns Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu. bootp Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu. The default gateway metric is strict.

The Interface option is disabled by default.4. dis Disables this IP interface. It is enabled by default.Alteon OS 21. 228 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Each IP interface represents the Alteon Application Switch on an IP subnet on your network. though any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it.101)> Configures the IP address of the switch interface using dotted decimal notation. cur Displays the current interface settings. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Configures the VLAN number for this interface. relay disable|enable Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/if <interface number> IP Interface Configuration [IP Interface addr mask vlan relay ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Set IP address Set subnet mask Set VLAN number Enable/disable BOOTP relay Enable IP interface Disable IP interface Delete IP interface Display current interface configuration The Alteon Application Switch can be configured with up to 256 IP interfaces. del Removes this IP interface. ena Enables this IP interface. Table 6-38 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as 192. October 2003 .255.255.17. mask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. Each interface can belong to one VLAN.0)> Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation.

17. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Gateways one to four are reserved for default gateway load balancing. The default is 8 attempts. The range is from 1 to 120 seconds. The default is 2 seconds. The intr option sets the time between health checks.Set interval between ping attempts retry .Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN arp .Enable default gateway dis .Disable default gateway del . 192. Gateways five to 259 are used for load-balancing of VLAN-based gateways. The range is from 1 to 120 attempts. retry <number of attempts (1-120)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway inoperative.Enable/disable ARP only health checks vlan . ena Enables the gateway for use.4. Table 6-39 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage addr <default gateway address (such as.Delete default gateway cur .Set VLAN number ena . vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the VLAN to be assigned to this default IP gateway. This command is disabled by default. This option is disabled by default. intr <0-60 seconds> The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up.Display current default gateway configuration NOTE – The switch can be configured with up to 255 gateways. October 2003 „ 229 .0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/gw <gateway number> Default IP Gateway Configuration [Default gateway 1 Menu] addr .Alteon OS 21.44)> Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation. arp disable|enable Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks.Set IP address intr .

destination subnet mask.Add static route rem .Display current static routes Up to 128 static routes can be configured. rem <destination> <mask> Removes a static route. and gateway address. You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address. del Deletes the gateway from the configuration. Default Gateway Metrics For information about configuring which gateway is selected when multiple default gateways are enabled. October 2003 . see page 275.0 Command Reference Table 6-39 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables the gateway. The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation.Remove static route cur . /cfg/l3/route IP Static Route Configuration [IP Static Route Menu] add . cur Displays the current IP static routes. 230 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Table 6-40 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/route) Command Syntax and Usage add <destination> <mask> <gateway> <interface number> Adds a static route. Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation. cur Displays the current gateway settings.Alteon OS 21.

Alteon OS 21. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache. cur Displays the current ARP configurations.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/arp ARP Configuration Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer. rearp <2-120 minutes> Defines re-ARP period in minutes. Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests. To view options.Static ARP Menu . see page 231. Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network. Static ARPs can also be configured on some gateways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet. In any IP communication. You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes.Set re-ARP period in minutes . /cfg/l3/arp/static ARP Static Configuration Menu Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that are learnt dynamically.Display current ARP configuration Table 6-41 ARP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage static Displays Static ARP menu. [ARP Menu] static rearp cur . October 2003 „ 231 . ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory.

17. cur Displays current static ARP configuration.0 Command Reference NOTE – Alteon OS 21. del <IP address (such as. October 2003 . Alteon OS 20. 232 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Display current static ARP configuration Table 6-42 ARP Static Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp/static) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Adds a permanent ARP entry.0 allows the static ARP configuration to retain over reboots.Delete an ARP entry cur .101)> Deletes a permanent ARP entry.x and below allow the user to configure the ARP information but that information cannot be retained over the switch reboot. [Static ARP Menu] add .4.Add a permanent ARP entry del .Alteon OS 21. 192.

0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/frwd IP Forwarding Configuration [IP Forwarding Menu] local . cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings.Display current local network definitions This menu is used for adding local networks by setting the local network address and netmask for the route cache. /cfg/l3/frwd/local Local Network Route Caching Definition [IP Local Networks Menu] add . on Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the Alteon Application Switch. see page 233. This command is disabled by default.Local network definition for route caching menu dirbr . Up to five local networks (lnets) can be configured. and to remove local networks. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 233 .Add local network definition rem .Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts on . To view menu options.Alteon OS 21.Remove local network definition cur .Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF cur .Globally turn IP Forwarding ON off . Forwarding is turned off by default. off Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the Alteon Application Switch.Display current IP Forwarding configuration Table 6-43 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd) Command Syntax and Usage local Displays the menu used to define local network for route caching. dirbr disable|enable Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts.

255. rem <local network address> <local network mask> Removes a definition for a local network. cur Displays the current local network definitions. The local network address is used to define the base IP address in the range which will be cached.0 Mask 128. October 2003 . 234 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 128.0.0 through 255. For details.0 .0.Alteon OS 21.0.32. To limit the route cache to your local hosts. To determine if a route should be added to the memory cache.255.0. by reducing the size of the ARP table on the Alteon Application Switch. the local network address and mask are both set to 0.0.0.0 255.0. By default.0 Command Reference Table 2 IP Local Networks Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd/local) Command Syntax and Usage add <local network address> <local network mask> Adds a definition for a local network.0. the destination address is masked (bitwise and) with the local network mask and checked against the local network address.255.32.0. Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache The Local Route Cache lets you use switch resources more efficiently.255. you could configure the parameters as shown in the examples in the following table.0.0.255. The /cfg/l3/frwd/local/add parameters define a range of addresses that will be cached on the Alteon Application Switch.255 Address 0.0.255 205.127.255 128.0.32.0.0. Addresses to be cached are subnets that are directly connected and for which there is an interface configured on the Alteon Application Switch. and the local network mask is the mask which is applied to produce the range.0.205.255.0.0 . see “Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache” on page 234.255.255.0. Table 6-44 Local Routing Cache Address Ranges Local Host Address Range 0.255.0 .0 NOTE – All addresses that fall outside the defined range are forwarded to the default gateway. The default gateways must be within range.255.0.0.0 205. This produces a range that includes all Internet addresses for route caching: 0.0 128.

The default address is 0.255. October 2003 „ 235 .0.Display current Network Filter configuration Table 6-45 IP Network Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/nwf) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as. mask <subnet mask (such as.0)> Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with /cfg/l3/nwf/addr to define the range of IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled.255. delete Deletes the Network Filter configuration.Disable Network Filter delete .Delete Network Filter cur .0. 255.IP Subnet mask enable . For Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). 192.0.44)> Sets the starting IP address for this filter.IP Address mask .4. cur Displays the current the Network Filter configuration.0.0.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/nwf Network Filter Configuration [IP Network Filter 1 Menu] addr . disable Disables the Network Filter configuration. then assign the route map to the peer.0. enable Enables the Network Filter configuration. The default value is 0. assign the network filter to a route map. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21.Enable Network Filter disable .17.

which affects both inbound and outbound directions. 236 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. see page 238. [IP Route Map alist aspath ap lp metric type prec weight enable disable delete cur 1 - Menu] Access List number AS Filter Menu Set as-path prepend of the matched route Set local-preference of the matched route Set metric of the matched route Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route Set the precedence of this route map Set weight of the matched route Enable route map Disable route map Delete route map Display current route map configuration Routing maps control and modify routing information. aspath <number (1-8)> Displays the Autonomous System (AS) Filter menu. ap <AS number> [<AS number>] [<AS number>]|none Sets the AS path preference of the matched route. see page 239. October 2003 . The path with the higher preference is preferred. metric <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric of the matched route.Alteon OS 21. For more information. One to three path preferences can be configured. lp <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the local preference of the matched route. Table 6-46 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) Command Syntax and Usage alist <number (1-8)> Displays the Access List menu. For more information.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> Routing Map Configuration Menu NOTE – The map number (1-32) represents the routing map you wish to configure.

enable Enables the route map. Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics. The smaller the value. The default is type 1. „ „ „ Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics.Alteon OS 21. delete Deletes the route map. Type 2 routes have more cost than Type 2. disable Disables the route map. October 2003 „ 237 . the higher the precedence. prec <value (1-255)> Sets the precedence of the route map. none—Removes the OSPF metric. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Default value is 10. weight <value (0-65534)>|none Sets the weight of the route map.0 Command Reference Table 6-46 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage type <value (1|2)>|none Assigns the type of OSPF metric. cur Displays the current route configuration.

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number/alist <access list number>
IP Access List Configuration Menu
NOTE – The route map number (1-32) and the access list number (1-8) represent the IP access list you wish to configure.

[IP Access List nwf metric action enable disable delete cur -

1 Menu] Network Filter number Metric Set Network Filter action Enable Access List Disable Access List Delete Access List Display current Access List configuration

Table 6-47 IP Access List Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/alist)
Command Syntax and Usage nwf <network filter number (1-256)> Sets the network filter number. See “/cfg/l3/nwf” on page 235 for details. metric <(1-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies action for the access list. enable Enables the access list. disable Disables the access list. delete Deletes the access list. cur Displays the current Access List configuration.

238

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> aspath <autonomous system path>
Autonomous System Filter Path
NOTE – The rmap number (1-32) and the path number (1-8) represent the AS path you wish to configure.

[AS Filter 1 Menu] as - AS number action - Set AS Filter action enable - Enable AS Filter disable - Disable AS Filter delete - Delete AS Filter cur - Display current AS Filter configuration

Table 6-48 AS Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/aspath)
Command Syntax and Usage as <AS number (1-65535)> Sets the Autonomous System filter’s path number. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action. enable Enables the Autonomous System filter. disable Disables the Autonomous System filter. delete Deletes the Autonomous System filter. cur Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

239

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/rip1
Routing Information Protocol Configuration
[Routing Information Protocol Menu] updat - Set update period in seconds spply - Enable/disable supplying route updates lsten - Enable/disable listening to route updates deflt - Enable/disable listening to default routes statc - Enable/disable supplying static routes poisn - Enable/disable poisoned reverse vip - Enable/disable vip advertisement on - Globally turn RIP ON off - Globally turn RIP OFF cur - Display current RIP configuration

The RIP1 Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol, version 1 (RIP1) parameters. This option is turned off by default. NOTE – Do not configure RIP1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2. Table 6-49 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip1)
Command Syntax and Usage updat <update period (1-120 seconds)> Sets the RIP update period in seconds. It is set at 30 seconds by default. spply disable|enable This command is disabled by default. When enabled, the switch supplies routes to other routers. lsten disable|enable This command is disabled by default. When enabled, the switch learns routes from other routers. deflt disable|enable When enabled, the switch accepts RIP default routes from other routers, but gives them lower priority than configured gateways. When disabled, the switch rejects RIP default routes. This command is disabled by default. statc disable|enable This command is disabled by default. When enabled, the switch supplies static routes. poisn disable|enable This command is disabled by default. When enabled, the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. When disabled, the switch uses only split horizon.

240

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-49 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip1)
Command Syntax and Usage vip disable|enable Enables or disables the advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes. If a VIP route exists in a routing table, it will always be advertised except when it is included in another network route that is already being advertised. Note: If all real servers behind a VIP go down, the route gets removed from the routing table, and will not be advertised. If we disable all the real servers using operation command, the VIP route does not get eliminated from the routing table, and the switch will continue to advertise the route. on Globally turns RIP ON. off Globally turns RIP OFF. cur Displays the current RIP configuration.

/cfg/l3/ospf
Open Shortest Path First Configuration
Alteon OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol. The Alteon OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS). The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas. In any AS with multiple areas, one area must be designated as area 0, known as the backbone. The backbone acts as the central OSPF area. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone, which then distributes it to other areas as needed. For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch, refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

241

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

[Open Shortest Path First Menu] aindex - OSPF Area (index) menu range - OSPF Summary Range menu if - OSPF Interface menu virt - OSPF Virtual Links menu host - OSPF Host Entry menu redist - OSPF Route Redistribute menu lsdb - Set the LSDB limit default - Originate default route information md5key - OSPF MD5 Key menu on - Globally turn OSPF ON off - Globally turn OSPF OFF cur - Display current OSPF configuration

Table 6-50 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the area index menu. This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number. See page 243 to view menu options. range <range number (1-16)> Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses. See page 245 to view menu options. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu. See page 246 to view menu options. virt <virtual link (1-3)> Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link. See page 247 to view menu options. host <host entry number (1-128)> Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes. Up to 128 host routes can be configured. Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF. It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and ABR failover possible. See page 249 to view menu options. redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> Displays Route Distribution Menu See page 250 to view menu options. lsdb <LSDB limit (0-2000, 0 for no limit)> Sets the link state database limit. default <metric (1-16777215)> <metric-type 1|2>|none Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area. Use none for no default.

242

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-50 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage md5key <key ID (1-255)> Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key. See on Enables OSPF on the Alteon Application Switch. off Disables OSPF on the Alteon Application Switch. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration settings.

/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex
Area Index Configuration Menu
[OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu] areaid - Set area ID type - Set area type metric - Set stub area metric auth - Set authentication type spf - Set time interval between two SPF calculations enable - Enable area disable - Disable area delete - Delete area cur - Display current OSPF area configuration

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

243

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-51 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex)
Command Syntax and Usage areaid <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number. type transit|stub|nssa Defines the type of area. For example, when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone, the area type must be defined as transit. Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices. Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area. Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed. Typically, a stub area is connected to only one other area. NSSA: Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional capabilities. For example, routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas. External routes from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the NSSA but are not distributed into other areas. metric <metric value (1-65535)> Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value. All routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions. Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route. Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes. auth none|password|md5 None: No authentication required. Password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate. MD5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required. spf <interval (0-255)> Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm. enable Enables the OSPF area. disable Disables the OSPF area. delete Deletes the OSPF area. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration.

244

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/ospf/range
OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu
[OSPF Summary addr mask aindex hide enable disable delete cur Range 1 Menu] - Set IP address - Set IP mask - Set area index - Enable/disable hide range - Enable range - Disable range - Delete range - Display current OSPF summary range configuration

Table 6-52 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP Address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Displays the base IP address for the range. mask <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101> Displays the IP address mask for the range. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index used by the Alteon Application Switch. hide disable|enable Hides the OSPF summary range. enable Enables the OSPF summary range. disable Disables the OSPF summary range. delete Deletes the OSPF summary range. cur Displays the current OSPF summary range.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

245

) cost <cost value (1-65535)> Displays cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. October 2003 . prio <priority value (0-255)> Displays the assigned priority value to the Alteon Application Switch’s OSPF interfaces. retra <value (0-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds. trans <value (0-3600)> Displays the transit delay in seconds. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the interval in seconds between the hello packets for the interfaces.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Configuration Menu [OSPF Interface aindex prio cost hello dead trans retra key mdkey enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Set area index Set interface router priority Set interface cost Set hello interval in seconds Set dead interval in seconds Set transit delay in seconds Set retransmit interval in seconds Set authentication key Set MD5 key ID Enable interface Disable interface Delete interface Display current OSPF interface configuration Table 6-53 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index. which is set for an interval of seconds before declaring a silent router to be down. dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet. A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR). (A priority value of 127 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. 246 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Usually the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface.Alteon OS 21. Low cost indicates high bandwidth.

Set authentication key .Set dead interval in seconds .0 Command Reference Table 6-53 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if) Command Syntax and Usage key <key>|none Sets the authentication key to clear the password.Enable interface .Set area index .Disable interface . enable Enables OSPF interface.Display current OSPF interface configuration Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set retransmit interval in seconds . October 2003 „ 247 . /cfg/l3/ospf/virt OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu [OSPF Virtual aindex hello dead trans retra nbr key mdkey enable disable delete cur Link 1 Menu] .Set transit delay in seconds .Delete interface . mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Assigns an MD5 key to the interface. cur Displays the current settings for OSPF interface. delete Deletes OSPF interface.Set hello interval in seconds . disable Disables OSPF interface.Alteon OS 21.Set router ID of virtual neighbor .Set MD5 key ID .

Default is none. which is set to be in an interval of seconds. dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet. which is set to be in an interval of seconds. key <key>|none Displays the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link.0. enable Enables OSPF virtual link. retra <value (1-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds.Alteon OS 21.0. disable Disables OSPF virtual link. Default is 0. nbr <nbr router ID (IP address)> Displays the router ID of the virtual neighbor. 248 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the authentication parameters of a hello packet.0 Command Reference Table 6-54 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index. cur Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings. Default is 40 seconds.0. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link. Default is none. trans <value (1-3600)> Displays the delay in transit in seconds. Default is one seconds. Default is five seconds. delete Deletes OSPF virtual link. October 2003 .

Set area index cost .Disable host entry delete .0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/host OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu [OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu] addr . cur Displays the current OSPF host entries.Display current OSPF host entry configuration Table 6-55 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as.Set host entry IP address aindex .4. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. enable Enables OSPF host entry.Alteon OS 21. 192.17. delete Deletes OSPF host entry. October 2003 „ 249 .Enable host entry disable .Set cost of this host entry enable . disable Disables OSPF host entry.101)> Displays the base IP address for the host entry. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index of the host.Delete host entry cur . cost <cost value [1-65535]> Displays the cost value of the host.

To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol. enter routing map numbers one per line. The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed. [OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu] add .0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu.Display current route-maps added Table 6-56 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/redist) Command Syntax and Usage add (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>)|all Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list. enter none.. cur Displays the current route map settings. rem (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>) . enter routing map numbers one per line. To remove all 32 route maps. enter all. NULL at the end.Remove rmap from route redistribution list export . Removes routing maps from the rmap list. To remove specific route maps..Export all routes of this protocol cur . enter all.Alteon OS 21. |all Removes the route map from the route redistribution list. This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list. October 2003 .To add all the 32 route maps. To add specific route maps.Add rmap into route redistribution list rem . NULL at end. export <metric (1-16777215)><metric type (1|2)> |none Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs in which the metric and metric type are specified. /cfg/l3/ospf/md5key OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu [OSPF MD5 Key key delete cur 1 Menu] Set authentication key Delete key Display current MD5 key configuration 250 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.

The BGP Menu enables you to configure the switch to receive routes and to advertise static routes. it's called external BGP (eBGP). /cfg/l3/bgp Border Gateway Protocol Configuration Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. The BGP menu option is turned off by default. fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other internal and external routers. [Border Gateway peer aggr as pref on off cur Protocol Menu] Peer menu Aggregation menu Set Autonomous System (AS) number Set Local Preference Globally turn BGP ON Globally turn BGP OFF Display current BGP configuration Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 6-57 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/md5key) Command Syntax and Usage key <key. October 2003 „ 251 . cur Displays the current MD5 key configuration. rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s) to your upstream provider(s). When run between different autonomous systems. up to 16 chars> Sets the authentication key up to 16 characters for this OSPF packet. BGP is defined in RFC 1771. it's called internal BGP (iBGP). You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system or between different autonomous systems. delete Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet.Alteon OS 21. BGP allows you to decide what is the “best” route for a packet to take from your network to a destination on another network. When run within an autonomous system.

There is one fixed route per IP interface.Alteon OS 21. An autonomous system is assigned a globally unique number called an Autonomous System Number (ASN). either a single network or a group of networks that is controlled by a common network administrator on behalf of an administrative entity (such as a university. see page 253. within an autonomous system. or use the local preference if you are using iBGP. Each border router. or a business division). When multiple peers advertise the same route. The path with the higher value is preferred. exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks. aggr <aggregate number (1-16)> Displays the Aggregation Menu. To view menu options. pref <local preference (0-4294967294)> Sets the local preference. An autonomous system (AS) is the unit of router policy. An autonomous system shares routing information with other autonomous systems using the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). To view menu options. see page 256.0 Command Reference NOTE – Fixed routes are subnet routes. use the route with the shortest AS path as the preferred route if you are using eBGP. October 2003 . cur Displays the current BGP configuration. off Globally turns BGP off. a business enterprise. Table 6-58 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer number (1-16)> Displays the menu used to configure each BGP peer. on Globally turns BGP on. as <autonomous system number (1-65535)> Sets Autonomous System Number for this autonomous system. 252 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.

0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/bgp/peer <peer number> BGP Peer Configuration Menu [BGP Peer 1 Menu] redist . that will elapse before the peer session is torn down because the switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the peer. To view the menu options.Add rmap into out-rmap list remi . in seconds.Alteon OS 21.Set min time between route originations ttl . It is set at 90 seconds by default.Display current peer configuration This menu is used to configure BGP peers.Disable peer delete .Add rmap into in-rmap list addo .Set connect retry interval orig .Set hold time alive . 192. 3-65535)> Sets the period of time.Delete peer cur .Set remote IP address ras . hold <hold time (0. alive <keepalive time (0.Remove rmap from out-rmap list enable .Set remote autonomous system number hold . Table 6-59 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage redist Displays BGP Redistribution Menu.0.Set keep alive time advert .Set min time between advertisements retry .Set time-to-live of IP datagrams addi . see page 255.17. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Enable peer disable .4.0. using dotted decimal notation. The peer option is disabled by default. It is set at 0 by default. ras <AS number (0-65535)> Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer. 1-21845)> Sets the keep-alive time for the specified peer in seconds.Remove rmap from in-rmap list remo .0. The default address is 0. which are border routers that exchange routing information with routers on internal and external networks. October 2003 „ 253 . addr <IP address (such as.101)> Defines the IP address for the specified peer (border router).Redistribution menu addr .

orig <min orig time (1-65535)> Sets the minimum time between route originations in seconds. cur Displays the current BGP peer configuration.0 Command Reference Table 6-59 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage advert <min adv time (1-65535)> Sets time in seconds between advertisements. This value is used to restrict the number of “hops” the advertisement makes.Alteon OS 21. when exhausted. TTL specifies a certain time span in seconds that. The TTL is determined by the number of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded. addi <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into in-route map list. 254 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. October 2003 . dis Disables this peer configuration. retry <connect retry interval (1-65535)> Sets connection retry interval in seconds. which allow BGP peers to talk across a routed network. remo <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from out-route map list. This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can make. It is also used to support multi-hops. The default number is set at 1. addo <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into out-route map list. del Deletes this peer configuration. remi <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from in-route map list. ena Enables this peer configuration. ttl <number of router hops (1-255)> Time-to-live (TTL) is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet has been in the network too long and should be discarded. would cause the packet to be discarded.

you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes. you have to enable that protocol in this redistribute submenu. If the routes are learned from default gateway configuration. if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol. static disable|enable Enables or disables advertising static routes. or none. Defaults routes can be configured as import. October 2003 „ 255 .Alteon OS 21. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default gateway or learned through other protocols and redistributed to peer. default none|import|originate|redistribute Sets default route action. rip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising RIP routes ospf disable|enable Enables or disables advertising OSPF routes. None: No routes are configured Import: Import these routes. Similarly. redistribute. Originate: The switch sends a default route to peers even though it does not have any default routes in its routing table. fixed disable|enable Enables or disables advertising fixed routes. originate.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu [Redistribution metric default rip ospf fixed static vip cur Menu] Set default-metric of advertised routes Set default route action Enable/disable advertising RIP routes Enable/disable advertising OSPF routes Enable/disable advertising fixed routes Enable/disable advertising static routes Enable/disable advertising VIP routes Display current redistribution configuration Table 6-60 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist) Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-4294967294)>|none Sets default metric of advertised routes.

Display current aggregation configuration This menu allows you to configure aggregate routing to condense the number of routes between internal and external peer routers.Set aggregation IP address mask .Alteon OS 21. delete Deletes the selected aggregate.255. cur Displays the current redistribution configuration.Set aggregation network mask enable .Disable aggregation delete . such as 255.255.Enable aggregation disable . disable Disables the selected aggregate. mask <IP subnet mask. /cfg/l3/bgp/aggr <aggregate number> BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu NOTE – The aggregate number (1-16) represents the aggregation route you wish to configure.0> Sets the IP mask for the selected aggregate. October 2003 .Delete aggregation current . [BGP Aggr 1 Menu] addr . enable Enables the selected aggregate. Table 6-61 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address.101> Adds the IP address to the selected aggregate.4. 256 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.17. such as 192.0 Command Reference Table 6-60 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist) Command Syntax and Usage vip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising VIP routes.

By default. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. /cfg/l3/port <port number> IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu [IP Forwarding Port 1 Menu] on .Turn Forwarding OFF cur .0 Command Reference Table 6-61 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage current Displays the current aggregate configuration. cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings. Table 6-62 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/port) Command Syntax and Usage on Enables IP forwarding for the current port. off Disables IP forwarding for the current port.Display current port configuration The Layer 3 Port Menu allows you to turn IP forwarding on or off on a port-by-port basis. October 2003 „ 257 . the port forwarding option is turned on.Turn Forwarding ON off .Alteon OS 21.

Display current DNS configuration The Domain Name System (DNS) Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS servers on your local network.4.com cur Displays the current Domain Name System settings.101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server. and tftp commands. October 2003 . 192.Set default domain name cur . traceroute.17. If the primary DNS server fails. secon <IP address (such as.Set IP address of primary DNS server secon . Table 6-63 Domain Name System Menu Options (/cfg/l3/dns) Command Syntax and Usage prima <IP address (such as. Use dotted decimal notation. 258 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server. and for setting the default domain name served by the switch services. dname <dotted DNS notation>|none Sets the default domain name used by the switch. Enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/dns Domain Name System Configuration Menu [Domain Name System Menu] prima .17. For example: mycompany.Set IP address of secondary DNS server dname . DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping.4. the configured secondary will be used instead. 192.

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/bootp
Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu
[Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu] addr - Set IP address of BOOTP server addr2 - Set IP address of second BOOTP server on - Globally turn BOOTP relay ON off - Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF cur - Display current BOOTP relay configuration

The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. The BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the Alteon Application Switch. BOOTP relay menu is turned off by default. Table 6-64 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bootp)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server. addr2 <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server. on Globally turns on BOOTP relay. off Globally turns off BOOTP relay. cur Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

259

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp
VRRP Configuration Menu
[Virtual Router vr vrgroup group if track hotstan on off holdoff cur Redundancy Protocol Menu] VRRP Virtual Router Menu VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup Menu VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu VRRP Interface Menu VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Enable/disable hot-standby processing Globally turn VRRP ON Globally turn VRRP OFF Globally VRRP hold off time Display current VRRP configuration

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Alteon Application Switches provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. By default, VRRP is disabled. Alteon OS has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as well, allowing for full active/active redundancy between its Layer 4 switches. For more information on VRRP, see the “High Availability” chapter in your Alteon OS 21.0 Application Guide. Table 6-65 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage vr <virtual router number (1-256)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu. This menu is used for configuring up to 256 virtual routers on this switch. To view menu options, see page 262. vrgroup <virtual router vrgroup number (1-16)> Displays VR Group Menu. To view menu options, see page 265. group Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu, used to combine all virtual routers together as one logical entity. Group options must be configured when using two or more Alteon switches in a hotstandby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time. To view menu options, see page 269.

260

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-65 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu. To view menu options, see page 273. track Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu. This menu is used for weighting the criteria used when modifying priority levels in the master router election process. To view menu options, see page 274. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot standby processing, in which two or more switches provide redundancy for each other. By default, this option is disabled. on Globally enables VRRP on this switch. off Globally disables VRRP on this switch. holdoff <0-255 seconds> Globally suspends VRRP operation for the specified interval. cur Displays the current VRRP parameters.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

261

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>
Virtual Router Configuration Menu
[VRRP Virtual track vrid addr if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router 1 Menu] - Priority Tracking Menu - Set virtual router ID - Set IP address - Set interface number - Set renter priority - Set advertisement interval - Enable or disable preemption - Enable or disable sharing - Enable virtual router - Disable virtual router - Delete virtual router - Display current VRRP virtual router configuration

This menu is used for configuring up to 256 virtual routers for this switch. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address. Virtual routers are disabled by default. Table 6-66 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled. To view menu options, see page 264. vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)> Defines the virtual router ID. This is used in conjunction with addr (below) to define a virtual router on this switch. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other, each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router: one that shares the same vrid and addr combination. The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255. The default value is 1. All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface belongs. addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. This is used in conjunction with the vrid (above) to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP device. The default address is 0.0.0.0.

262

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-66 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). If the IP interface has the same IP address as the addr option above, this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router, even if it must preempt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. This preemption occurs even if the preem option below is disabled. The default value is 1. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100. During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track), this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. The default value is 1. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if this virtual router is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. Note that even when preem is disabled, this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). By default, this option is enabled. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing, an Alteon proprietary extension to VRRP. When enabled, this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router, even when in backup mode. By default, this option is enabled. ena Enables this virtual router. dis Disables this virtual router. del Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration. cur Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

263

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>/track
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration
[VRRP Virtual vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu] - Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers - Enable/disable tracking other interfaces - Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports - Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports - Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers - Enable/disable tracking HSRP - Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN - Display current VRRP virtual router configuration

This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met, the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 274). Criteria are tracked dynamically, continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. If the virtual router preemption option (see preem in Table 6-66 on page 262) is enabled, this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that of the current master. Some tracking criteria (vrs, ifs, and ports below) apply to standard virtual routers, otherwise called “virtual interface routers.” Other tracking criteria (l4pts, reals, and hsrp) apply to “virtual server routers,” which perform Layer 4 Server Load Balancing functions. A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address (addr) is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. Table 6-67 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track)
Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch, increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. This command is disabled by default. ifs disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each IP interface active on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is disabled by default.

264

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-67 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track)
Command Syntax and Usage ports disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. This command is disabled by default. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this switch. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master, increasing Layer 4 efficiency. This command is disabled by default. hsrp disable|enable <priority (1-254)> Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. In networks where HSRP is used, enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master, optimizing routing efficiency. This command is disabled by default. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. This command is disabled by default. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup
Virtual Router Group Menu
This feature allows the failover of individual groups of VIRs and VSRs. When Web hosting is shared between two or more customers on a single VRRP switch, you can group VIRs and VSRs to serve the high availability of a specific customer. If failover occurs on a customer link, the group of VIRs and VSRs associated with that customer alone will fail over to the backup switch. The VIRs and VSRs configured for the other customers on the master switch are not affected.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

265

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Up to 16 virtual router groups can be configured on the switch.
[VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup 1 Menu] track - Priority Tracking Menu name - Set virtual router group name add - Add virtual router to group rem - Remove virtual router from group prio - Set priority for virtual router group ena - Enable virtual router group dis - Disable virtual router group del - Delete virtual router group cur - Display current VRRP virtual router group configuration

Table 6-68 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup)
Command Syntax and Usage track Displays VRRP priority tracking menu for this virtual router group. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. To view menu options, see page 267. name Defines virtual router group name up to eight characters. add <virtual router number (1-256)> Adds a virtual router to the group. Each virtual router group can have up to 16 virtual routers. rem <virtual router number (1-256)> Removes a virtual router from the group. prio <1-254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100. During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup #/track), this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. ena Enables the virtual router group. dis Disables the virtual router group.

266

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met. ports disable|enable When enabled. /cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup <vrgroup number>/ track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. October 2003 „ 267 . the priority will be increased for each active port on the VLAN on this virtual router group. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. Criteria are tracked dynamically. continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 274).0 Command Reference Table 6-68 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the virtual router group. [VRRP Vrgroup ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur 1 Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP vrgroup tracking configuration Table 6-69 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage ifs disable|enable When enabled.Alteon OS 21. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. This command is disabled by default. cur Displays the current VRRP virtual router group configuration. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. the priority will be increased for each IP interface active on this virtual router group.

October 2003 . optimizing routing efficiency.0 Command Reference Table 6-69 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. the priority will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this virtual router group. Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router group. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router group for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master.Alteon OS 21. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance on the virtual router group that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. the priority will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this virtual router group. In networks where HSRP is used. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. 268 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. hsrp disable|enable Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover.

Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled. The default virtual router ID is 1.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual router. NOTE – This option is required to be configured only when using at least two Alteon Application Switches in a hot-standby failover configuration. October 2003 „ 269 .Disable virtual router . vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)> Defines the virtual router ID. Table 6-70 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group. All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface (see if below) belongs. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address.Set advertisement interval . which forces all virtual routers on the Alteon Application Switch to either be master or backup as a group.Set interface number . where only one switch is active at any time. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router.Enable virtual router .Enable or disable preemption .0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/group Virtual Router Group Configuration [VRRP Virtual track vrid if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router Group Menu] . The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255. To view menu options. a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address. see page 274.Set virtual router ID .Enable or disable sharing .Delete virtual router . On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set renter priority .Alteon OS 21. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP.Priority Tracking Menu .

the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. dis Disables the virtual router group. October 2003 . even when in backup mode. this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. del Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration. When enabled. By default.0 Command Reference Table 6-70 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). 270 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). cur Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group. When enabled. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. During the master router election process. this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. By default. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. if the virtual router group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master. The default value is 100. If there is a tie. this option is enabled. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. The default switch IP interface number is 1. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing. this option is enabled.Alteon OS 21. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. ena Enables the virtual router group. this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router. The default is 1. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. Note that even when preem is disabled.

increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch. This command is disabled by default. ifs disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. This command is disabled by default.Alteon OS 21. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. October 2003 „ 271 . Table 6-71 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled. ports disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. then the tracking option will be available only under group option.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration [Virtual Router vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Group Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers Enable/disable tracking other interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration NOTE – If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers.

This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. hsrp disable|enable Enables Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) for this virtual router group.0 Command Reference Table 6-71 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track) Command Syntax and Usage reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. This command is disabled by default.Alteon OS 21. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server. HSRP is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. This helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. October 2003 . Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. In networks where HSRP is used. This command is disabled by default. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. optimizing routing efficiency. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. 272 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.

del Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface. [VRRP Interface auth passw del cur - 1 Menu] Set authentication types Set plain-text password Delete interface Display current VRRP interface configuration This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers. This password will be added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see auth above). Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. passw <password> Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/if <interface number> VRRP Interface Configuration NOTE – The interface-number (1 to 256) represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured. Table 6-72 VRRP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/if) Command Syntax and Usage auth none|password Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication). October 2003 „ 273 . The IP interface itself is not deleted. or password (password authentication). cur Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters.

l4pts <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for physical switch ports with active Layer 4 processing.Set priority increment for L4 switch port tracking reals . 274 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. The default value is 2.Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking l4pts .Set priority increment for virtual router tracking ifs . ports <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN. the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through this menu. ifs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on this switch. reals <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for healthy real servers behind the virtual server router. The default value is 2.Set priority increment for HSRP by VLAN tracking cur . The default value is 2.Set priority increment for L4 real server tracking hsrp . October 2003 .0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/track VRRP Tracking Configuration [VRRP Tracking Menu] vrs . Each time one of the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu” on page 264). The default value is 2.Set priority increment for IP interface tracking ports . The default value is 10. hsrp <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for switch ports with Layer 4 client-only processing that receive HSRP broadcasts.Set priority increment for HSRP tracking hsrv . Table 6-73 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on this switch.Alteon OS 21.Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router election process. The default value is 2.

Alteon OS 21. All gateway requests to the same destination IP address are resolved to the same gateway. at which point the next in line will take over as the default IP gateway. cur Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values. which are described in the table “Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc)” on page 275. Table 6-74 Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc) Option strict Description The gateway number determines its level of preference. October 2003 „ 275 . Gateway #1 acts as the preferred default IP gateway until it fails or is disabled. The switch sends each new gateway request to the next healthy. The default value is 10. These priority tracking options only define increment values. These options do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu (see page 264) are enabled. /cfg/l3/metrc <metric name> Default Gateway Metrics If multiple default gateways are configured and enabled. a metric can be set to determine which primary gateway is selected. This provides basic gateway load balancing. There are two metrics. enabled gateway in line. roundrobin Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 6-73 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrv <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for vrrp instances that are on the same VLAN.

the switch will drop these packets. October 2003 . port <port number> Displays Port Security Menu. see page 278. cur Displays the current security configuration. see page 277. The default is allow. fragment <allow|deny> Sets the handling of out-of-order IP fragment packets during filtering. pgroup <pattern group ID (1-128)> Displays Pattern Match Group Menu. When set to allow.0 Command Reference /cfg/security Security Configuration Menu [Security Menu] ipacl pgroup port udpblast seclog fragment cur IP Address ACL Menu Pattern Match Group Menu Port Security Menu UDP Blast Menu Set rate threshold for security logging Set out of order IP fragments handling in filtering Display current Security configuration Table 6-75 Security Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/security) Command Syntax and Usage ipacl Displays IP address Access Control Menu. To view menu options. To view options. 276 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. see page 280. seclog <rate threshold (in packets)> Defines the rate threshold for security logging by the number of packets per second. To view menu options. Any packets above the current threshold will be logged. To view menu options. the switch will let through all the out-of-order fragments in filtering. see page 279. udpblast Displays UDP Blast Menu. When set to deny.

When traffic ingresses the switch.0 Command Reference /cfg/security/ipacl IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu Alteon OS can be configured with IP access control lists (ACLs) composed of ranges of client IP addresses that are to be denied access to the switch. defined by the IP address/mask pair.Alteon OS 21. then the client traffic is blocked.Display All IP address/mask for access control Table 6-76 IP Address ACL Menu Options (/cfg/sec/ipacl) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <IP mask> Adds range of source IP addresses to be denied. defined by the IP address/mask pair. October 2003 „ 277 .Remove IP Address/Mask for access control cur . [IP ACL Menu] add . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. rem <IP address> <IP mask> Removes range of source IP addresses to be denied. cur Displays current IP addresses ranges in Access Control List.Add IP Address/Mask for access control rem . If a match is found. the client source IP address is checked against this pool of addresses.

del Deletes the pattern group. use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/cur command. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group. 278 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. „ To view existing strings and their ID numbers. group them into a pattern group.Set pattern group name add .Display current configuration Table 6-77 Pattern Matching Group Menu Options (/cfg/sec/pgroup) Command Syntax and Usage name <31 character name>|none Specifies a descriptive name for this pattern group. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group. [Pattern Match Group 1 Menu] name . add <string ID> „ Adds a pre-configured SLB string to this pattern group by the string ID number. October 2003 .0 Command Reference /cfg/security/pgroup <pattern group number> Pattern Matching Menu When a virus or other attack contains multiple patterns or strings. To configure SLB strings.Add SLB string to group rem . NOTE – You can only add the binary or ASCII strings to a pattern matching group. The filtering commands in Alteon OS Security Pack allow the administrator to define groups of patterns and place them into groups. it is useful to combine them into one group and give the group a name that is easy to remember. By applying the patterns and groups to a deny filter.Delete pattern group cur .Alteon OS 21. and then apply the group to a filter. the packet content can be detected and thus denied access to the network. also on page 331. When a pattern group is applied to a deny filter. use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add command described on page 331. name the pattern group. the switch will match any of the strings or patterns within that group before denying and dropping the packet.Remove SLB string from group del . rem <SLB string ID> Removes an SLB string from this pattern group. Configure the binary or ASCII pattern strings.

TCP sequence number is zero and the FIN.255). Nullscan. LandAttack: Packets with source IP equal to destination IP. Enabling this command will allow detection of the following DoS attacks: Smurf: Fraggle: Xmascan: ICMP ping request to a broadcast destination IP (x. Xmascan. UDP packet sent to a broadcast destination IP (x. ScanSynFin: SYN and FIN bits are set in the packet.0 Command Reference Table 6-77 Pattern Matching Group Menu Options (/cfg/sec/pgroup) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current configuration of this pattern group. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Blat: TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT.x.Alteon OS 21. [Port 1 Menu] dos ipacl udpblast cur - Enable/disable DOS attack detection Enable/disable IP ACL processing Enable/disable UDP Blast processing Display current port configuration Table 6-78 Port Security Menu Options (/cfg/security/port) Command Syntax and Usage dos disable|enable Enables or disables Denial of Service (DOS) protection on this port. LandAttack. URG and PSH bits are set. October 2003 „ 279 . udpblast disable|enable Enables or disables UDP blast protection on this port. /cfg/security/port <port number> Port Security Configuration Menu Alteon OS can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf.255). cur Displays the current security configuration on this port. and ScanSynFin. Nullscan: TCP sequence number is zero and all control bits are zeros.x. Fraggle. Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack. PortZero. PortZero: TCP/UDP Packets whose source or destination port is zero.x. ipacl disable|enable Enables or disables IP access control List denial on this port.x.

October 2003 . cur Displays all UDP blast protection ports. using any integer from 1 to 65535.Remove UDP port/range for UDP blast protection default . UDP traffic will be dropped.Alteon OS 21. default <packet rate> Defines the default packet rate for UDP blast protection.Display all UDP blast protection Ports Table 6-79 UDP Blast Protection Menu Options (/cfg/sec/udpblast) Command Syntax and Usage add <UDP port number or range (first-last)> [packet rate] Adds UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. as well as the maximum packet rate per second.Default packet rate for UDP blast protection cur .Add UDP port/range for UDP blast protection rem . 280 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. the sum of ranges cannot exceed the maximum of 5000 ports. rem <UDP port number or range (first-last)> Removes UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. thus ensuring that backend servers are not flooded with data and disabled. While you can configure multiple port ranges. the last number that can be used is 5300. If the first port number is 300. UDP traffic is shut down on those ports. When the maximum number of packets/second is reached. Alteon OS can be configured to restrict the amount of traffic allowed on any UDP port. You can specify a series of UDP port ranges and the allowed packet limit for that range.0 Command Reference /cfg/security/udpblast UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu Malicious attacks over UDP protocol ports are becoming a common way to bring down real servers. Alteon OS supports up to 5000 UDP port numbers. If the number of packets on this port range exceeds the maximum packet rate per second. [UDP Blast Protection Menu] add . The maximum port range is 5000.

enter: Configuration# dump The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. edited. as described on page 282. and IP interfaces.” To start the setup program. which can be used to configure other switches through a Telnet connection. For a complete description of how to use setup.Alteon OS 21. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Spanning Tree. “First-Time Configuration. enter: Configuration# setup /cfg/dump Dump The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch. To start the dump program. at the Configuration# prompt. When using Telnet to configure a new switch. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP. IP. The screen display can be captured. BOOTP. see Chapter 2. port speed/mode. at the Configuration# prompt.0 Command Reference /cfg/setup Setup The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time. and placed in a script file. VLAN parameters. October 2003 „ 281 .

NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system. the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the TFTP server. 282 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. enter: Configuration# gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename> [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname. and not locked by any application).Alteon OS 21. and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. enter: Configuration# ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename> [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname. October 2003 . at the Configuration# prompt.0 Command Reference /cfg/ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename> Saving the Active Switch Configuration When the ptcfg command is used. and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. NOTE – The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot be viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad). the specified ptcfg file must exist prior to executing the ptcfg command and must be writable (set with proper permission. the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the specified configuration file. at the Configuration# prompt. The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration data. The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial switch configuration. To start the switch configuration download. the apply action will be performed automatically. /cfg/gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename> Restoring the Active Switch Configuration When the gtcfg command is used. The configuration loaded using gtcfg is not activated until the apply command is used. If the apply command is found in the configuration script file loaded using this command. To start the switch configuration upload.

Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for detailed information on this feature. 283 315393-E. based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms. In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing. it can become overutilized. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations. If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand. October 2003 . the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server. each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services.CHAPTER 7 The SLB Configuration Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Alteon Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services. With this software feature. This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for configuring Server Load Balancing (SLB) on the Alteon Application Switch.

To view menu options. see page 299. see page 321. port <port number> Displays the menu for setting physical switch port states for Layer 4 activity. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 329. To view menu options. To view menu options. To view menu options. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the menu for Filtering and Application Redirection. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for defining virtual servers. 284 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. see page 323.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb SLB Configuration [Layer 4 Menu] real group virt filt port gslb layer7 wap sync adv advhc pip on off cur Real Server Menu Real Server Group Menu Virtual Server Menu Filtering Menu Layer 4 Port Menu Global SLB Menu Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu WAP Menu Config Synch Menu Layer 4 Advanced Menu Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu Proxy IP Address Menu Globally turn Layer 4 processing ON Globally turn Layer 4 processing OFF Display current Layer 4 configuration Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the menu for configuring real servers. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for placing real servers into real server groups. layer7 Displays later 7 Resource Definition Menu. see page 292. see page 286. October 2003 . see page 307.Alteon OS 21. To view menu options. gslb Displays the menu for configuring Global Server Load Balancing.

Application Redirection filters. see page 332. deny. however.To view options. or perform Network Address Translation (NAT) on traffic do not require Layer 4 software to be activated. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. To view menu options. see page 344.0 Command Reference Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage wap Displays WAP Menu. Enabling Layer 4 services is not necessary for using filters only to allow. All configuration information will remain in place (if applied or saved). on Globally turns on Layer 4 software services for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection. deny. These filters are not affected by the Server Load Balancing on and off commands in this menu. To view menu options. Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) Filters configured to allow. This option can be performed only after the optional Layer 4 software is enabled (see “Activating Optional Software on page 353). To view menu options. adv Displays the Layer 4 Advanced Menu. require Layer 4 software services. or NAT traffic. see page 338. October 2003 „ 285 . sync Displays the Synch Peer Switch Menu. advhc Displays Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. see page 333. Layer 4 processing must be turned on before redirection filters will work.Alteon OS 21. off Globally disables Layer 4 services. pip This menu is used to set the switch proxy IP address using dotted decimal notation. When the pip is defined. but the software processes will no longer be active in the switch cur Displays the current Server Load Balancing configuration. To view menu options. see page 335.

Enable/disable client proxy operation submac .Set server weight maxcon .Set minutes inactive connection remains open backup .Set number of successful attempts to declare server UP addport .Set interval between health checks retry .Disable real server del .Set maximum number of connections tmout .Enable real server dis .Set server name weight .IDS Command Menu rip . October 2003 .0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/real <server number> Real Server SLB Configuration [Real server 1 Menu] layer7 .Set number of failed attempts to declare server DOWN restr .Display current real server configuration 286 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21.Add real port to server remport .Enable/disable remote site operation proxy .Remove real port from server remote .Delete real server cur .Layer 7 Command Menu ids .Set IP addr of real server name .Set backup real server inter .Enable/disable source MAC address substitution ena .

client requests will be sent to the backup/overflow server or backup/overflow server group. The required parameters are: „ „ Real server IP address Real server enabled (disabled by default) Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage layer7 Displays the Layer 7 Menu. and the administrator will be warned if the server does not respond. such that new connections will not be issued to this server if the maxcon limit is reached. client requests will be dropped by the virtual server. To view menu options. see page 290. This option sets a threshold as an artificial barrier. To view menu options. When this command is used. ids Displays Intrusion Detection Server/system menu. By default.000. weight <real server weight (1-48)> Sets the weighting value (1 to 48) that this real server will be given in the load balancing algorithms. By default. Weights are not applied when using the hash or minmisses metrics (see “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 297). Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each real server. the number of maximum connections is set at 20. October 2003 „ 287 . Higher weighting values force the server to receive more connections than the other servers configured in the same real server group. If all servers in a real server group for a virtual server reach their maxcon limit at the same time. the address entered is PINGed to determine if the server is up. If no backup servers/server group are configured. maxcon <maximum connections (0-200000)> Sets the maximum number of connections that this server should simultaneously support. This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server by a natural language keyword value.0 Command Reference This menu is used for configuring information about real servers that participate in a server pool for Server Load Balancing or Application Redirection.Alteon OS 21. New connections will be issued again to this server once the number of current connections has decreased below the maxcon setting. see page 290. A setting of 10 would assign the server roughly 10 times the number of connections as a server with a weight of 1. rip <real server IP address> Sets the IP address of the real server in dotted decimal format. each real server is given a weight setting of 1. name <string.

The default is 4 attempts restr <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of successful health check attempts required before declaring a UDP service operational. The range is from 1 to 60 seconds. Settings must be specified in even numbered increments between 2 and 30 minutes. Using the tmout option. Then. For TCP services. When a client makes a request. The backup server is also used in overflow situations. Every client-to-server session being load balanced is recorded in the switch’s Session Table. retry <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this real server inoperative. In order to prevent table overflow. the session is recorded in the table. October 2003 . these orphaned entries must be aged out of the binding table. and the session table entry is then removed. the data is transferred until the client ends the session. you can set the number of minutes to wait before removing orphan table entries. When persistent is activated. If the real server reaches its maxcon (maximum connections) limit. use this option to assign a backup real server number. The inter option lets you choose the time between health checks.0 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage tmout <even number of minutes (2-32768)> Sets the number of minutes an inactive session remains open (in even numbered increments). such as when a client application is abnormally terminated by the client’s system. In certain circumstances. the switch will activate the backup real server until the original becomes operative again. if the real server becomes inoperative. this option sets how long an idle client is allowed to remain associated with a particular server. An interval of “0” disables health checking for the server. TCP/UDP connections will remain registered in the switch’s binding table. For UDP services. the switch verifies that real servers and their corresponding services are operational by opening a TCP connection to each service. To prevent loss of service if a particular real server fails. backup <real server number (1-1023)>|none Sets the real server used as the backup/overflow server for this real server. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. Determining the health of each real server is a necessary function for Layer 4 switching. using the defined service ports configured as part of each virtual service. the backup comes online to provide additional processing power until the original server becomes desaturated. The same backup/overflow server may be assigned to more than one real server at the same time inter <number of seconds between health checks (0-60)> Sets the interval between real server health verification attempts.Alteon OS 21. The default setting is 10. the switch pings servers to determine their status. The default interval is 2 seconds. This option is also used with the Persistent option (see /cfg/slb/virt/pbind). The default is 8 attempts 288 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts.

This removes the real server from operation within its real server groups. submac disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address substitution. This option. When enabled. a client request from any application can be proxied using a load-balancing Proxy IP address (PIP). A disabled server will no longer process virtual server requests as part of the real server group to which it is assigned.Alteon OS 21. dis Disables this real server from Layer 4 service. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. enables this real server for operation until explicitly disabled. By default. when the apply and save commands are used. remport <real server port (2–65534)> Remove multiple service ports from the server.0 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage addport <real server port (2–65534)> Add multiple service ports to the server. remote disable|enable Enables or disables remote site operation for this server. See /oper/slb/dis on page 350 for an operations-level command that permits graceful server shutdown. By default. This option. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP address translation. when the apply and save commands are used. See /oper/slb/ena on page 350 for an operations-level command. disables this real server until it is explicitly re-enabled. cur Displays the current configuration information for this real server. this option is disabled. as it will delete any configuration options that have been set for this real server. October 2003 „ 289 . the real server can process virtual server requests associated with its real server group. del Deletes this real server from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. NOTE – This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown. This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown. this option is disabled. This option should be enabled when the real IP address supplied above represents a remote server (real or virtual) that this switch will access as part of its Global Server Load Balancing network. With this option enabled (default). Use this command with caution. ena You must perform this command to enable this real server for Layer 4 service.

This option is used if you want to designate a specific server to assign cookies only. Table 7-3 Layer 7 Commands Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage addlb <URL path ID [1-128]> Adds the predefined URL loadbalance string ID to the real server. By default. Refer to your Application Guide for more information. this option is disabled. assigns the cookie. 290 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. An Intrusion Detection System gathers and analyzes information from various areas within a computer or a network to identify possible security breaches. By default. which include both intrusions (attacks from outside the organization) and misuse (attacks from within the organization). exclude disable|enable Enables or disables exclusionary string matching.Display current real server configuration This menu is used for entering commands and strings for Layer 7 processing. cookser disable|enable Enables or disables the real server to handle client requests that don’t contain a cookie.Add URL path for URL load balance remlb . this option is disabled. remlb <URL path ID [1-128]> Removes the predefined URL loadbalance string ID from the real server. October 2003 . and embeds the IP address of the real server that will handle the subsequent requests from the client.Enable/disable exclusionary string matching cur .Remove URL path for URL load balance cookser . /cfg/slb/real <real server number>/ids Real server IDS Configuration Menu Intrusion Detection System (IDS) is a type of security management system for computers and networks.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/real <server number>/layer7 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration [Layer 7 Commands Menu] addlb .Enable/disable cookie assignment server exclude .Alteon OS 21. cur Displays the current real server configuration. This server gets the client request.

Display current real server configuration Table 7-4 IDS Configuration Menu options (/cfg/slb/real/ids) Command Syntax and Usage idsvlan <vlan number (1-4090> Defines VLAN ID for Intrusion Detection Server.Set Port for ID Server oid .Set Vlan ID for ID Server idsport . Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. comm <SNMP health check community string to override group community string> Overrides community string for SNMP health checks.Alteon OS 21. This OID overrides the OID for SNMP health checks. cur Displays the current real server configuration. October 2003 „ 291 . NOTE – IDS can only be configured on real servers between 1-62. idsport <port number> Defines port for Intrusion Detection Server.0 Command Reference [Real Server 1 IDS Menu] idsvlan .Override OID for SNMP HC comm .Override community string for SNMP HC cur . oid <SNMP health check object identifier to override group OID> Specifies the object identifier (OID).

Set an advance group health check formula mhash .Set metric used to select next server in group content .Enable/disable Intrusion Detection Group Flood advhlth . content <filename>|//<host>/<filename>|none This option defines the specific content which is examined during health checks. The content depends on the type of health check specified in the health option (see below).Set minmisses hash parameter add . Each real server group should consist of all the real servers which provide a specific service for load balancing.Display current group configuration This menu is used for combining real servers into real server groups. health link|arp|icmp|tcp|http|dns|pop3|smtp|nntp|ftp|imap|sslh |radius-auth|radiusacc|script<n>|udpdns|wsp|wtp|wtls|ldap |snmp<n>|tftp Sets the type of health checking performed. See “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 297. October 2003 .Set Intrusion Detection Port idsfld .Set real server group name realthr . The default setting is leastconns. Real server groups are used both for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection. See “SLB Health Check Types” on page 294. Each group must consist of at least one real server.Set real server failure threshold viphlth . Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage metric leastconns|roundrobin|minmisses|hash|response|bandwidth|phash Set the load balancing metric used for determining which real server in the group will be the target of the next client request.Alteon OS 21.Enable/disable Intrusion Detection idsrprt .Remove real server del . 292 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. Each real server can belong to more than one group.Delete real server group cur .Set health check content health .0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group SLB Configuration [Real server group 1 Menu] metric .Enable/disable VIP health checking in DSR mode ids .Set health check type backup .Set backup real server or group name .Add real server rem . The default is tcp.

Then. the switch will activate the backup real server /server group until one of the original real servers becomes operative again. the backup server/server group comes online to provide additional processing power until one of the original servers becomes desaturated. ids disable|enable Enables or disables this group of servers for IDS load balancing. This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server group by a natural language keyword value. If all the servers in the real server group reach their maxcon (maximum connections) limit. it works only when the service has DSR (Direct Server Return) feature enabled. the number reaches this minimum limit. use this option to assign a backup real server/real server group number. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. which also means the option is disabled viphlth disable|enable Enables or disables VIP health checking in a service. The default threshold is 0. realthr <real servers (1-15.Alteon OS 21. the switch uses RIP to perform all health checks.0 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage backup r<real server number (1-256)>|g<group number>|none Sets the real server or real server group used as the backup/overflow server/server group for this real server group. This feature can only be configured on real server groups between 1-63. October 2003 „ 293 . name <maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each Real Server Group. 0 for disabled)> Specifies a minimum number of real servers available. However. The same backup/overflow server/server group may be assigned to more than one real server group at the same time. a SYSLOG ALERT message is sent to the configured SYSLOG servers stating that the real server threshold has been reached for the concerned server load balancing group. If any time. whether DSR is enabled or disabled. To prevent loss of service if the entire real server group fails. idsfld disable|enable Enables or disables the Intrusion Detection flood. This feature is enabled by default. idsrprt <real server port (2-65534)>|any Sets real server port for the Intrusion Detection Server. if the real server group becomes inoperative. The backup server/server group is also used in overflow situations. When viphlth is disabled.

the virtual server will become inoperative. Refer to your Application Guide for their detailed description. you can create a boolean expression to state the health of the server group.Alteon OS 21. you can specify the type of health check for the group of real servers.0 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage advhlth <(1&2|3. 128>|none Defines an advanced health check formula expression for the real servers. Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description link Checks status of port for each server for IDSLB group only.). mhash 24|32 <number of sip bits used for minmisses hash> Defines the minmisses hash parameter for this real server as either 24 or 32 bits. By default the minmiss algorithm uses the upper 24-bits of the source IP address to calculate the real server that the traffic should be sent to when the minmiss metric is selected. This command supports two boolean operators. Using parenthesis with the boolean operators. rem <real server number (1-1023)> Remove a real server from this real server group.You can also select all 32-bits of the source IP address to hash to the real server. This command allows you to create a boolean expression to health check the real server group based on the state of the virtual services. Use this command with caution: if you remove the only group that is assigned to a virtual server. This command also supports a string expression which is up to 128 characters long. 294 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. You will be prompted for the ID number for the real server to remove from this group. del Deletes this real server group from the Layer 4 software configuration. SLB Health Check Types Using the health command. cur Displays the current configuration parameters for this real server group. or you can also set the formula expression as none. You will be prompted to enter the number of the real server to add to this group. October 2003 . This removes the group from operation under all virtual servers it is assigned to. add <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to this real server group. The health check options are described in the following table. AND or OR that are used to manipulate TRUE or FLALSE values..

check that the user:password account specified in content exists on the server. nntp For newsgroup services. http For HTTP service. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. use HTTP 1.1 GETS when a HOST: header is required to check that the URL content is specified in content command. an HTTP/1. imap For user mail service. October 2003 „ 295 .0 Command Reference Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description arp Sends an ARP request for Layer 2 health checking. and establish a session ID for each session. pop3 For user mail service. tcp Opens and closes a TCP/IP connection to the server for TCP service. check that the filename specified in content is accessible on the server through anonymous login. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the serve sslh Enables the switch to query the health of the SSL servers by sending an SSL client “Hello” packet and then verify the contents of the server’s “Hello” response. icmp For Layer 3 health checking. ftp For FTP services. Otherwise. smtp For mail-server services. negotiate an encryption and compression method. check that the domain name specified in content can be resolved by the server. check that the newsgroup name specified in content is accessible on the server. pings the server. During the handshake.0 GET occurs. dns For Domain Name Service.Alteon OS 21. check that the user specified in content is accessible on the server. the health check will revert back to TCP on the port that is being load balanced. the user and server exchange security certificates. Note: If the content is not specified.

radius-acc For RADIUS remote access server authentication. At regular intervals. October 2003 . <n> denotes the health script number (1-5). tftp Sets the health check type to TFTP. 296 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. the switch transmits TFTP read requests (RRQ) to all servers in the group. To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server. The secrt value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. <n> denotes the health script number (1-8). ldap Sets the health check type to LDAP. udpdns Allows the user to perform health checking using UDP DNS queries. wsp Enables connectionless WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. The content under /cfg/ slb/adv/waphc (see page 338) must also be configured. script <n> Enables the use of script-based health checks in send/expect format to check for application and content availability. The content under /cfg/slb/adv/waphc (see page 338) must also be configured wtls Provides Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS) Hello-based health check for encrypted and connection-oriented WTLS traffic on port 9203. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the Alteon Application Switch and the server. snmp <n> Enables the use of SNMP-based health checks. The health check is successful if the server responds to the RRQ. the network administrator must also configure the /cfg/slb/ secrt parameter.Alteon OS 21. The health check fails if the switch receives an error packet from the real server. This protocol enables the user to request a file from the server. wtp Enables connection-oriented WTP + WSP content health checks for WAP gateways.0 Command Reference Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description radius-auth.

roundrobin Round robin. Minmisses can also be used for Server Load Balancing. helping to maximize successful cache hits. the number of connections currently open on each real server is measured in real time. When specified for a real server group performing Server Load Balancing. Best statistical load balancing is achieved when the IP address destinations of load balanced frames are spread across a broad range of IP subnets. the hash metric uses IP address information in the client request to select a server.0 Command Reference Server Load Balancing Metrics Using the metric command. This is particularly useful in caching applications. new connections are issued to each server in turn: the first real server in this group gets the first connection. the issuing process starts over with the first real server. With this option. followed by the third real server. For Application Redirection. When minmisses is specified for a real server group performing Application Redirection. October 2003 „ 297 . the second real server gets the next connection. process. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. When all the real servers in this group have received at least one connection. Although the hash metric can provide more even load balancing at any given instance. hash Like minmisses. leastconns Least connections. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained between sessions. The hash metric should be used if the statistical load balancing achieved using minmisses is not as optimal as desired. due to their ability to accept. you can set a number of metrics for selecting which real server in a group gets the next client request. This metric is optimized for Application Redirection. it is not as effective as minmisses when servers leave and reenter service. Server load with this metric becomes most evenly balanced as the number of active clients increases. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained on the server between sessions. With this option. This is particularly useful for maximizing successful cache hits. The server with the fewest current connections is considered to be the best choice for the next client connection request. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. These metrics are described in the following table: Table 7-7 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description minmisses Minimum misses. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. This option is the most self-regulating. and shut down connections faster than slower servers.Alteon OS 21. If the Load Balancing statistics indicate that one server is processing significantly more requests over time than other servers. and so on. with the fastest servers typically getting the most connections over time. consider using the hash metric. For Server Load Balancing.

The higher the bandwidth used. the switch monitors and records the amount of time that each real server takes to reply to a health check. With this option. This can improve load balancing among servers of different performance levels. when real servers are configured with weights (see the weight option on page 287). the switch supports an even load distribution (hash) and stable server assignment (minmiss) even when a server in the group goes down. The response time is used to adjust the real server weights. October 2003 . This results in a request always being sent to a server that is up. a higher proportion of connections are given to servers with higher weights. With phash enabled. If the first hash hits a dead server. the smaller is the weight assigned to that server. it will rehash for that request based on the actual number of servers that are up. the real server weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to the number of octets that the real server processes during a given interval. With this option. NOTE – Under the leastconns and roundrobin metrics.Alteon OS 21. The weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to a moving average of response time. Weights are not applied when using the hash or minmisses metrics. phash The phash metric utilizes the best features of the hash and minmiss metrics. the first hash will always be the same even if a real server is down. bandwidth Bandwidth Metric. 298 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. With the phash metric.0 Command Reference Table 7-7 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description response Real server response time.

see hname below. and so forth). and the Internet group code (.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Configuration [Virtual Server service vip dname cont layr3 ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Virtual Service Menu Set IP addr of virtual server Set domain name of virtual server Set BW Contract Enable/disable layer 3 only balancing Enable virtual server Disable virtual server Delete virtual server Display current virtual configuration This menu is used for configuring the virtual servers which will be the target for client requests for Server Load Balancing. The virtual port name can be a well-known port name.org. . specify the name as none. . It does not include the hostname portion (www. dname <34 character domain name>|none Sets the domain name for this virtual server. www2. An example would be foocorp. ftp. Client requests directed to the virtual server’s IP address will be balanced among the real servers available to it through real server group assignments.Alteon OS 21. Configuring a virtual server requires the following parameters: „ „ „ Creating a virtual server IP address Adding TCP/UDP port and real server group Enabling the virtual server (disabled by default) Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage service <virtual port or name> Displays the Virtual Services Menu.com. The maximum number of characters that can be used in a domain name is 34. . The domain name typically includes the name of the company or organization. ftp. see page 301.edu. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. and so on. To clear the dname. the service number. To view services menu options.com. vip <virtual server IP address> Sets the IP address of the virtual server using dotted-decimal notation.gov. and so forth). see the sport command on page 309. The virtual server created within the switch will respond to ARPs and PINGs from network ports as if it was a normal server. To define the hostname. To get more information about well-known ports. such as http. October 2003 „ 299 .

ena Enables this virtual server. The default number of contracts is set at 256 for Alteon OS. If the real server to which the client is assigned becomes unavailable. This option activates the virtual server within the switch so that it can service client requests sent to its defined IP address. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21. By default. However. 300 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. del This command removes this virtual server from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. It associates all the connections from the same client with the same real server while any connection exists between them. the BW contract can be changed for a selected virtual server with /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <number>/cont. as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual server. All the frames that match this virtual server services are assigned this BW contract if the previously assigned contract for the frame has lower or equal precedence of the virtual server contract. layr3 disable|enable Normally.0 Command Reference Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BWM contract (1-256)> Enter a new Bandwidth Management Contract for this virtual service. all services under this virtual server are assigned this BW contract. cur Displays the current configuration of the specified virtual server. the switch uses only the client IP address as the session identifier. dis This option disables the virtual server so that it no longer services client requests. the client IP address is used with the client Layer 4 port number to produce a session identifier. Use this command with caution. and also in applications where TCP fragments are generated. This option is necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is divided across different simultaneous connections. When the layr3 option is enabled (disabled by default). the Layer 4 software will allow the client to connect to a different server.

The following example shows a menu for http (port 80) services. NOTE – Select virtual service port 554 to configure RTSP traffic.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service <virtual port or name> Virtual Server Service Configuration This menu is used for configuring services assigned to a virtual server. [Virtual Server group rport hname httpslb cont urlcont pbind rcount dbind udp frag nonat dnsslb direct del cur - 1 http Service Menu] Set real server group number Set real port Set hostname Set HTTP SLB processing Set BW contract for this virtual service Set BW cont of an SLB string specific to this service Set persistent binding type Set multi response count Enable/disable delayed binding Enable/disable UDP balancing Enable/disable remapping UDP server fragments Enable/disable only substituting MAC addresses Enable/disable DNS query load balancing Enable/disable direct access mode Delete virtual service Display current virtual service configuration Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. See page 305 to view the menu options for configuring virtual services on port 554 for RTSP. October 2003 „ 301 .

This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services. To clear the hostname for a service. The default is set at 1. enable/disable checking for cookie in URI „ browser: Enable or disable SLB. 302 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. it will carry the value entered for the Virtual Server IP (vip) contract. For example: „ „ httpslb <application> httpslb <application> and|or <application> cont <BWM Contract (0-256). the switch will map the virtual port to this real port.com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service. 0 for VIP default> Sets a Bandwidth Management contract for this virtual service. to add a hostname for Web services. number of bytes to be extracted. You will be prompted to enter the number (1 to 256) of the real server group to add to this service. If rport is configured to be different than the virtual port defined in /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <virtual port>. You will be prompted for the following: Cookie name. rport <real server port (0-65534)> Defines the real server TCP or UDP port assigned to this service. hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. Note: If you enter 0 for the service contract. If a dname of “foocorp. use the command: # hname none httpslb urlslb|host|cookie|browser|urlhash|headerhash|others Load balances on the following applications: „ urlslb: Enable or disable URL SLB „ host: Enable or disable for virtual hosting „ cookie: Enable or disable cookie-based SLB for cookie-based preferential load balancing.foocorp.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . based on browser type „ urlhash: Enable or disable URL hashing based on URI „ headerhash: Hashes on any HTTP header value. you could specify www as the hostname. this is the same as the virtual port (service virtual port). starting point of the cookie value. “www. The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example. The default number of contracts is set at 256 for Alteon OS.0 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets a real server group for this service. By default. „ others: Requires inputs for a particular header field You may choose to combine or select applications to load balance using the commands and and/or or.com” was defined (above).

October 2003 „ 303 . with clientip command enabled. The disable option allows you to disable presistent binding. In Alteon OS 21.2 Application Guide. rcount <response count number (1–16)> Sets the maximum response counter for cookie-based persistence. This option is disabled by default. HTTPS). or multi-page Web forms. Enabling this command protects the server from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. dbind disable|enable Enables or disables Layer 4 Delayed Binding for TCP service and ports. non-repudiation. all subsequent SSL sessions which present the same session ID will be directed to the same real server. The connection timeout value (set in the Real Server Menu) is used to control how long these inactive but persistent connections remain associated with their real servers.0 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract of a string specific to this virtual service. HTTP and HTTPs traffic from the same client will map to the same server irrespective of the load balancing metric used. For detailed information on Cookie-Based Persistence. SSL provides authentication. The default number is 1. and security. The session ID is a value comprising 32 random bytes chosen by the SSL server that gets stored in a session hash table. This may be necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is retained on the server over a series of sequential connections. if it has previously been enabled for a particular application. see the Persistence chapter in the Alteon OS 20.0. Whereas. such as with SSL (Secure Socket Layer. When the client resumes activity after their connection has been aged out. since the services are related. Web site search results. which is a set of protocols built on top of TCP/IP that allow an application server and user to communicate over an encrypted HTTP session. and associates all connections from the same client with the same real server until the client becomes inactive and the connection is aged out of the binding table. they will be connected to the most appropriate real server based on the load balancing metric. The cookie option uses a cookie defined in the HTTP header or placed in the URI for hashing. or until the maximum count is reached. By enabling the sslid option. different services from the same client may not map to the same server. see “Cookie-Based Persistence” on page 305. „ „ „ „ The clientip option uses the client IP address as an identifier. The sslid option is for Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). For more information on cookie option. Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple virtual services and each service requires a separate bandwidth.Alteon OS 21. The Alteon Application Switch will examine each server response until the cookie is found. An alternative approach may be to use the real server group metrics minmisses or hash (see Server Load Balancing Metrics). pbind clientip|cookie<p|r|i>|sslid|disable Enables or disables persistent bindings for a real server (disabled by default). The default is set at 1024.

frag disable|enable Enables or disables remapping server fragments for virtual port. This option does not substitute IP addresses. Since no session is created. see the cache command in Table 7-14 on page 314. dnsslb disable|enable Enables or disables DNS-based Layer 7 content load balancing. direct disable|enable Enables or disables Direct Access Mode (DAM) on the selected virtual service. cur Displays the current configuration of services on the specified virtual server. DNS uses UDP and TCP. 304 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. You can configure this option if the service(s) to be load balanced include UDP and TCP: for example. nonat disable|enable Enables or disables substituting only the MAC address of the real server (disabled by default). so that frames returning from server to the client do not have to pass through the switch. as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual service. This option is used for Direct Server Return (DSR) in an one-armed load balancing setup. In those environments. When stateless is enabled. This option is enabled by default.0 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage udp disable|enable|stateless Enables or disables UDP load balancing for a virtual port (disabled by default).Alteon OS 21. Note: If applying a filter to the same virtual server IP address on which UDP load balancing is enabled. disable caching on that filter for optimal performance. Use this command with caution. October 2003 . you must activate UDP balancing for the particular virtual servers that clients will communicate with using UDP. For more information. del This command removes this virtual service from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. This command takes precedence over the command to globally enable or disable direct access mode on the switch. no session table entry is created. you have to bind to a new server every time.

rtspslb hash|patternMatch|dis This Layer 7 load balancing option sets the type of rtspslb (hash|patternMatch. Cookie-Based Persistence The cookie option is used to establish cookie-based persistence. which is group 1. del Deletes this virtual service. If you don’t configure group. group must be configured under the menu / cfg/slb/virt <virtual server number>/service 80. [Virtual Server group rtspslb del cur 1 rtsp Service Menu] Set real server group number Set RTSP URL load balancing type Delete virtual service Display current virtual service configuration Table 7-10 Virtual Server Service Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt 1/service 554) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets real server group number.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service 554 Virtual Server RTSP Configuration This menu displays virtual services configured on service port 554 for RTSP traffic. To enable Layer 7 load balancing for RTSP service. service 80 and service RTSP will load balance the default group. thereby enabling the service). cur Displays the current virtual service configuration. October 2003 „ 305 . and has the following command syntax and usage: pbind cookie <mode> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. or disables rtspslb service altogether with dis command. See “/cfg/ slb/virt <server number>/service <virtual port or name>” on page 301 to view the menu options for configuring virtual services on port 80. See “Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service)” on page 302 for details on how to configure group.

In this mode.0 Command Reference Each parameter is explained in the following table.0 Application Guide. a duration <days[:hours[:minutes]]> (e.g. 306 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. enter d to disable this option. 12/31/01@23:59) . The switch uses this cookie to bind to the appropriate server. and the switch inserts an Alteon persistence cookie into the data packet.. Insert cookie mode expiration parameters are as follows: Enter insert-cookie expiration as either: „ „ „ „ <name> <offset> <length> <URI> . a date <MM/dd/yy[@hh:mm]> (e. The following three modes are available: p: Passive mode. the server responds with the data.g. For more information on Cookie-Based Persistence. and not the network administrator. „ r: Rewrite mode. see the Alteon OS 21. If you want to look for cookie name or value in the URI. When a client sends a request without a cookie.. Enter the starting point of the cookie value (1-64) Enter number of bytes to extract (1-64). „ i: Insert mode. the switch. The switch intercepts this persistence cookie and rewrites the value to include server-specific information before sending it to the client. generates the cookie value on behalf of the server. Table 7-11 Command Syntax and Usage for pbind cookie Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service/pbind cookie) Option <mode> Description Specify the mode for cookie-based persistence... the extracting length must be 8 or 16.Alteon OS 21. or none <return> Enter the name of the cookie.. In active cookie mode (or cookie rewrite mode). To look for cookie in the HTTP header. enter e to enable this option. Look for cookie in the URI. the network administrator configures the Web server to embed a cookie in the server response that the switch looks for in subsequent requests from the same client.. October 2003 . For cookie rewrite. 45:30:90) .

This command is disabled by default. The types of information include: „ „ „ „ IP protocol TCP/UDP ports TCP flags ICMP message type Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Display current filter configuration The switch supports up to 2048 traffic filters.Set source IP address smask .Set source TCP/UDP port or range dport .Set filter name smac .Set destination MAC address sip .Set source MAC address dmac .Filter Advanced Menu name .Enable filter dis . Each filter can be configured to allow.Delete filter cur .Set destination IP address dmask . redirect or perform Network Address Translation on traffic according to a variety of address and protocol specifications. There are several options available in the Filter Advanced Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv.Set real server port for redirection nat .Set destination IP mask proto .Set vlan id invert . and each physical switch port can be configured to use any combination of filters.Set real server group for redirection rport .Enable/disable filter inversion ena .Set destination TCP/UDP port or range action . deny.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> SLB Filter Configuration [Filter 1 Menu] adv .Disable filter del .Set which addresses are network address translated vlan .Alteon OS 21.Set action group .Set IP protocol sport . page 312) that can be used to provide more information through syslog.Set source IP mask dip . October 2003 „ 307 .

Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the dmask below. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 311. 255. and/or protocol that will be affected by the filter Set the filter action (allow. nat) Enable the filter Add the filter to a switch port Enable filtering on the Alteon Application Switch port Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage adv Displays the Filter Advanced Menu. The default is any if the destination MAC address is any. dmac any|<MAC address (such as. redirect. The default is any if the source MAC address is any. or any. For more information. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 311. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the destination MAC address. To view menu options. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the source MAC address. dmask <IP subnet mask (such as. October 2003 . A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the smask below. smask <IP subnet mask (such as. The default is any.0 Command Reference The following parameters are required for filtering: „ „ „ „ „ Set the address. see page 312.255.0> This IP address mask is used with the sip to select traffic which this filter will affect. See details below for more information on producing address ranges.0)> This IP address mask is used with the dip to select traffic which this filter will affect. traffic with this source IP address will be affected by this filter. smac any|<MAC address (such as. The default is any. name <31 character name>|none Allows the user to assign a name to a filter. traffic with this destination IP address will be affected by this filter. sip any|<IP address> If defined.255. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. deny. 308 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.255.255. dip any|<IP address> If defined. or any. 255.Alteon OS 21. masks. For more information.

Number 1 2 6 17 89 112 Name icmp igmp tcp udp ospf vrrp sport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined. The default is set at any. The default is any. traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will be affected by this filter. or “any”. traffic with the specified real server TCP or UDP destination port will be affected by this filter. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. range. name. or “any”. traffic from the specified protocol is affected by this filter. Specify the port number. Specify the port number.0 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage proto any|<number>|<name> If defined. Specify the protocol number. Listed below are some of the well-known protocols. October 2003 „ 309 . name.Alteon OS 21. just as with sport above. range. The default is any. or “any”. name. Listed below are some of the well-known ports: Number 20 21 22 23 25 37 42 43 53 69 70 79 80 109 110 Name ftp-data ftp ssh telnet smtp time name whois domain tftp gopher finger http pop2 pop3 dport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined.

In addition. the frame’s source IP address (sip) and port number (sport) are replaced with the dip and dport values. group <real server group number (1-1024)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. The default is set at 0.Alteon OS 21. The “goto” action causes filter processing to jump to a designated filter. Destination (dest) is set as the default filter. the frame’s destination IP address (dip) and port number (dport) are replaced with the sip and sport values. If source is specified. Redirect frames that fit this filter’s profile. Also.0 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage action allow|deny|redir|nat|goto Specify the action this filter takes: allow deny redir Allow the frame to pass (by default). The default is group 1 rport <real server port (0-65535)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action.slb/filt/adv/goto command. such as for web cache redirection. nat goto 310 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. This can be used for building basic security profiles. This defines the real server TCP or UDP port to which redirected traffic will be sent. To specify the new filter to goto. nat source|dest When nat is set as the filter action (see above). This can be used to map the source or destination IP address and port information of a private network scheme to/from the advertised network IP address and ports. use the /cfg. rport must be configured for all Application Redirection filters. this command specifies whether Network Address Translation (NAT) is performed on the source or the destination information. This is used in conjunction with the nat option (mentioned in this table) and can also be combined with proxies. Layer 4 processing must be activated (see the /cfg/slb/on command on page 284). Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs. Discard frames that fit this filter’s profile. if transparent proxies are used for Network Address Translation (NAT) on the Alteon Application Switch (see the pip option in Table 7-21 on page 321). Define a real server group (1 to 16) to which redirected traffic will be sent. this must be configured whenever TCP protocol traffic is redirected. If dest is specified. effectively skipping over a block of filter IDs. Filter searching action will then continue from the designated filter ID. October 2003 . For valid Layer 4 health checks. Perform generic Network Address Translation (NAT).

Alteon OS 21. perform the assigned action.0 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage vlan any|<VLAN ID (1 . Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters You can specify a range of IP address for filtering both the source and/or destination IP address for traffic. If the conditions for the filter are not met. the filter does not get applied to all the member ports of this VLAN. to determine if a client request’s destination IP address should be redirected to the cache servers attached to a particular switch.4090)> Sets the ID of the VLAN that is to be filtered. ena Enables this filter. del Deletes this filter. don’t act. cur Displays the current configuration of the filter. A VLAN has a set of member ports. This option allows you to match the VLAN ID of the switch against the VLAN ID of the incoming packet. dis Disables this filter. The default is any. the sip (source) or dip (destination) defines the base IP address in the desired range. For example. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. and applies a filter to a VLAN that already has been configured. You have to manually add the filter to the port. invert disable|enable Inverts the filter logic. If the conditions of the filter are met. which means the switch will match any VLAN ID of the incoming packet This command allows filters to be configured on per VLAN basis. When a range of IP addresses is needed. This option is disabled by default. the destination IP address is masked (bitwise AND) with the dmask and then compared to the dip. But by applying this filter to a VLAN. and the smask (source) or dmask (destination) is the mask which is applied to produce the range. October 2003 „ 311 .

October 2003 .Enable/disable caching sessions that match filter log .Set hash parameter for Filter goto .Display current advanced filter configuration Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage tcp Displays the TCP Flags advanced menu.TCP Advanced Menu ip .Enable/disable persistent binding for redirection cur .0.Set GOTO filter ID proxy .Enable/disable logging fwlb .0. see page 314. see page 315.255.0.0 128. ip Sets IP advanced menu.255. you could configure the switch with two filters so that each would handle traffic filtering for one half of the Internet.0.127.Enable/disable delayed binding for redirection pbind .IP Advanced Menu layer7 .0.0 0.0.0 /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv Advanced Filter Configuration [Filter 1 Advanced Menu] tcp .Layer 7 Advanced Menu security .0.0 255.Set ICMP message type cont .0 128. you could define the following parameters: Table 7-13 Filtering IP Address Ranges Filter #1 #2 Internet Address Range dip dmask 128.0 Command Reference As another example.Security Menu icmp .Set BW contract tmout .255 0. To view menu options.Alteon OS 21.Enable/disable WAN link load balancing dbind .Enable/disable client proxy cache . To do this.0.0.255.255.0 .Enable/disable firewall redirect hash method linklb .Set hash parameter for intrusion detection SLB thash .255 128.0. To view menu options. 312 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set NAT or L7 lookup session timeout idshash .0.0.

If disabled. The option sip+sport allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and source port at the same time. idshash sip|dip|both Sets the hash metric parameter for Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing: source IP (sip). This is useful when certain traffic must retain original IP address information. or when other forms of translation (such as Application Redirection or NAT) are preferred. To view menu options. Enable or disable proxy IP address translation for traffic matching the filter criteria.0 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage layer7 Displays Layer7 advanced menu. or both. For a detailed description of filtering and ICMP. For a list of ICMP message types. goto <filter ID> Defines ID for the GOTO filter. see Table 7-17 on page 316. The default is set at 4 minutes. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. This option applies only when redir or nat is specified as the filter action. The option both allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and the destination IP address at the same time. security Displays the filter Security Menu. any proxy defined for the switch port using the pip command (see page 321) is not performed for traffic meeting the filter criteria. this is enabled. tmout <even number of minutes (4-32768)> Sets the session timeout in an even number of minutes. the action on this filter must be set to goto. the contract number is set at 256.0 Application Guide. The Default is auto. By default. "icmp list" for list> Sets the ICMP message type. By default.Alteon OS 21. thash auto|sip|dip|both|sip+sport Allows you to choose hash parameter to use for filter redirection. see the Alteon OS 21. The sip option allows you to perform tunable hash on source IP address for this filter. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables client proxy. To view menu options. see page 319 icmp any|<number>|<type. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the Bandwidth Management Contract. The option dip allows you to perform tunable hash on destination IP address for this filter. The default is set at any. destination IP (dip). In order to use this feature. October 2003 „ 313 . see page 317.

Enable/disable TCP PSH matching . Cache is enabled by default. dbind disable|enable Enables or disables delayed binding for redirection on this filter.Enable/disable TCP ACK matching . pbind disable|enable Enables or disables persistent binding for redirection on this filter. this option is disabled. /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/tcp Advanced Filter TCP Configuration [TCP Advanced urg ack psh rst syn fin ackrst cur Menu] . Exercise caution while applying cacheenabled and cache-disabled filters to the same switch port. this option is disabled.0 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage cache disable|enable Enables or disables caching sessions that match the filter.Enable/disable TCP URG matching . If the dport is 80 or 21.Enable/disable TCP ACK or RST matching . fwlb disable|enable To ensure that the stateful inspection behavior of firewalls is maintained. Note: Cache should be disabled if applying a filter to virtual server IP address while performing UDP load balancing (see “udp disable|enable|stateless” on page 304). This option is disabled by default. a hashing algorithm is used to ensure that inbound packets and outbound packets for a pair of IPSA/IPDA traverse through the same firewall.Alteon OS 21. A cache-enabled filter creates a session entry in the switch. By default. October 2003 . By default. linklb disable|enable Enables or disables WAN Link Load Balancing. enabling this option changes the hash of the filter from a WCR hash to a FWLB hash.Display current TCP configuration 314 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. log disable|enable Enables or disables logging filter messages.Enable/disable TCP FIN matching . so that the switch can bypass checking for subsequent frames that match the same criteria. cur Displays the current advanced filter configuration.Enable/disable TCP SYN matching .Enable/disable TCP RST matching .

Set IP TOS mask newtos . October 2003 „ 315 .Alteon OS 21. Table 7-15 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp) Command Syntax and Usage urg disable|enable Enables or disables TCP URG (urgent) flag matching. this option is disabled.Set IP maximum packet length option .Set IP Type of Service tmask . By default. By default.0 Command Reference These commands can be used to configure packet filtering for specific TCP flags. /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/ip IP Advanced Menu [IP Advanced Menu] tos . psh disable|enable Enables or disables TCP PSH (push) flag matching. this option is disabled. By default. By default.Set new IP TOS length . this option is disabled. By default. this option is disabled. this option is disabled. this option is disabled. cur Displays the current Access Control List TCP filter configuration. ack disable|enable Enables or disables TCP ACK (acknowledgement) flag matching.Enable/disable IP option matching cur . By default.Display current IP configuration Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. this option is disabled. By default. ackrst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP acknowledgement or reset flag matching. rst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP RST (reset) flag matching. fin disable|enable Enables or disables TCP FIN (finish) flag matching. syn disable|enable Enables or disables TCP SYN (synchronize) flag matching.

tmask <0-255> Sets IP type of service mask. Any packet exceeding the maximum length will not match the filter. You can list all ICMP message types with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp list command.Alteon OS 21. option disable|enable Enables or disables IP option matching. Table 7-17 ICMP Message Types Type # Message Type 0 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 echorep destun quench redir echoreq rtradv rtrsol timex param Description ICMP echo reply ICMP destination unreachable ICMP source quench ICMP redirect ICMP echo request ICMP router advertisement ICMP router solicitation ICMP time exceeded ICMP parameter problem 316 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. 64-65535>|any Defines the limit of IP packet’s length. cur Displays the current advanced IP settings for the selected filter. refer to RFC 1340 and 1349. October 2003 . For more information on ToS. length <IP packet length (in bytes). ICMP Message Types The following ICMP message types are used with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp command. newtos <0-255> Sets new IP type of service.0 Command Reference Table 7-16 IP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/ip) Command Syntax and Usage tos <0-255> Sets IP type of service (ToS) and the value of the type of service.

addrd [1>2] Adds an HTTP redirection mapping.Remove string for layer 7 filtering rdsnp .Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets cur .Remove HTTP redirection mapping addstr . Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple filters and each filter requires a separate bandwidth. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Enable/disable Layer 7 content lookup parseall .Enable/disable WAP RADIUS Snooping rdswap . October 2003 „ 317 . This command tells the filter that if it matches on the first string id.0 Command Reference Table 7-17 ICMP Message Types Type # Message Type 13 14 15 16 17 18 timereq timerep inforeq inforep maskreq maskrep Description ICMP timestamp request ICMP timestamp reply ICMP information request ICMP information reply ICMP address mask request ICMP address mask reply /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/layer7 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu [Layer 7 Advanced Menu] urlcont .Enable/disable RADIUS/WAP Persistence ftpa .Set BW cont of an URL path specific to this filter addrd .Enable/disable active FTP NAT l7lkup .Display current layer 7 configuration Table 7-18 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the URL path BW contract for this filter.Add string for layer 7 filtering remstr .Alteon OS 21.Add HTTP redirection mapping remrd . Strings are defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add. then send back an HTTP redirection message back to the client that contains information in the second string ID.

deny. remstr <string id (1-512)> Removes the string ID for Layer 7 filtering. layer 7 lookup is turned off for the remaining packets in the session. parseall disable|enable or just d|e Enables or disables parsing of all packets in a session where layer 7 lookup is being performed. However.Alteon OS 21. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/ layer7/slb/add.g. When a client in active FTP mode sends a PORT command to a remote FTP server. When enabled. rdswap enable|disable or just d|e Enables or disables WAP radius persistence on this filter. This command is enabled by default. and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. By default. this feature enables content-intelligent redirection or content-intelligent deny filtering. 318 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. The real server port (RPORT) will be replaced with a proxy port (PPORT). When combined with a filter action (e. l7lkup disable|enable or just d|e Enables or disables layer 7 lookup on this filter. Once this packet is found. subsequent packets can be ignored. some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. rdsnp disable|enable or just d|e Enables or disables WAP radius snooping on this filter. redir). cur Displays the current configuration. October 2003 . that is PIP:PPORT.0 Command Reference Table 7-18 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage remrd <string id to redirect from (1-512)> <string id to redirect to (2-512)> Removes an HTTP redirection mapping that was added using the addrd command described above. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/ slb/add. This command replaces the urlp and l7deny commands found in earlier releases of Alteon OS. addstr <string id (1-512)> Adds the string ID to this filter for L7 filtering. ftpa disable|enable or just d|e Enables or disables active FTP Client Network Address Translation (NAT). the switch will look into the data part of the frame and replace the client ’s private IP address with a proxy IP (PIP) address. this option is disabled. When parseall is disabled. the filter performs a lookup on layer 7 content such as HTTP strings or headers.

and ICMP protocols. Pattern groups are added using the /cfg/security/ pgroup/add command. UDP. some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. cur Displays the current configuration.Alteon OS 21. pattern matching is turned off for the remaining packets in the session. When parseall is disabled. The protocol-based rate limiting limits the traffic coming from specific clients based on the IP address of the client. addgrp <pattern match group id> Adds a pattern group to this filter.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu [Security Menu] ratelim addgrp remgrp pmatch matchall parseall cur Rate Limiting Menu Add pattern match group for layer 7 filtering Remove pattern match group for layer 7 filtering Enable/disable pattern matching Enable/disable match-all criteria for layer 7 filtering Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets Display current Security configuration Table 7-19 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/security) Command Syntax and Usage ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting Menu. and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables pattern string lookup (parsing) of all packets in a session where pattern matching is being performed. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. Currently. remgrp <pattern match group id> Removes a pattern group from this filter. October 2003 „ 319 . However. This command is enabled by default. matchall disable|enable Enables or disables matching of all configured patterns before the filter can perform the deny action. pmatch disable|enable Enables or disables pattern matching on this filter. To view menu options see page 320. the switch allows rate limiting to be enabled on TCP. subsequent packets can be ignored. This feature enables the switch to detect and block UDP or ICMP-based DOS attacks that slow down or decapitate the servers. Once this packet is found.

or ICMP rate limiting Display current rate limiting configuration Table 7-20 Rate Limiting Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security/ ratelim) Command Syntax and Usage maxconn <# of connections in units of 10 (0-255)> Defines maximum connections for rate limiting. UDP. or ICMP rate limiting. When blocking occurs. 1-65535> Defines time window for rate limiting. A time window is a configured period of time (in seconds) during which packets are allowed to be received. 320 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. after which new TCP connection requests or packets from the client are allowed once again to pass through. The hold-down duration can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. and ICMP. UDP. The client is held down for a specified number of minutes. holddur <minutes. When the number of new connections or packets exceeds the configured limit. any new TCP connection requests or UDP/ICMP packets from the client are blocked.Alteon OS 21. cur Displays the current rate limiting configuration. or ICMP rate limiting Disable TCP. dis Disables TCP.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security/ ratelim Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu [Rate Limiting maxconn timewin holddur ena dis cur Menu] Set maximum connections for rate limiting Set time window for rate limiting Set hold down duration for rate limiting Enable TCP. October 2003 . the client is said to be held down. Rate limiting is applied to the protocol configured on the filter. ena Enables the protocol for rate limiting. UDP. UDP. The time window can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. The supported protocols are: TCP. timewin <seconds. 2-65535> Defines hold down duration for rate limiting.

directly or through a hub.Enable/disable intrusion detection server load balancing cur . This option is disabled by default. Maximizing the number of these ports on the Layer 4 switch will improve the switch’s potential for effective Server Load Balancing. Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally. clear the session binding table for the port (see the clear command in Table 8-3 on page 350).0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/port <port number> Port SLB Configuration [SLB port 1 Menu] client . Table 7-21 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) Command Syntax and Usage client disable|enable For Server Load Balancing.Enable/disable client processing server . NOTE – When changing the filters on a given port.Alteon OS 21. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. When server processing is enabled. This option is disabled by default. the port can be enabled or disabled to process client Layer 4 traffic.Enable/disable inter-switch processing proxy . October 2003 „ 321 . To make port filter changes take effect immediately.Remove filter from port idslb . re-mapping virtual server IP addresses and port values to real server IP addresses and ports.Add filter to port rem .Enable/disable RTS processing hotstan . or another switch. server disable|enable Ports configured to provide real server responses to client requests require real servers to be connected to the Layer 4 switch.Enable/disable server processing rts . Ports configured to process client request traffic bind servers to clients and provide address translation from the virtual server IP address to the real server IP address. the switch port re-maps real server IP addresses and Layer 4 port values to virtual server IP addresses and Layer 4 ports.Display current port configuration Alteon OS switch software allows you to enable or disable processing independently for each type of Layer 4 traffic (client and server) on a per port basis. it may take some time before the port session information is updated so that the filter changes take effect. expanding your topology options.Enable/disable filtering add . Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally.Enable/disable hot-standby processing intersw . router.Enable/disable use of PIP for ingress traffic filt .

Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. This option is disabled by default. intersw disable|enable Enables or disables inter-switch processing. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables a proxy for traffic that ingresses this port. Proxies are also useful for Application Redirection and Network Address Translation (NAT). When the PIP is defined. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. Enabling the filter sets up the Real Server to look into the VPN session table.0 Command Reference Table 7-21 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) rts disable|enable Enables or disables Return to Sender (RTS) load balancing on this port. In Server Load Balancing applications. add <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Adds a filter or a block of filters for use on this port. cur Displays the current system parameters. This option is enabled for ports connected to a peer switch and is disabled by default. October 2003 . This option is disabled by default. When pip is used with Application Redirection filters. This option is used for firewall load balancing or VPN load balancing applications. For example. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. This option is disabled by default. see the “Firewall Load Balancing” and “VPN Load Balancing” chapters in the Alteon OS 21.0 Application Guide. filt disable|enable Enables or disables filtering on this port. each filter’s rport parameter must also be defined (see rport on page 308). Use this option and the intersw option in conjunction with VRRP hot-standby failover. as is possible in complex routing environments. This option is disabled by default. 322 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. For more information on using rts. Enable rts on all client-side ports to ensure that traffic ingresses and egresses through the same port. This option is disabled by default. 1-100. rather than around it. For example. rem <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Removes a filter or a block of filters from use on this port. idslb disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing for this port.Alteon OS 21. 1-100. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot-standby processing. this forces response traffic to return through the switch.

ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Specifies the duration (from 0 to 65535 seconds. Higher numbers may reduce the amount of DNS traffic. alway.Enable/disable DNS responses with only local addresses one .Enable/disable no remote real SLB encrypt .Enable/disable DNS responses at least one address geo .Display current Global SLB configuration NOTE – The local. By default. To view menu options.Remote Site Menu lookup .Enable/disable DNS responses with only one address alway .Enable/disable HTTP redirect to real server name norem .Enable/disable geographic awareness http .Set interval between remote site updates weight .Enable/disable DNS handoffs local . this option is disabled.Set minimum number of site connections inter .Set Time To Live of DNS resource records mincon . and geo options have no effect on lookup. but may slow GSLB’s response to sudden traffic changes. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. see page 327. October 2003 „ 323 . The options in this menu will overwrite the geographic awareness (IANA table) during DNS queries. with default at 60) that the DNS response from the switch (indicating site of best service) will remain in the cache of DNS servers. A lower value may increase the ability of the GSLB system to adjust to sudden changes in traffic load.Alteon OS 21. To view menu options. one.Globally turn Global SLB ON off .Enable/disable encrypting remote site update on .Network Preference Lookup Menu ttl .Globally turn Global SLB OFF cur . but will generate more DNS traffic.Enable/disable HTTP redirects usern .Set local weight dns . lookup Displays the Global SLB Lookup Menu. Table 7-22 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage site <remote site (1-64)> Displays the Remote Site Menu for one of up to 64 remote sites.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb Global SLB Configuration [Global SLB Menu] site . see page 326.

When enabled. as long as the virtual server IP address has healthy real servers with an aggregate number of available connections equal to the total from each server’s configured maxcons value. The default is 1 minute. The default is 1. all clients and sites will be assumed to exist in the same geographic region. This option is disabled by default.Alteon OS 21. local disable|enable Enables or disables switch responses to DNS queries with local virtual server IP addresses. alway disable|enable Enables or disables DNS responses (with) at least one address. 0-65535> Sets the minimum number of available site connections. the more connections that will be directed to the local site. traffic won’t be redirected to the site. This option is enabled by default. When the real servers for the local virtual server IP addresses are unavailable or saturated. October 2003 . This option is disabled by default. If disabled. such as the IANA table. The range is between 1 and 120 minutes. allowing all sites to be eligible for each client. weight <server weight (1-48)> Sets the local weight. If the site’s available sessions fall below this value. the switch will always respond to DNS queries by providing a local virtual server IP address. Even if all remote sites cannot handle another request. This option is enabled by default. regardless of performance or load considerations. This option is disabled by default. it will respond only with its own virtual server IP address. At least one IP address is included in each DNS response. The higher the weight value. one disable|enable Enables or disables DNS responses with only one address. This should be enabled for proper GSLB operation. geo disable|enable Enables or disables geographic awareness.0 Command Reference Table 7-22 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage mincon <minimum connections. 324 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. minus the server’s current number of connections. If this option is disabled. At the most one IP address is included in each DNS response. inter <interval in minutes (1-120)> Sets the time between Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) updates between this switch and its peers. whenever the switch receives a DNS request for a configured service. The default is set at 1024. A site is not eligible for more requests (such as DNS or HTTP redirects) once the number of available connections at a site drops below this threshold. dns disable|enable Enables or disables DNS handoffs to peer sites by this switch. The response time of this site is divided by this weight before the best site is assigned to a client. the local VIP is returned in DNS response to eliminate long DNS timeouts caused by an empty response. the switch will respond to DNS requests using normal GSLB rules. Remote site response times are divided by the real server weight before selection occurs.

the switch will not do remote real server load balancing for non-http protocols. GSLB is turned off. If enabled. For HTTP protocols. usern disable|enable Enables or disables an HTTP redirect to a real server name. the client is redirected to the new site's IP address. the client will be redirected to the domain name specified by the remote real server name plus virtual server domain name: <remote real server name>. If disabled. but will not hand off requests to this switch.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 325 . cur Displays the current Global SLB configuration. encrypt disable|enable This command enables or disables encrypting of DSSP updates. off Turns GSLB off for this switch. the switch will not perform HTTP Redirects. you need to disable the http parameter in the same menu.<virtual server domain name> norem disable|enable This command enables or disables no-remote real server load balancing. If usern is enabled. this switch will redirect client requests to peer sites if its own real servers fail or have reached their maximum connection limits. This option is disabled by default. When enabled (default). If disabled. if you want to do no-remote-real-server load balancing. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. When a site redirects a client to another site using an HTTP redirect. on Activates Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) for this switch. but will instead drop requests for new connections and cause the client’s browser to eventually issue a new DNS request. By default. the switch will not encrypt the DSSP messages going out of the switch. This option can be performed only once the optional GSLB software is activated (refer to “Activating Optional Software” on page 353).0 Command Reference Table 7-22 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP redirects to peer sites by this switch. This option allows the GSLB feature to work with older versions of Web OS that do not encrypt DSSP messages. Any active remote sites will still perform GSLB services with each other.

the switch will not send state updates. Note: When update is enabled.Set primary switch IP address of remote site secon . October 2003 . name <31 character name>|none Sets the name of the remote site.Delete remote site cur . the local switch will address the remote site secondary switch instead. disable the updates.Alteon OS 21. secon <server IP address> If the remote site is configured with a redundant switch. ena Enables this remote site for use with Global Server Load Balancing. Global Server Load Balancing uses service port 80 on the IP interface for DSSP updates. If both are enabled. If the remote site primary switch fails. Both services cannot use the same port. configure the Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) to use a different service port (see the /cfg/sys/access/wport option on page 193). The default is set at none. Table 7-23 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage prima <server IP address> Defines the IP interface IP address of the primary switch at the remote site used for Global Server Load Balancing.Set secondary switch IP address of remote site name .Display current remote site configuration Up to 64 remote sites can be configured.Disable remote site del . By default. update disable|enable Enables or disables remote site updates. If enabled (default).0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb/site <site number> GSLB Remote Site Configuration [Remote site 1 Menu] prima .Enable/disable remote site updates ena . If your local firewall does not permit this traffic.Enable remote site dis . If disabled. enter the IP address of the IP interface for the remote secondary switch here.Set remote site name update . 326 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. this switch will send regular Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) updates to its remote peers using HTTP port 80. Use dotted decimal notation. the Alteon OS Web-based interface also uses port 80.

The maximum number of characters that a domain name can use is 34. the switch responds to DNS requests based on the configured dname and Internet Preference Menu option settings.Display current lookup configuration Table 7-24 GSLB Lookup Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/lookup) Command Syntax and Usage network <internal static (1-1024)><internet network preference number (1-1024)> Displays the Internet Network Preference Menu. dname <34 character domain name>|none Sets the domain name for the internal lookup table. When disabled.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 327 . /cfg/slb/gslb/lookup GSLB Lookup Configuration [Global SLB Lookup Menu] network . This option is disabled by default. the hostname specified in the Virtual Service configuration in addition to the domain name field (dname command in the CLI) will be used to resolve the IP address for the domain. If enabled. The default is set at none. see page 328. del Removes this remote site from operation and deletes its configuration. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. only the domain name will be used to match. To view menu options.0 Command Reference Table 7-23 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables this remote site.Enable or disable network preference lookups hostlk . The switch will no longer use this remote site for Global Server Load Balancing. cur Displays the current remote site configuration. When enabled.Set domain name for internal lookup table lookups . hostlk disable|enable Enables or disables lookups based on host or domain name in a GSLB configuration.Enable or disable hostname matching in lookups cur .Internet Network Preference Menu dname . lookups disable|enable Enables or disables network preference lookups.

Client IP address doesn’t match address in the Network Preference Menu and no default entry is configured.Alteon OS 21.Set Source IP address mask . VIP1 and VIP2 are not healthy—they are down or over the minimum number of connections (mincon). Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.0.0. Table 7-25 GSLB Internet Network Preference Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/ lookup/network) Command Syntax and Usage sip <IP address> Sets the source (client) IP address. /cfg/slb/gslb/lookup/network <preference number> GSLB Internet Network Preference Lookup Configuration [Network 1 Menu] sip . 328 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. All client networks not in the Network Preference Menu will use this entry to respond to a DNS request. You can overwrite the IANA table by defining client networks.Set VIP address vip2 .Set VIP address del .Delete internet network entry cur . using the options in this menu. However.0 Command Reference Table 7-24 GSLB Lookup Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/lookup) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current lookup configuration. The default entry is one where the source IP address and mask are not configured (both are 0. There is an entry match in the Network Preference Menu. You should use regular GSLB to respond to a DNS request under the following conditions: „ „ „ Queried domain is not matched.Set net mask vip1 . October 2003 .Display current internet network entry configuration Up to 1024 network preference numbers can be set.0) and only the VIP1 and VIP 2 are configured. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mask option.

vip1 <IP address> Sets the first virtual server IP address. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Menu. vip2 <IP address> Sets the second virtual server IP address. To view menu options. The address can either be a local or remote virtual server. /cfg/slb/layer7 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu [Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu] redir .Display current Layer 7 configuration Table 7-26 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage redir Displays the Web Cache Redirection Menu. dbindtm <10-60 seconds> Sets the timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections. October 2003 „ 329 . see page 330.Set timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections cur . see page 331.Web Cache Redirection Menu slb .Server Load Balancing Menu dbindtm . Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. cur Displays the current Internet network entry configuration.Alteon OS 21. The switch returns the VIP address with the least response time that is over the mincon (minimum number of available connections). del Deletes the network entry. To view menu options. cur Displays the current Layer 7 configuration.0 Command Reference Table 7-25 GSLB Internet Network Preference Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/ lookup/network) Command Syntax and Usage mask <IP address> This IP address mask is used with the source IP SIP address to find a correct virtual server IP address to respond to a DNS request.

1 header. „ „ If this command is enabled. the switch will redirect all non-GET requests to the origin server. „ If this command is disabled. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to a cache server or origin server.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/layer7/redir Web Cache Redirection Configuration [Web Cache Redirection Menu] urlal . or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1. „ If hashing is disabled. or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1. the switch will only use the host header field to calculate the hash key.1 header. the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to the origin server. October 2003 . This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable server loadbalance based on HTTP header cur . nocache disable|enable Enables or disables no-cache control header to origin servers.Enable/disable URL hashing based on URI header . the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether all non-GET requests should be redirected to a cache server or origin server. This option is enabled by default. „ „ If this command is enabled. „ If hashing is enabled. cookie disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for cookie to origin servers. hash disable|enable <number (1-255)> Enables or disables URL hashing based on the URI. the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cache-Control: nocache in HTTP/1.Enable/disable no-cache control header to origin servers hash . If this command is enabled.Display current WCR configuration Table 7-27 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage urlal disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers.Alteon OS 21. This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers cookie .Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for Cookie to origin servers nocache . the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect requests that contain Cache-Control: no-cache in HTTP/ 1.0 header to a cache server or origin server.0 header to the origin server. you can set the length of URI that will be used to hash into the cache server by specifying a number from 1-255. This option is enabled by default. If this command is disabled. „ If this command is disabled. 330 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.

Add SLB string for load balance rename .Set HTTP error message add . This option is disabled by default. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set BW contract for the SLB string cur .0 Command Reference Table 7-27 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage header disable|enable host|useragent|others Enables or disables server load balancing based on HTTP header. cur Displays the currently configured SLB strings and their associated string IDs (index numbers).” add <SLB string> Adds the SLB string for load balancing. The default message is “No available server to handle this request. cur Displays the current URL expression table. cont <SLB string ID [1-512]> <BW contract number [1-256]> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for a specified string for the SLB string ID.Remove SLB string for load balance cont .Alteon OS 21.Rename SLB string for load balance rem . October 2003 „ 331 . rem <SLB string ID> Removes the SLB string from load balancing.Display current configuration Table 7-28 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb) Command Syntax and Usage message <64 byte error message> Sets the message that will be displayed when an error occurs. rename <SLB string ID> <SLB string> Renames the SLB string for load balancing. /cfg/slb/layer7/slb Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu [Server Loadbalance Resource Menu] message .

cur Displays the current WAP configuration 332 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable WAP TPCP external notification debug .0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/wap WAP Configuration [WAP Options Menu] tpcp . October 2003 . The default is set at 0.WAP debug level cur . debug <wap debug level (0-10)> Sets the debug level for tracing the WAP related messages.Display current WAP configuration Table 7-29 WAP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/wap) Command Syntax and Usage tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP external notification for Add/Delete session requests.

This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable syncing port configuration prios . filt disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing filter configuration. Peers are sent SLB. pips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing proxy IP addresses.Enable/disable syncing persistent session state update . Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password. This option is enabled by default. ports disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Layer 4 port configuration. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set stateful failover update period cur . This option is disabled by default. and VRRP configuration updates using /oper/slb/ synch. This option is enabled by default.Display current Layer 4 sync configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches.Enable/disable syncing filter configuration ports . To view menu options. FILT. a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch.Enable/disable syncing BWM configuration state .Enable/disable syncing peer proxy IP addresses bwm . Table 7-30 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer switch number (1-2)> Displays the Sync Peer Switch Menu.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/sync Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration [Config Synchronization Menu] peer .Synch Peer Switch Menu filt . see page 334. October 2003 „ 333 . This option is enabled by default. peerpips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing the peer proxy IP addresses.Alteon OS 21. prios disable|enable Enables or disables syncing VRRP priorities. This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable syncing proxy IP addresses peerpips . Peer proxy IP addresses are used in VRRP Active/Active configuration.Enable/disable syncing VRRP priorities pips .

update <seconds. 1–60> Sets the stateful failover update interval. This option is disabled by default. By default. cur Displays the current Layer 4 synchronization configuration. state disable|enable Enables or disables stateful failover for synchronizing the persistent session state.0. Table 7-31 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address> Sets the peer switch IP address. Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password. dis Disables the peer for this switch.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . 334 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 ena Enables the peer for this switch.0 Command Reference Table 7-30 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage bwm disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Bandwidth Management configuration between Master and backup switches.Enable peer switch dis . The default value is 30 seconds. The active server sends update packets of persistent binding entries to the backup switch at the specified update interval.Display current peer switch configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches. a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch. The default is 0.0.Set peer switch IP address ena .Disable peer switch del . This option is enabled by default. /cfg/slb/sync/peer <peer switch number> Peer Switch Configuration [Peer Switch 1 Menu] addr .Delete peer switch cur . this option is disabled.

255.Alteon OS 21. see page 337.Enable/disable using VLAN info for real server lookup fastage . imask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.Enable/disable Virtual Service Statistics rtsvlan .Set virtual and real IP address mask mnet .Set persistent mask submac .255.Enable/disable Virtual Matrix Architecture tpcp .Set management subnet mask pmask .Enable/disable graceful real server failure matrix .0)> Configures the real and virtual server IP address mask using dotted decimal notation.255.Session table slow-age (2 min) period bit shift cur . /cfg/slb/adv Advanced Layer 4 Configuration [Layer 4 Advanced Menu] synatk .255.Enable/Disable Source MAC address substitution direct . mnet <IP address> If defined. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. management traffic with this source IP address will be allowed direct (non-Layer 4) access to the real servers.Enable/disable Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol vstat .255. To view menu options. October 2003 „ 335 . The default is 255.SYN Attack Detection Menu imask . A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mmask option.Display current Layer 4 advanced configuration Table 7-32 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage synatk Displays SYN Attack Detection Menu.Enable/disable Direct Access Mode grace .Set management network mmask .0 Command Reference Table 7-31 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the peer for this switch cur Displays the current peer switch configuration. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Session table fast-age (1 sec) period bit shift slowage .

255. direct disable|enable Enable/disables Direct Access Mode to real servers/services. By default.0 Application Guide). the switch will substitute the source MAC address (for the packets going to the server) with the MAC address of the switch. By default.255.255. By default. pmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. submac disable|enable Enables or disables Source MAC address substitution.255.0)> Sets persistent mask.255. The default interval is two seconds. The fastage scan is used to remove TCP sessions that have been closed with a FIN and sessions that have been identified by the slowage scan as idle for the maximum allowed period. Typically. If a large value of fastage is used. grace disable|enable Enables or disables graceful real server failure. This command is used for security reasons—the UDP port can be closed.0)> This IP address mask is used with the mnet to select management traffic which is allowed direct access to real servers. see “Service Failure” in the Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference Table 7-32 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage mmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. Allows existing sessions to remain bound to a server after the server has been placed in the service failed state (for more information. But if you enable this command.255. this option is enabled. fastage <shift the fast-age (1sec) period 0-7 bits> Controls how frequently a fastage scan is performed. This option also allows any virtual server to load balance any real server. tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol). By default. The default is 0. a session can remain in the session table for a few minutes.255. The default is 255. this option is disabled.255. 336 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. vstat disable|enable Enables or disables reporting of virtual service statistics.255.Alteon OS 21.255. this option is disabled. this option is disabled. rtsvlan disable|enable Enables or disables the use of VLAN for Return to Sender information on the real server. the source MAC is not modified for the packets going to the servers in an SLB environment. matrix disable|enable Enables or disables the use of Virtual Matrix Architecture on the Alteon Application Switch. The default is 255. October 2003 .

The default is 0. The slowage scan is used to remove idle or non-TCP sessions from the session at the specified intervals. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. cur Displays the current SYN attack detection configuration. thrshld <SYN attack alarm threshold (new half-open sessions/second) (1-100000)> Sets the threshold of SYN attack alarm.Set SYN attack detection interval thrshld .Alteon OS 21. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval.Display current SYN attack detection configuration Table 7-33 SYN Attack Detection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/synatk) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <SYN attack check interval in seconds (2-3600)> Sets the interval of SYN attack inspection. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced configuration. If a large value of slowage is used. October 2003 „ 337 . which causes the time to double per increment). a session can remain in the session table for months.Set SYN attack alarm threshold cur . The default interval is two minutes. /cfg/slb/adv/synatk SYN Attack Detection Configuration [SYN Attack Detection Menu] intrval .0 Command Reference Table 7-32 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage slowage <shift the slow-age (2min) period 0-14 bits> Controls how frequently a slowage scan is performed. (Value is set in bits rather than seconds.

see page 340.Enable/disable Allow HTTP Health Check on any port ldapver .Scriptable Health Check Menu snmphc .0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu [Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu] script . The default is 2. see page 339.WAP Health Check Menu aphttp . you can use HTTP health checks only for HTTP service. By default. snmphc <SNMP health check number (1-5)> Displays the SNMP Health Check Menu. The secret value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. the network administrator must configure two parameters in the switch: the /cfg/slb/secret value and the cntnt parameter with a username:password value.LDAP version secret . To view menu options. The default is set at 10.SNMP Health Check Menu waphc . October 2003 . 338 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. waphc Displays the WAP Health Check Menu. ldapver <LDAP version> Sets the LDAP version to 2 or 3. aphttp disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP health checks on any port. To view menu options.Set interval of response and bandwidth metric updates cur . secret <1-32 character secret> To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server.Alteon OS 21. like HTTPs. see page 341. this option is disabled. Enabling it will allow you to use it on any port. When disabled.Set RADIUS secret minter . minter <number of seconds between updates (1-256)> This command sets the interval of response and bandwidth metric updates. The default is none.Display current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration Table 7-34 Advanced Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc) Command Syntax and Usage script <health script number (1-16)> Displays the Scriptable Health Check Menu. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration. To view menu options.

"GET /default.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/script <health script number> Scriptable Health Checks Configuration [Health Script 1 Menu] open . October 2003 „ 339 .Add expect command to end of script close .Delete script cur . cur Lists the current script configuration. an HTTP request.Add close command to end of script rem . such as.asp HTTP/1.Add send command to end of script expect .Display current script configuration The Health Script menu provides commands that can be used to define the health “script." expect <text string> Expects an ASCII string for successful health check on open TCP port.1 200 close Closes TCP connection. Table 7-35 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script) Command Syntax and Usage open <real port or name (such as: http)> Sets the TCP port to be opened. For example.1\\r\\nHOST: www.Alteon OS 21. Up to eight scripts can be configured. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. such as an HTTP response: HTTP/1.” The total number of characters cannot exceed 1024 bytes.Remove last command from script del . rem Removes the last entered line from the script.com\\r\\n\\r\\n. send <text string> Sends an ASCII string through open TCP port. del Deletes the current script.Add open command to end of script send .alteon.

Delete SNMP health check cur . for example.7.1. weight disable|enable When enabled.Display current SNMP health check configuration Table 7-36 SNMP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/snmphc) Command Syntax and Usage oid <object identifier. The format of the OID depends on the MIB file. such as.1.4. del Deletes the current SNMP health check.Enable/disable readjusting of weights based on response del . When the invert option is enabled.3. The default community string is public. cur Displays the current SNMP Health Check configuration.6.2. 1. October 2003 .11. invert disable|enable Enables or disables the inversion of the expected value. an OID is of the form 1.0 max 30 sub-identifiers> Specify the Object Identifier (OID) to be sent in the SNMP GET request packet.6.Alteon OS 21.Expected value in the SNMP response packet invert .OID to be sent in the SNMP request packet comm .1.1872.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/snmphc SNMP Health Check Configuration [SNMP Health Check 1 Menu] oid . the health check fails if the response packet contains the value specified in the receive content (rcvnt) field. the real server weights are dynamically adjusted based on SNMP health check response. comm <community string.5. maximum 32 characters> Enter the community string used in the SNMP get request packet.3.1.2.1. 340 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Community string used in the SNMP request packet rcvcnt .1. rcvcnt <expected content an integer value or a string> Enter the content the switch expects to receive from the SNMP agent on the real server.Enable/disable inversion of expected value weight .

wtpcnt Displays WTP and WSP Health Check Content Menu. [WAP Health Check Menu] wspcnt .WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu wspport . ports 9200 and 9202 and connectionoriented (WTP) traffic runs on ports 9201 and 9203. Application switches can be used to load balance the gateways in both modes of operation.WSP Health Check Content Menu wtpcnt . The default port number is 9201. Connectionless WSP runs on UDP/IP protocol. wspport <wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WSP health checks will be performed. see page 342. deployed on WAP gateways/ servers. WTLS+WSP. see page 343. refer to the Application Guide.Enable/disable coupling with RADIUS Accounting Service cur .WTP port number to health check wtlswsp . WTLS+WTP+WSP).WTLS port number to health check couple . To view menu options.Display current WAP health check configuration Table 7-37 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wspcnt Displays WSP Health Check Content Menu.WSP port number to health check wtpport . Alteon OS provides a content-based health check mechanism where customized WSP packets are sent to the WAP gateways. WTP+WSP. wtpport <wtp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTP port number to health check.WTLS+WSP port number to health check wtlsprt . The default port number is 9200. October 2003 „ 341 .0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc WAP Health Check Configuration Wireless Session Protocol (WSP) is used within the Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) suite to manage sessions between wireless devices and WAP content servers or WAP gateways. and the switch verifies the expected response. Alteon OS allows you to configure three WAP gateway health check types for all four WAP services (WSP. For further details.Alteon OS 21. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. To view menu options. in a manner similar to scriptable health checks. WSP content health checks can be configured in two modes: connectionless and connectionoriented.

An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of the content of the received packet. /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt WSP Content Health Check [WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset .0 Command Reference Table 7-37 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wtlswsp <wtls+wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTLS (Wireless Transport Layer Security) and WSP port number to health check. wtlsprt <port number (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WTLS health checks will be performed.Content to be received from the WAP gateway cur . then all of the four WAP services and Radius Accounting Service are disabled. WTLS+WSP.Content to be sent to the WAP gateway rcvcnt . cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration. If the health check to any one of the four WAP services or Radius Accounting Service fails. WTLS+WTP+WSP) with Radius Accounting Service. rcvcnt <receive content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway. October 2003 .Offset in received WSP packet sndcnt . The connection-oriented WTLS traffic uses default port 9203. couple disable|enable Enables or disables coupling together of all the four WAP services (WSP. This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway. sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a connectionless WSP request to a WSP gateway. 342 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Display current WSP health check content configuration Table 7-38 WSP Content Health Check Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <Offset in the received WSP packet (0-512)> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packages.Alteon OS 21. WTP+WSP. The connectionless encrypted WTLS traffic uses default port 9202.

REPLY PDU to be received from cur . connect <connect content as hexstring> Enter the content for the first switch-generated WSP session packet. An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of WSP PDU of the received packet.Offset in received WSP PDU connect .Display current WTP+WSP health WAP gateway gateway the WAP gateway check content configuration Table 7-39 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/ waphc/wtpcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <offset in the received WSP PDU> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packets. The offset value is the number of bytes from the beginning of the WSP PDU.CONNECT PDU to be sent to the sndcnt . [WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset . at which the comparison begins to match with the expected receive content.GET PDU to be sent to the WAP rcvcnt .0 Command Reference Table 7-38 WSP Content Health Check Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration. This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway. October 2003 „ 343 . cur Displays current WTP+WSP health check content configuration. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. This command allows you to customize the headers in the connect message. rcvcnt <receive content as a hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway. /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wtpcnt WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu This menu is used for configuring the health check for connection-oriented unencrypted WAP traffic.Alteon OS 21. sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a WSP request to a WSP gateway.

Display current Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-40 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu Options for Alteon Application Switch 2224 (/cfg/slb/pip) Command Syntax and Usage pip1 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address (in Alteon Application Switch 2224) for SP1 ports 1 to 12 and 25 using dotted decimal notation on SP1.Set Proxy IP address for ports 1-12 and 25 pip2 . pgarp disable|enable When this command is enabled. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21. pip2 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP2 on ports 13 to 24. pip4 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP4.Set Proxy IP address for port 26 pip4 . 344 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. cur Displays the current Proxy IP address configuration.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/pip Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu For Alteon 2224 [Proxy IP Address Menu] pip1 . pip3 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP3 on port 26.Enable/disable Proxy Ip Gratuitous ARP cur . When the pip is defined. the switch will send gratuitous ARPs for enabled proxy IP addresses (PIPs) every 30 seconds.Set Proxy IP address for persistent SP pgarp .Set Proxy IP address for ports 13-24 pip3 .

client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address.Set Proxy IP address for port 28 pgarp .Alteon OS 21.Display current Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-41 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu Options for Alteon Application Switch 2424 (/cfg/slb/pip) Command Syntax and Usage pip1 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address (in Alteon Application Switch 2424) for SP1 on ports 1 to 12 and 25 using dotted decimal notation on SP1.Set Proxy IP address for port 1 to 12 and 25 pip2 . pip4 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP4 on port 28. pgarp disable|enable When this command is enabled. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. When the pip is defined. pip2 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP2 on ports 13 to 24 and 27.Set Proxy IP address for port 26 pip4 . pip3 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP3 on port 26.Enable/disable Proxy Ip Gratuitous ARP cur . October 2003 „ 345 .0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/pip Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu For Alteon 2424 [Proxy IP Address Menu] pip1 . the switch will send gratuitous ARPs for enabled proxy IP addresses (PIPs) every 30 seconds. cur Displays the current Proxy IP address configuration.Set Proxy IP address for port 13 to 24 and 27 pip3 .

pip4 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP4 on ports 4. 6 and 11 pip3 . pgarp disable|enable When this command is enabled. 5.Display current Proxy IP address configuration Figure 7-1 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu Options for Alteon Application Switch 3408 (/cfg/slb/pip) Command Syntax and Usage pip1 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address (in Alteon Application Switch 3408) for SP1 on ports 1. pip2 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP2 on ports 2. 7. and 10.Set Proxy IP address for ports 1. 8. 7 and 10 pip4 .Set Proxy IP address for ports 2. the switch will send gratuitous ARPs for enabled proxy IP addresses (PIPs) every 30 seconds. October 2003 .0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/pip Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu For Alteon 3408 [Proxy IP Address Menu] pip1 . and 9 using dotted decimal notation on SP1. 6.Alteon OS 21. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. cur Displays the current Proxy IP address configuration. 346 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. 5 and 9 pip2 .Enable/disable Proxy Ip Gratuitous ARP cur .Set Proxy IP address for ports 4. and 11. and 12.Set Proxy IP address for ports 3. When the pip is defined. pip3 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP3 on ports 3. 8 and 12 pgarp .

CHAPTER 8 The Operations Menu The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immediately. with the understanding that when the switch is reset. the port returns to its normally configured operation.Enter key to enable software feature rmkey .Operational Server Load Balancing Menu vrrp . October 2003 .Operational IP Menu swkey . 347 315393-E. /oper Operations Menu [Operations Menu] port . you can use the Operations Menu to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change). Port Mirroring menu options are accessible only to the Alteon AD4 and Alteon 184 WebSwitches.Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu bwm . but do not alter permanent switch configurations.Clear syslog messages The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics without affecting switch configuration.Enter software feature to be removed clrlog .Operational Port Menu slb . For example.Operational Bandwidth Management Menu ip .

To view menu options. slb Displays the Operational Layer 4 Menu. October 2003 . vrrp Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu. see page 351. which has one sub-menu/option. see page 351. swkey <16-hexadecimal digit key to enable software feature> Enter key to enable software feature. see page 352. To view menu options. see page 354. see page 353. see page 349. rmkey <software feature to be removed (GSL|BWM|Security)> Enter software feature to be removed. For details. To view menu options. see page 350. ip Displays the IP Operations Menu.Alteon OS 21. To view menu options. bwm Operational Bandwidth Management Menu.0 Command Reference Table 8-1 Operations Menu Options (/oper) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Operational Port Menu. clrlog Clears all syslog messages. For details. the Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu. 348 „ Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E. To view menu options.

Enable/Disable RMON for port ena . dis Temporarily disables the port.Current port state Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port. and for changing Remote Monitoring (RMON) status on a port.Enable port dis . Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference /oper/port <port number> Operations-Level Port Options [Operations Port 1 Menu] rmon . The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. cur Displays the current settings for the port.Alteon OS 21. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. Table 8-2 Operations-Level Port Menu Options (/oper/port) Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Temporarily enables/disables Remote Monitoring on the port. ena Temporarily enables the port.Disable port cur . October 2003 „ 349 .

peers must be configured on the Alteon Application Switch and the administrator password on the switch must be identical.Current layer 4 operational state When the optional Layer 4 software is enabled. October 2003 .0 Application Guide.Synchronize SLB. The real server will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. To take effect. For more information. Bandwidth Management configuration.allow persistent http 1.0 Command Reference /oper/slb Operations-Level SLB Options [Server Load Balancing Operations Menu] sync . VRRP. Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sync Synchronizes the SLB. VRRP and other configurations on peers ena . port. 1-1023> [P . ena <real server number (1-1023)> Temporarily enables a real server.Alteon OS 21.Enable real server dis . filter. see “Disabling and Enabling Real Servers” in the Alteon OS 21. NOTE – This command provides for orderly server shutdown to allow maintenance on a server. dis <real server number. 350 „ Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E. the operations-level Server Load Balancing options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling real servers and synchronizing the configuration between the active/active switches.Disable real server clear .Clear session table cur .0 sessions] p|n The disable command is used to temporarily disable real servers as follows: „ Using the p (persistent) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server (except for persistent http 1. and VR priorities on a peer switch (a switch that owns the IP address).0 sessions) by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server „ Using the n (none) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server The real server will be returned to its configured state after a switch reset.

[VRRP Operations Menu] back . When this command is executed. October 2003 „ 351 . After the new election.Set virtual router to backup Table 8-4 Virtual Router Redundancy Operations Menu Options (/oper/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage back <virtual router number (1-256)> Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode.Alteon OS 21. Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E. NOTE – This command disrupts current SLB and Application Redirection sessions.0 Command Reference Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage clear Clears all session tables and allows port filter changes to take effect immediately. /oper/vrrp Operations-Level VRRP Options. the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases: „ „ „ This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same) This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled. There are no other virtual routers available to take master control. cur Displays the current SLB operational state. This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure. the current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest).

Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu Table 8-6 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu.Alteon OS 21. To view the menu options see page 353.Send BW History to SMTP server Table 8-5 Bandwidth Operations Menu Options (/oper/bwm/sndhist) Command Syntax and Usage sndhist Sends the bandwidth history to a system administrator specified under /cfg/bwm/user (see page 212). 352 „ Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E. October 2003 .0 Command Reference /oper/bwm Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options [Bandwidth Management Operations Menu] sndhist . /oper/ip Operations-Level IP Options [IP Operations Menu] bgp .

Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E. One software license is needed for each switch where the optional software is to be used. you must obtain a software license from your Nortel Networks representative or authorized reseller. stop <peer number (1-16)> Stops the peer session. /oper/swkey Activating Optional Software The swkey option is used for activating any optional software you have purchased for your switch. Currently the following software packages are available for purchase and installation: „ „ „ Security Pack Bandwidth Management Global Server Load Balancing To obtain a software key. Before you can activate optional software. Nortel Networks will then provide a License Password. You will receive a Licence Certificate for each software license purchased. October 2003 „ 353 .Alteon OS 21. you must register each License Certificate with Nortel Networks and provide the MAC address of the Alteon OS switch that will run the optional software.0 Command Reference /oper/ip/bgp Operations-Level BGP Options [Border Gateway start stop cur Protocol Operations Menu] Start peer session Stop peer session Current BGP operational state Table 8-7 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage start <peer number (1-16)> Starts the peer session. cur Displays the current BGP operational state.

perform the following actions: 1. To deactivate optional software. enter: Operations# swkey 4. 3. enter: Main# oper 2. enter the code for software to be removed. For example: Enter Software Key: <16 hexadecimal-digit key to enable software feature (such as. October 2003 . At the Operations# prompt. Deactivated software is still present in switch memory and can be reactivated at any later time.0 Command Reference NOTE – Each License Password will work only on the specific switch which has the MAC address you provided when registering your Licence Certificate. “The Command Line Interface”). enter the following at the Operations Menu: Operations# rmkey <software feature to be removed (GSLB|BWM|security)> When prompted. Once you have your License Password.Alteon OS 21. 123456789ABCDEF)> If the correct code is entered. enter your 16-digit software key code. Software feature enabled. you will see the following message: Valid software key entered. /oper/rmkey Removing Optional Software The rmkey option is used for deactivating any optional software. Connect to the switch’s command line interface and log in as the administrator (see Chapter 1. For example: Enter Software Feature to be removed: [GSLB]|BWM|security: GSLB 354 „ Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E. When prompted. At the Main# prompt.

Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree] . 355 315393-E.CHAPTER 9 The Boot Options Menu To use the Boot Options Menu. October 2003 .Scheduled Switch Reset Menu . The Boot Options Menu provides options for: „ „ „ Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via TFTP /boot Boot Menu [Boot Options sched image conf gtimg ptimg reset cur Menu] .Upload selected software image via TFTP .Select software image to use on next boot .Select config block to use on next boot .Download new software image via TFTP . you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.Display current boot options Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections.

if your active image is currently loaded into image1. if needed. 356 „ Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-E. October 2003 . cancel a previously scheduled reboot.Set switch reset time cancel . A version of the image ships with the switch. you must specify where it should be placed: either into image1. This feature is particularly helpful if the user needs to perform switch upgrades during off-peak hours. called image1 and image2. called boot. As new versions of the image are released. or boot. When you download new software. Upgrading the software image on your switch requires the following: „ „ „ Loading the new image onto a TFTP server on your network Downloading the new image from the TFTP server to your switch Selecting the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is reset Downloading New Software to Your Switch The switch can store up to two different software images.0 Command Reference Scheduled Reboot of the Switch This feature allows the switch administrator to schedule a reboot to occur at a particular time in future. as well as boot software.Display current switch reset schedule Updating the Switch Software Image The switch software image is the executable code running on the Alteon Application Switch.Cancel pending switch reset cur .Alteon OS 21. image2. you can upgrade the software running on your switch. For example. You can set the reboot time. and check the time of the currently set reboot schedule with the help of the following sub-menu: /boot/sched Scheduled Reboot Menu [Boot Schedule Menu] set . and comes pre-installed on the device. you would probably load the new image software into image2. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image (stored in image1).

Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-E. At the Boot Options# prompt.Alteon OS 21. However. Enter the hostname or IP address of the TFTP server. When the above requirements are met. note that you can override this setting with the option provided to these operational commands. 1. Enter the name of the new software file on the server. See “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 258). as described below. However. Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> 4. Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> The exact form of the name will vary by TFTP server. you will need the following: „ „ „ „ The image or boot software loaded on a TFTP server on your network The hostname or IP address of the TFTP server The name of the new software image or boot file Setup the TFTP option (/cfg/sys/mgmt/tftp) for the TFTP connection. enter: Boot Options# gtimg 2. October 2003 „ 357 .0 Command Reference To download a new software to your switch. use the following procedure to download the new software to your switch. You should next select a software image to run. the file location is normally relative to the TFTP directory (usually /tftpboot). Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced: Enter name of switch software image to be replaced ["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image> 3. NOTE – The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. This sets the default option for the gtimg and ptimg commands. 5. The system prompts you to confirm your request.

The system prompts you for information. enter: Boot Options# ptimg 2. Enter the desired image: Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded ["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image> <hostname or server-IP-addr> <server-file- name> 3. The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset. Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot. and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset.0 Command Reference Selecting a Software Image to Run You can select which software image (image1 or image2) you want to run in switch memory for the next reboot. 1. Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the TFTP server: Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> 358 „ Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-E. At the Boot Options# prompt. Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]: Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch You can upload a software image from the switch to a TFTP server. 1. enter: Boot Options# image 2. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21. At the Boot Options# prompt. Enter the name or the IP address of the TFTP server: Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> 4.

7 Upload will transfer image2 (1889411 bytes) to file "test" on TFTP server 192. October 2003 „ 359 .1. Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is reset: 1. Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use: The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset. and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset. The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered. your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block.2. enter: Boot Options# conf 2. At the Boot Options# prompt. To have the file uploaded. Confirm upload operation [y/n]: y Selecting a Configuration Block When you make configuration changes to the Alteon Application Switch. The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block. image2 currently contains Software Version 20. you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset.0. Under certain circumstances. This holds the default configuration set by the factory when your Alteon Application Switch was manufactured. When you perform the save command.1.1.0 Command Reference 5. This can be useful when a custom-configured Alteon Application Switch is moved to a network environment where it will be re configured for a different purpose. Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]: Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-E. enter Y. There is also a factory configuration block. it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default.Alteon OS 21.

Alteon OS 21. This process can be lengthy. enter: >> Boot Options# reset You are prompted to confirm your request. at the Boot Options# prompt. To reset the switch. NOTE – Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Protocol to restart.0 Command Reference Resetting the Switch You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur. October 2003 . 360 „ Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-E. depending on the topology of your network.

It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting.Debugging Menu arp .IP Route Manipulation Menu uudmp . [Maintenance Menu] sys . „ „ 361 315393-E. causes the switch to dump state information to flash memory. The panic option.tftp put FLASH dump to tftp server cldmp . found in the Maintenance Menu. The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot the switch if the switch software freezes. The switch administrator enters the switch reset key combination on a device that is attached to the console port. The watchdog timer forces a switch reset. The switch reset key combination is <Shift><Ctrl><->.Dump state information to FLASH and reboot tsdmp . October 2003 .Tech support dump Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the Alteon Application Switch after any one of the following occurs: „ The switch administrator forces a switch panic.ARP Cache Manipulation Menu route .Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu debug .System Maintenance Menu fdb . /maint Maintenance Menu NOTE – To use the Maintenance Menu.Clear FLASH dump panic . you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.Uuencode FLASH dump ptdmp . and then causes the switch to reboot.CHAPTER 10 The Maintenance Menu The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database information.

see page 367. see page 369. uudmp Displays dump information in uuencoded format. arp Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu. fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu. To view menu options. see page 366. For details. 362 „ Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E. see page 369.0 Command Reference „ The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot. Table 10-1 Maintenance Menu Options (/maint) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Maintenance Menu. see page 363. see page 368. For details. ptdmp hostname filename [-mgmt| -data] Saves the system dump information via TFTP. panic Dumps MP information to FLASH and reboots.Alteon OS 21. debug Displays the Debugging Menu. route Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu. For details. see page 363. and send it to Nortel Networks Tech Support for debugging purposes. cldmp Clears dump information from flash memory. For details. see page 365. To view menu options. tsdmp Dumps all Alteon Application Switch information. statistics. October 2003 . To view menu options. To view menu options.You can log the tsdump output into a file. see page 368. To view menu options. and configuration.

Show FDB entries for a single VLAN refpt .Show all FDB entries del . /maint/fdb Forwarding Database Options [FDB Manipulation Menu] find .0 Command Reference /maint/sys System Maintenance Options This menu is reserved for use by Nortel Networks Customer Support group.Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan .Set NVRAM flag word Table 10-2 System Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/sys) Command Syntax and Usage flags <new NVRAM flags word as 0xXXXXXXXX> This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Tech support group.Delete an FDB entry clear . Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E.Show FDB entries referenced by a single port dump . This is helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions. October 2003 „ 363 .Alteon OS 21.Show FDB entries for a single port trunk . The options are used to perform system debugging.Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port . [System Maintenance Menu] flags .Clear entire FDB The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database.

Enter the MAC address using the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format (such as 08:00:20:12:34:56) or xxxxxxxxxxxx format (such as 080020123456). port <port number. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays all FDB entries reference by a single port. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. trunk <trunk number (1-12)> Displays all FDB entries for the specified trunk group. 0 for unknown>> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. Use “0” for unknown port number. see page 61. clear Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory. del <MAC address> [<VLAN number>] Removes a single FDB entry. For details.Alteon OS 21. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. 364 „ Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. October 2003 .0 Command Reference Table 10-3 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address.

The output from these commands can be interpreted by the Nortel Networks Customer Support division. Displays all SP trace buffers. Table 10-4 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug) Command Syntax and Usage tbuf Displays the Management Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 25. the MP trace buffer and SP trace buffers are saved into the snap trace buffer area.Show MP snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer sptb . The buffer information is displayed after the header.Alteon OS 21. 2001. sptb <port number (1-4)> Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. This buffer contains information traced at the time that a reset occurred. clrcfg Deletes all flash configuration blocks. mask: 0x2ffdf748 The buffer information is displayed after the header.Clear all flash configs The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding switch operation. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30. spall Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. mask: 0x00800008. October 2003 „ 365 .Show MP trace buffer snap . snap Displays the Management Processor snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer.0 Command Reference /maint/debug Debugging Options [Miscellaneous Debug Menu] tbuf . 2002. 2002. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30. Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E. mask: 0x00800008 The buffer information is displayed after the header.Show SP trace buffer spall .Show All SP trace buffers clrcfg . You can view the following information using the debug menu: „ „ „ Events traced by the Management Processor (MP) Events traced by the Switch Processor (SP) Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs If the switch resets for any reason.

----.80.Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt .101)> Shows a single ARP entry by IP address.--------------47.81 00:e0:81:24:ef:3c 1 1 empty 47.Clear ARP cache addr . port <port number> Displays ARP entries on a single port. clear Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory.169 00:04:75:db:1c:1a 1 1 empty 366 „ Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E.Show ARP entries on a single port vlan .1 00:e0:16:7c:28:82 1 1 empty 47. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN.4. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Shows all ARP entries referenced by a single port.Show all ARP entries clear .16.----------------. See page 366 for a sample output.----.Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump . October 2003 . 192.---.Show a single ARP entry by IP address port .80. addr Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests.80. dump Shows all ARP entries. /maint/arp/port <port number> ARP Entries on a Single Port IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------.Alteon OS 21.17.16.Show ARP address list Table 10-5 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as.0 Command Reference /maint/arp ARP Cache Options [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find .17.

17. NOTE – To display all routes. refpt. vlan. or a portion according to one of the options listed on the menu above (find.Show a single route by destination IP address gw .101)> Shows a single route by destination IP address.Show routes to a single gateway type . October 2003 „ 367 .Clear route table Table 10-6 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as.0 Command Reference NOTE – To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch. 192. /maint/route IP Route Manipulation [IP Routing Menu] find . Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E. For a description of IP routing types.Show routes of a single tag if .4. you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page 68. gw <default gateway address (such as.17. For a description of IP routing tags. port.Show routes of a single type tag .4.Show all routes clear .Alteon OS 21. dump).Show routes on a single interface dump . clear Clears the route table from switch memory. see Table 4-9 on page 68 tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Shows routes of a single tag. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Shows routes of a single type. see Table 4-10 on page 69 if <interface number (1-256)> Shows routes on a single interface. 192. dump Shows all routes.44)> Shows routes to a default gateway. you can also refer to “ARP Information” on page 69.

0 Command Reference /maint/uudmp Uuencode Flash Dump Using this command. You can then contact Nortel Networks Customer Support for help analyzing the information. The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data. October 2003 . The command does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory.300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file. see page 369. at the Maintenance# prompt. enter: Maintenance# ptdmp <server> <filename> [-mgmt| -data] Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname. captured to a file. NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system. dump information can be read multiple times. If you want to capture dump information to a file. you must manually clear the dump region. the uudmp command will cause approximately 23. the following appears: No FLASH dump available. To access dump information. and must be writable (set with proper permission. enter: Maintenance# uudmp The dump information is displayed on your screen and. For more information on clearing the dump region. the specified ptdmp file must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command. In order for any subsequent dump information to be written to flash memory. Using the uudmp command. and not locked by any application). set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmp command. This will ensure that you do not lose any information. If the dump region is empty. /maint/ptdmp <server> <filename> TFTP System Dump Put Use this command to put (save) the system dump to a TFTP server. NOTE – Dump information is not cleared automatically. To save dump information via TFTP.Alteon OS 21. at the Maintenance# prompt. This format makes it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters. if you have configured your communication software to do so. 368 „ Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E. and filename is the target dump file. Once entered. dump information is presented in uuencoded format.

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/maint/cldmp Clearing Dump Information
To clear dump information from flash memory, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# cldmp

The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message:
FLASH dump region cleared.

If the flash dump region is already clear, the switch displays the following message:
FLASH dump region is already clear.

/maint/panic Panic Command
The panic command causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash memory and automatically reboot. To select panic, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
>> Maintenance# panic A FLASH dump already exists. Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot [y/n]:

Enter y to confirm the command:
Confirm dump and reboot [y/n]: y

The following messages are displayed:
Loading Image:.......... Alteon Application Switch 2424 Rebooted because of Software PANIC. Booting complete 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003: Version 20.2.7 from FLASH image1, active config block. Jan 9 19:15:32 NOTICE system: link up on port 25 Enter password:

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

369

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Unscheduled System Dumps
If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory, the following message is displayed when you log on to the switch:
Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. The dump was saved at 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003. Use /maint/uudmp to extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to clear the FLASH region. The region must be cleared before another dump can be saved.

370

„

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
315393-E, October 2003

APPENDIX A

Alteon OS Syslog Messages
The following syntax is used when outputting syslog messages: <Time stamp><Log Label>Web OS<Thread ID>:<Message> where „ <Timestamp> The time of the message event is displayed in month day hour:minute:second format. For example: Aug 19 14:20:30 „ <Log Label> The following types of log messages are recorded: LOG_EMERG, LOG_ALERT, LOG_CRIT, LOG_ERR, LOG_WARNING, LOG_NOTICE, LOG_INFO, and LOG_DEBUG „ <Thread ID> This is the software thread that reports the log message. The following thread IDs are recorded: stp, ip, slb, console, telnet, vrrp, system, web server, ssh, and bgp „ <Message>: The log message

Following is a list of potential syslog messages. To keep this list as short as possible, only <Thread ID> and <Message> are shown. The messages are sorted by <Log Label>. Where the <Thread ID> is listed as mgmt, one of the following may be shown: console, telnet, web server, or ssh.

LOG_WARNING
FILTER “filter <filter number> fired on port <port number>, <source IP address> -> <destination IP address>, [<ICMP type>], [<IP protocol>], [<layer-4 ports>], [<TCP f1ags>]”

371
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

LOG_ALERT
stp: IP vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: gslb: gslb: gslb: gslb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: bgp: vrrp: vrrp: dps: dps: syn_atk tcplim own BPDU received from port <port_id> cannot contact default gateway <ip_address> received errored advertisement from <ip_address> received incorrect password from <ip_address> received incorrect addresses from <ip_address> received incorrect advertisement interval <seconds> from <ip_address> cannot contact real server <ip_address> real server <ip_address> has reached maximum connections received update from <ip_address> for unknown remote server <ip_address> received update from <ip_address> for unknown virtual service received update for unknown remote server <ip_address> from <ip_address> received update for unknown service <ip_address:service> cannot contact real service <ip_address:real_port> real server failure threshold (<threshold>) has been reach for group <group_id> real server <ip_address> disabled through configuration Virtual Service Pool full. gSvcPool=MAX_SERVICES notification (<reason>) received from <BGP peer ip_address> session with <BGP peer ip_address> failed (<reason>) Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> was blocked hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes manual hold down: <ip_address> SYN attack detected: <count> new half-open sessions per se cond hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes

372

„

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

LOG_CRIT
SYSTEM: temperature at sensor <sensor_id> exceeded threshold SYSTEM: internal power supply failed SYSTEM: redundant power supply failed SYSTEM: fan failure detected SSH can’t allocate memory in load_MP_INT

LOG_ERR
mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ntp: ntp: isd: stp: stp: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: PANIC at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> VERIFY at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> ASSERT at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> cannot contact NTP server <ip_address> unable to listen to NTP port unable to listen to BOOTP_SERVER_PORT port Error: Error writing STG config to FLASH Error: Error writing config to FLASH Apply not done Save not done “ <““apply””|““save””> is issued by another user. Try later” Error: Error writing %s config to FLASH New Path Cost for Port <port_id> is invalid PVID <vlan_id> for port <port_id> is not created RADIUS secret must be 1-32 characters long Please configure primary RADIUS server address STP changes can't be applied since STP is OFF Switch reset is required to turn STP on/off Trunk group <trunk_id> contains ports with different PVIDs

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
315393-E, October 2003

„

373

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

LOG_ERR (Continued)
cli: cli: cli: cli: Trunk group <trunk_id> has more than <max_trunk_ports> ports Trunk group <trunk_id> contains no ports but is enabled Not all ports in trunk group <trunk_id> are in VLAN <vlan_id> Trunk groups <trunk_id> and <trunk_id> can not share the same port

port_mirr: Port Mirroring changes are not applied cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Broadcast address for IP interface <interface_id> is invalid IP Interfaces <interface_id> and <interface_id> are on the same subnet Multiple static routes have same destination Virtual router <vr_id> must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must be enabled when hotstandby is enabled At least one virtual router must be enabled when group is enabled Virtual router group must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must have preemption enabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router <vr_id> must have an IP address Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same VRID and VLAN as <vlan_id> Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same IP address as <ip_address> Virtual router <vr_id> corresponding virtual server <server_id> is not enabled Hot-standby must be enabled when a virtual router has a PIP address Virtual router <vr_id> IP interface should be <interface_id> Enabled real server <server_id> has no IP address Real server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Real server <server_id> (Backup for <server_id>) is not enabled Real server <server_id> has same IP address as virtual server <server_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as real server <server_id> Real server group <group_id> cannot backup itself Real server <server_id> cannot be added to same group

374

„

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

LOG_ERR (Continued)
cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Enabled virtual server <server_id> has no IP address Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> with same IP address must support same layr3 configuration Real server <server_id> cannot be backup server for both real server <server_id> and group <group_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address and vport as virtual server <server_id> RS <server_id> can’t exist for VS <server_id> vport <virtual_port> Switch port <port_id> has same proxy IP address as port <port_id> Switch port <port_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> A hot-standby port cannot also be an inter-switch port There must be at least one inter-switch port if any hot-standby port exist “With VMA, ports 1-8 must all have a PIP if any one does” Client bindings are not supported with proxy IP addresses DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtual server to support FTP parsing Real server <server_id> and group %u cannot both have backups configured Virtual server <server_id> : port mapping but layer3 bindings Extracting length has to set to 8 or 16 for cookie rewrite mode DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtural server <server_id> to support URL parsing Port filtering must be disabled on port <port_id> in order to support cookie based persistence for virtual server <server_id> Virtual server <server_id>: port mapping but Direct Access Mode Virtual server %lu: support nonat IP but not layer 3 bindings Virtual servers: all that support IP must use same group Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> that include the same real server <server_id> cannot map the same real port or balance UDP Virtual server <server_id>: UDP service <virtual_port> with out-of-range port number

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
315393-E, October 2003

„

375

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

LOG_ERR (Continued)
cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Switch cannot support more than <MAX_VIRT_SERVICES> virtual services Switch cannot support more than <MAX_SMT> real services Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must have same L4 config Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must all have a PIP DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for ports <port_id> in order to do URL based redirection “Two services have same hostname, <host_name>.<domain_name>” Direct access mode is not supported with default gateway load balancing SLB Radius secret must be 16 characters long Dynamic NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> must have same smask and dmask NAT filter <filter_id> cannot have port ranges NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes VIP <server_id> NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes RIP <server_id> Redirection filter <filter_id> must be cached Filter with L4 ports configured <port_id> must have IP protocol configured “For Global SLB, Web server must be moved from TCP port 80” Remote site <site_id> does not have a primary IP address Primary and secondary remote site <site_id> switches must differ Remote sites <site_id> and <site_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and real server <server_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and virtual server <server_id> must use different addresses Only <MAX_SLB_SITES> remote servers are allowed per group Only <MAX_SLB_SERVICES> remote services are supported Enabled external lookup IP address has no IP address domain name must be configured

376

„

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21. <host_name>.0 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Network <static_network_id> has no VIP address duplicate default entry BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> must have an IP address BGP peers <bgp_peer_id> and <bgp_peer_id> have same address BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> have same address as IP interface <ip_interface_id> BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> IP interface <ip_interface_id> is not enabled Filter with ICMP types configured (<icmp_type>) must have IP protocol configure to ICMP “Two services have same hostname.<domain_name>” Loadbalance string must be added to real server <server_id> in order to enable exclusionary string matching intrval input value must be in the range [0-24] unapplied changes reverted unsaved changes reverted Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output cfg_sync_tx_putsn: ABORTED Synchronization TX Error Synchronization TX connection RESET Synchronization TX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization TX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization TX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization RX connection RESET Synchronization RX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization RX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization RX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization connection RCLOSE by peer Synchronization connection RCLOSE before RX Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-E. October 2003 „ 377 .

Resuming Console thread “<""apply""|""save""> is issued by another user.0 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Synchronization connection early RCLOSE in RX Synchronization connection Wait-For-Close Timeout Synchronization connection Transmit Timeout Synchronization Receive Timeout Synchronization Receive UNKNOWN Timeout Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync Sync receive in progress … cannot start Sync Sync already in progress … cannot start Sync Config Sync route find error Config Sync tcp_open error Config Synchronization Timeout .peer:%s config:%s Sync Password Failed-Bad Password Sync receive already in progress … cannot start Sync receive Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync receive 378 „ Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-E. Try later” new configuration did not validate (rc = ) new configuration did not apply (rc = ) new configuration did not save (rc = ) Sync config apply error Restoring Current Config Sync rx tcp open error Sync Version/Password Failed-No Version/Password Line Sync Version Failed .Alteon OS 21. October 2003 .

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE system: system: system: system: system: system: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: internal power supply ok redundant power supply present and ok temperature ok fan ok rebooted <last_reset_information> rebooted <last_reset_information> administrator logged in boot config block changed boot image changed switch reset from CLI syslog host changed to <ip_address> syslog host changed to this host second syslog host changed to <ip_address> second syslog host changed to this host Next boot will use active config block user password changed SLB operator password changed L4 operator password changed operator password changed SLB administrator password changed L4 administrator password changed administrator password changed scp <login_level> login “scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">” RADIUS server timeouts Failed login attempt via TELNET from host %s PASSWORD FIX-UP MODE IN USE <login_level> login on Console Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-E. October 2003 „ 379 .

October 2003 .0 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE (Continued) mgmt: mgmt: “<login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console” PANIC command from CLI port_mirr: “port mirroring is <""enabled""|""disabled"">” vlan: mgmt: mgmt: IP IP vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: Default VLAN can not be deleted <login_level> login from host <ip_address> “<login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from” “default gateway <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled"">” default gateway <ip_address> operational virtual router <ip_address> is now master virtual router <ip_address> is now backup “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""diabled""> for real server <server_id>” “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “backup group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group group_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server <server_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “overflow group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” real server <ip_address> operational real service <ip_address:real_port> operational No services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> Services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> session established with <BGP_peer_ip_address> 380 „ Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-E.Alteon OS 21.

0 Command Reference LOG_INFO SYSTEM: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: ssh: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: bootp response from <ip_address> new configuration applied new configuration saved unsaved changes reverted Could not revert unsaved changes " <image1|image2> downloaded from host <ip_address>.Alteon OS 21. file <file_name> <software_version>" serial EEPROM downloaded from host <ip_address> file <file_name> scp <login_level> login " scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">" <login_level> login on Console " <login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console" <login_level> login from host <ip_address> " <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Telnet/SSH. October 2003 „ 381 ." server key autogen starts server key autogen completes server key autogen timer timeouts new synch configuration applied new synch configuration saved Synchronizing from <host_name> Synchronizing to <host_name> Config Synchronization Transmit Successful Config Synchronization Receive Successful new configuration VALIDATED Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-E.

0 Command Reference 382 „ Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 .

APPENDIX B Alteon OS SNMP Agent The Alteon OS SNMP agent supports SNMP Version 1. Address Translation. Alteon MIBs are registered as Vendor 1872.mib cheetahLayer7. Interface.mib -. Security is provided through SNMP community strings.Textual Convention MIB s5emt104. The agent will send the SNMP Trap to the specified hosts when appropriate. The community string can be modified only through the Command Line Interface (CLI).mib -.mib -.mib Added support for the ethernet multi-segment autotopology MIB. ICMP.Ethernet Multi segment Autotopology MIB Users may specify up to two trap hosts for receiving SNMP Traps. October 2003 .mib cheetahLayer4. UDP. Traps will not be sent if there is no host specified. SNMP Groups) RFC 1573 .mib cheetahNetwork.MIB II (System.mib cheetahTrap. which requires the following SynOptics MIBS: „ „ „ „ synro193. The default community strings are “public” for SNMP GET operation and “private” for SNMP SET operation.SynOptics Registration MIB s5tcs112.mib cheetahBwm. Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following standard MIBs: „ „ RFC 1213 .mib cheetahSwitch. Detailed SNMP MIBs and trap definitions of the Alteon OS SNMP agent can be found in the following enterprise MIB documents: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ Altroot.mib cheetahPhysical.MIB II Extension (IFX table) 383 315393-E. IP.mib -. TCP.SynOptics Root MIB s5roo117.

0 Command Reference „ „ „ „ „ RFC 1643 . Event Groups) RFC 1850 for OSPF RFC 1657 for BGP Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following generic traps as defined in RFC 1215: „ „ „ „ „ ColdStart WarmStart LinkDown LinkUp AuthenticationFailure The SNMP agent also supports two Spanning Tree traps as defined in RFC 1493: „ „ NewRoot TopologyChange The following are the enterprise SNMP traps supported in Alteon OS: Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwDefGwUp altSwDefGwDown altSwDefGwInService altSwDefGwNotInService altSwSlbRealServerUp altSwSlbRealServerDown altSwSlbRealServerMaxConnReached altSwSlbBkupRealServerAct altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeact Signifies that the default gateway is alive.Alteon OS 21.RMON MIB (Statistics.EtherLike MIB RFC 1493 . October 2003 . History. Alarm. Signifies that the default gateway is down.Bridge MIB RFC 1757 . Signifies that the default gateway is up and in service Signifies that the default gateway is alive but not in service Signifies that the real server is up and operational Signifies that the real server is down and out of service Signifies that the real server has reached maximum connections Signifies that the backup real server is activated due to availablity of the primary real server Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is available 384 „ Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-E.

altSwTempExceedThreshold Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-E. October 2003 „ 385 .Alteon OS 21. Implementation of this trap is optional. altSwVrrpAuthFailure altSwLoginFailure altSwSlbSynAttack altSwTcpHoldDown A altSwSlbSynAttack trap signifies that a SYN attack has been detected.0 Command Reference Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwSlbBkupRealServerActOverflow altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeactOverflow altSwfltFilterFired altSwSlbRealServerServiceUp altSwSlbRealServerServiceDown altSwVrrpNewMaster altSwVrrpNewBackup Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is overflowed Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is out from overflow situation Signifies that the packet received on a switch port matches the filter rule Signifies that the service port of the real server is up and operational Signifies that the service port of the real server is down and out of service The newMaster trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to ’Master’ state. A altSwLoginFailure trap signifies that someone failed to enter a valid username/password combination. A altSwTcpHoldDown trap signifies that new TCP connection requests from a particular client will be blocked for a pre-determined amount of time since the rate of new TCP connections from that client has reached a pre-determined threshold. A vrrpAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet has been received from a router whose authentication key or authentication type conflicts with this router’s authentication key or authentication type. A altSwTempExceedThreshold trap signifies that the switch temperature has exceeded maximum safety limits. The newBackup trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to ’Backup’ state.

0 Command Reference 386 „ Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 .

PPCBoot 2. Using the serial cable. 4. To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 387 315393-E. This procedure requires the following: „ „ „ A computer running terminal emulation software A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics) A binary switch firmware image (not the tftp file used for TFTP download) Use the following procedure to perform a serial upgrade. Hold the <Shift> key down and hit D repeatedly until the following message appears: Alteon Application Switch .APPENDIX C Performing a Serial Download You can perform a serial download of the new Alteon Application Switch software if you are upgrading Alteon OS directly from any image. Power on the switch. 3. 1. October 2003 . Start hyper terminal (part of Microsoft Windows) and set the following parameters: Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None 2. connect the Console port of an Alteon Application Switch to the serial port of your PC that supports XModem/1K XModem.2.

.PPCBoot 2. NOTE – Although slower. you will see: CCCC.. "21. To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total bytes transferred: 0x4ff400 Extracting images.2. 6.0. Reconfigure your terminal emulation software with the following parameters (only after you see the message displayed in step 4). Make sure that the new binary firmware file is available on the computer. the switch be inoperable. otherwise. XMODEM will work too if you choose not to use 1K MODEM.. 9. wait for a few seconds and power the switch on. The switch will boot with the new software load.0 Command Reference 5.0. Select <Transfer-Send File> and choose the following: file: For example. 8. This file can be downloaded from the CD that is shipped with the switch. Press <Enter> on the key board of the PC that is connected to the console port of the switch.. protocol: 1K XMODEM It will take about 15 minutes for the transfer to complete. Do *NOT* power cycle the switch Updating flash.img" (Or the file previously downloaded to the computer) 7.Alteon OS 21.. CAUTION—Do not power off the switch until you see the message: “Change your baud rate to 9600 bps and power cycle switch”. You should see the following sample log on your screen: Alteon Application Switch .. October 2003 . When the Console Port is successfully communicating with the PC.0_Serial.: Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 115200 8 None 1 None NOTE – You can perform serial downloads at 57600 baud rate by pressing Ctrl f or at 115200 baud rate by pressing Ctrl d. ################################################################# Change your baudrate to 9600 bps and power cycle the switch ! 388 „ Appendix C: Performing a Serial Download 315393-E. Power off the switch.

or a filter. The destination port (application socket: for example. TCP. A higher number will win out for master designation. The protocol of a frame. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 254. preemption will cause a Virtual Router that has a lower priority to go into backup should a peer Virtual Router start advertising with a higher priority. half NAT is when the destination IP or source IP address is changed from one address to another. OSPF.Glossary DIP (Destination IP Address) Dport (Destination Port) NAT (Network Address Translation) The destination IP address of a frame. network address translation can be said to have taken place. and so on. Full NAT is when both addresses are changed from one address to another. No NAT is when neither source nor destination IP addresses are translated. Preemption Priority Proto (Protocol) Real Server Group 389 315393-E. the value given to a Virtual Router to determine its ranking with its peer(s). UDP. Can be any value represented by a 8-bit value in the IP header adherent to the IP specification (for example. Virtual server-based load balancing uses half NAT by design. In VRRP. October 2003 . because it translates the destination IP address from the Virtual Server IP address.) A group of real servers that are associated with a Virtual Server IP address. to that of one of the real servers. Default is 100. In general. ICMP. In VRRP. http-80/https-443/DNS-53) Any time an IP address is changed from one source IP or destination IP address to another address.

Protocol. a method to increase the priority of a virtual router and thus master designation (with preemption enabled). VIP (Virtual Server IP Address) VIR (Virtual Interface Router) 390 „ Glossary 315393-E. SPort/Range or DPort/Range. Deny. The action on a filter can be Allow. In redirection-based load balancing. “Transparently” means that requests are not specifically destined for a Virtual Server IP address that the switch owns. In VRRP. requests are transparently intercepted and “redirected” to a server group. An IP addresses that the switch load balances to when requests are made to a Virtual Server IP address (VIP). the destination IP address is not translated to that of one of the real servers. RIP (Real Server) SIP (Source IP Address) SPort (Source Port) Tracking The source port (application socket: for example. Tracking can be very valuable in an active/active configuration. HTTP-80/HTTPS-443/DNS-53).0 Command Reference Redirection or Filter-Based Load Balancing A type of load balancing that operates differently from virtual server-based load balancing. redirection-based load balancing is designed to load balance devices that normally operate transparently in your network—such as a firewall. You can track the following: „ Vrs: Virtual Routers in Master Mode (increments priority by 2 for each) „ Ifs: Active IP interfaces on the Alteon Application Switch (increments priority by 2 for each) „ Ports: Active ports on the same VLAN (increments priority by 2 for each) „ l4pts: Active Layer 4 Ports. client or server designation (increments priority by 2 for each „ reals: healthy real servers (increments by 2 for each healthy real server) „ hsrp: HSRP announcements heard on a client designated port (increments by 10 for each) An IP address that the switch owns and uses to load balance particular service requests (like HTTP) to other servers.Alteon OS 21. DIP/Range (via netmask). October 2003 . spam filter. Therefore. Redirect to a Server Group. With this type of load balancing. A VRRP address that is an IP interface address shared between two or more virtual routers. or transparent Web cache. This filter intercepts traffic based on certain IP header criteria and load balances it. or NAT (translation of either the source IP or destination IP address). The source IP address of a frame. Instead. a filter is configured in the switch. Real Server IP Address. Filters can be configured to filter on the SIP/Range (via netmask).

If there is more than one VLAN defined on the Alteon Application Switch. The reason for both of these protocols is so devices have a next hop or default gateway that is always available.0 Command Reference Virtual Router A shared address between two devices utilizing VRRP.18. and the ARP tables in the devices around them would have two ARP entries with the same IP address but different MAC addresses. are load balanced to a real server contained in the group associated with the VIP.0. then the VRID number needs to be identical on both switches so each virtual router on each switch knows whom to share with. Frames come to the switch destined for the VIP. refer to RFC 2338. since the packet would have the DIP of the VIP and not that of the server (RIP). In VRRP. by the switch. Should the master stop advertising. forcing the packet up to Layer 3. If you have a VRRP address that two switches are sharing. The master is always advertising via the broadcasts. and advertisements. Network address translation is done back and forth. If the frames were not half NAT’ed to the address of one of the RIPs. This is one of the IP interfaces that the switch is assigned. Virtual Server Load Balancing VRID (Virtual Router Identifier) VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol) VSR (Virtual Server Router) Glossary 315393-E. as well as IP interfaces. The switch announces this change in ownership to the devices around it by way of a Gratuitous ARP. A VRRP address that is a shared Virtual Server IP address.0. as defined in RFC 2338. The switches must be able to share Virtual Server IP addresses. One virtual router is associated with an IP interface. All IP interfaces on the Alteon Application Switch must be in a VLAN. as requests come and go. and forwards the frame to the server for which it is now destined. Classic load balancing. Requests destined for a Virtual Server IP address (VIP). If they didn’t. October 2003 „ 391 . The VRRP MAC address as defined in the RFC is 00-00-5E-00-01-{VRID}. VSR is Alteon WebSystems’ proprietary extension to the VRRP specification. The backup switch is always listening for the broadcasts. Two or more devices sharing an IP interface are either advertising or listening for advertisements. the two switches would fight for ownership of the Virtual Server IP address. These advertisements are sent via a broadcast message to an address such as 224. If the backup switch didn’t do the Gratuitous ARP the Layer 2 devices attached to the switch would not know that the MAC address had moved in the network. which is owned by the switch. one switch is considered the master and the other the backup. For a more detailed description. updates the relevant checksums. a value between 1 and 255 that is used by each virtual router to create its MAC address and identify its peer for which it is sharing this VRRP address. With VRRP. the backup will take over ownership of the VRRP IP and MAC addresses as defined by the specification. A protocol that acts very similarly to Cisco’s proprietary HSRP address sharing protocol. a server would receive the frame that was destined for it’s MAC address.Alteon OS 21. The switch then replaces the VIP and with one of the real server IP addresses (RIP’s). then the VRRP broadcasts will only be sent out on the VLAN of which the associated IP interface is a member. This process of replacing the destination IP (VIP) with one of the real server addresses is called half NAT. The server would then drop the frame.

Alteon OS 21. October 2003 .0 Command Reference 392 „ Glossary 315393-E.

.. 196 advertisement of virtual IP addresses .... 50 access control system ............................................. 27 B backup SLB real server group option .......... 178............................ 213 bandwidth management contract precedence value ... 338 (SLB real server group option) content ......................... 271 active switch configuration gtcfg ....................................................................................................... 282 restoring .................. 83 filters ................. 33 autonomous system filter action ................................... 214 bandwidth management contract configuration ...................................................... 214 393 315393-E.......................... 239 Numerics 1K XModem . 63 application redirection ........................................ 177 applying configuration changes ... 17 admpw (system option) ............... 193 action (SLB filtering option) .... 204............... 292 apply (global command) ............................................................................................................................................ 69 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) address list ........................................................................ 212 contracts .................................................................. 359 active FTP SLB parsing statistics ................ 200............... 282 add SLB port option .................................................... 239 autonomous system filter path action .... 32 auto-negotiation .. 241 aging STP bridge option .......... 322 addr ARP entries................................................................................................................ 20 autoconfiguration duplex mode ................................... 282 active switch............. 201 A abbreviating commands (CLI) ............. 239 as .................................. 209 setup... 353 active configuration block ........................ 206...........................................................................................................Index Symbols (MD5) ............................................................ 282 ptcfg ............. 387 3000 series................ 32.......... 310 activating optional software ............................................................................ 221 STP information ................................................. 177 ASCII terminal ............. 24................... 271 active port VLAN ..... 359 backup server activations (SLB statistics) ............................ 239 aspath ........................................................................... 33 port speed....................... 292 / command ...................................................... 271 active Layer 4 processing .......... October 2003 ... 287...................... 366 administrator account ...................... 32 enable/disable on port ................................................... 285 within real server groups .............. 150 bandwidth management configuration ................................ 366 IP route tag ................................. 142 active IP interface .................. 293 backup configuration block ... 182.. 47 [ ]............................................................................................................................................................................ saving and loading configuration ....... 32 link..................... 32......................................................... 178.... 310 filter states..........................................................................................................................

............................................. 50 stacking ..............................................63 boot options menu .........................................................388 binding failure ............................................................................ 68 broadcast domains .........................................................................................................................................................................................................69 keep-alive time ............................251 in route ...352 bandwidth management policy configuration ........................................387 binary firmware image ........................................ 47 shortcuts .........220 Bridge Spanning-Tree parameters ....................................Alteon OS 21.................................................................................149 binding table .............69 configuration.............................................................................. 156 port ........152 banner (system option)... 50 tab completion ..180 baud rate console connection ..............................................215 bandwidth management statistics ........................... 155 contract statistics ...........................................215 reserve limit ....................253 IP route tag ........................................................... 27.....................................................................................................................................................................................215 over the limit TOS ........... 364 routing table ........255 remote autonomous system ....................... 367 clearing SLB statistics ..... 368 Cisco Ether Channel ....................................................... 45 commands abbreviations ............................................................................ 19 to 25......................................................252 peer configuration ........ 50 conventions used in this manual .................................................... 153 switch processor contract statistics .... See Bridge Protocol Data Unit..................................... 153 switch processor rate contract statistics ..... 222 clear ARP entries .220 broadcast IP route tag .........................................................................215 soft bandwidth limit ......................253 redistribution configuration ...... 47 Command-Line Interface (CLI) ......................... 369 FDB entry .............................................. bridge parameter menu.........................................................21 setup (enable/disable) ............................................................................... 366 dump information ............................................253 peer ............................... border router ........................259 Border Gateway Protocol .................353 BPDU...................................................................................... 69 IP route type ....................... 154 history statistics ....................................... 19 BWM contract rate statistics.......................253 router hops...................20 serial download ......................................................................251 eBGP ............................................................................... 50 394 „ Index 315393-E............................................ 17 global commands ...............0 Command Reference Bandwidth Management options operations-level options ...63 Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) ......................................................31 system option .............................251 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) operations-level options . for STP .................251 iBGP ............. 150 client traffic processing .............................. 36 Browser-Based Interface ................................................................. 388 BBI .....................................254 binary ............303 BLOCKING (port state).........63 STP transmission frequency ......387...........215 underlimit TOS ................................19 BGP configuration.... 224 broadcast IP address ............................................. 154 C capture dump information to a file....355 BOOTP ...215 hard bandwidth limit .....................................254 IP address....180 bootstrap protocol .............219 bridge priority ........... October 2003 .....................215 buffer limit ........................................................................................... 321 command (help) .......................................

.............................................................................................................................. 260 configuration block active ..... 295 peer site handoffs ................................................ 149 D date setup............ bandwidth management .......................... 21 connection timeout (Real Server Menu option) ...... 303 console port communication settings ...................... 71 diff (global) command........................... 177 setup ................................................................................................................... 63 disconnect idle timeout .. 359 factory .............. 222 counters.. 200................................................................... 180 daylight savings time ... 228 VLAN tagging .................... 202................... 311 direct (IP route type) ............... 233 save changes . 359 configuration menu ....................... 209 port mirroring ....... 240 connecting via console ...... 189 current bindings ... 177 Fast Ethernet .... 228 user password ............................ 275 default password .... 367 315393-E............................... 311 DNS statistics .... 150 CPU statistics ....................... 202 cost STP information ........................... 229 metrics ........................................................................ 205.................... 229 dump command .......................... 195 view changes.................... 162 CPU utilization . load balancing for .......... 211 port trunking ....Alteon OS 21........................................ 324 downloading software ........................................ 198.................................. 275 round robin.... 175 configuring routing information protocol ......................... 196 apply changes ............................................................................................................ 177 default gateway interval....................... viewing changes .................................. 387........................... 230 Layer 4 administrator password ............................ 24 delete FDB entry ....................................................................... for health checks .............. 32 link status .. for health checks ............................................ 364 deny (filtering) ........................................ 20 serial download settings .................................................................................... 208 VRRP ................... 359 selection ............................... 233 DISABLED (port state) ...... 20 connecting ........................ No Server Available (dropped frames) .............................. 388 content SLB real server group option ..... 213 copper ports ..... 198... 281 setup command ......................... 209 port link speed ......................................... 204 IP static route ................ 207 VLAN IP interface .......................................................................................................................................... 198......................... October 2003 Index „ 395 . 188.....0 Command Reference configuration administrator password ..... 150 designated port.................................................................................................... 203.. 281 switch IP address ..................................... 52......................... 203..... 202........................................... 200.............. 177 dip (destination IP address for filtering) ........... 356 dropped frames (No Server Available) counter ....................................... 361 default gateway information .......... 188 debugging ... 20 via Telnet.. 281 effect on Spanning-Tree Protocol ....... 150 dump configuration command .................. 324 dmask destination mask for filtering .................................... 30 system option ..................... 68 directed broadcasts....... 359 backup..................... 177 VLAN default (PVID) .................................................................... 202.................... 25 Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) setting update interval ................................................................................................................................ 209 Gigabit Ethernet ................................... 198 flow control ........................ 369 duplex mode......................................... .......................................... 63 STP port option ........................ 196 operating mode .... 204.......... 121 Domain Name System (DNS) health checks ................... 90 setup........................... 203................................................................. 56......... 66 interval............................................................. 229 default gateway IP address ...... 199................................... 292 contracts....................................................................... 206......................................................................................................................... 32 dynamic routes .... 361 state information ........................................ 281 maintenance .................. 222 route cache......... 162 cur (system option) ...................

.................................... 27 to 43 fixed IP route tag ..................................................... bridge port ...................................69 flag field................................................................................................... 136 global SLB statistics .................................................. 325 system option ...............................364 Forwarding Database Information Menu ..... 203.......... 294 layer information ..................363 forwarding state (FWD) ..387 EtherChannel as used with port trunking ...............................................................................................32 fwd (STP bridge option) ................................... 294 health checks.. 204 Gigabit Ethernet configuration.....................359 factory default configuration .... SLB .............200...................... 265... 265 VRRP priority increment value ............198 fastage ......................32........... 19 hprompt system option ........................ 193 G gig (Port Menu option) .... 274 Hot Standby Router VLAN (HSRV) use with VRRP . 32 hash metric ...... HTTP application health checks .................. 269 HP-OpenView ............. 336 Greenwich .144 full-duplex ........... 204 Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link ................................. 209 setup .. 310 retry..........................52........................................... 188 group .................. 339 SNMP .233 forwarding database (FDB) ........................... configuring ports for ................60 Forwarding Database Menu...............311 Final Steps........................ 82 parameters for most protocols .................................... 202......... 297 health check types........204 File Transfer Protocol ............................................................ 33 forwarding configuration IP forwarding configuration ............................................63 global SLB maintenance statistics .............. 64 FTP server health checks ..109 fiber optic ports ..... 90 configuring ..................... 25..................... See Hot Standby Router Protocol..........................134 filtered (denied) frames ..............................................Alteon OS 21........................................................................143 FTP SLB statistics dump..........198..................... 204 global commands ................................. 202.....................................................................150 filters IP address ranges ................. 229 script ............................................... 274 use with VRRP ....................................71 flow control ...222 F factory configuration block .... retries .................................................295 FTP SLB maintenance statistics .......361 delete entry ........................................ 206................................. October 2003 . 47 host routes ..................................................336 FDB statistics ..... 63............................ 63 help ........................................................................198 Fast Ethernet........38 first-time configuration ................ 28 Fast Ethernet Physical Link ....... 134 grace graceful real server failure ..................................... 229 IDSLB............................................................................ 188 Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) .. 193 http ............ 295 redirects (Global SLB option) .... 27.............................................................. 241 Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) use with VLAN-tagged environment ................................25........................................... 275 Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) priority increment value for L4 client ports .......... 180 HSRP.......................................................0 Command Reference E EMS................220 FwdDel (forward delay).......................................................................................................................................... 282 H half-duplex ...... 202...................... 272 VRRP priority increment value ......................................................................47 396 „ Index 315393-E......... 341 hello STP information ..................................................................................61....................... 272 hot-standby failover ..........................................Alteon EMS ........................ 288 default gateway interval...198........................................142 filter statistics .......................................................................................................... 133 gtcfg (TFTP load command) ............ HSRV....................................39 emulation software .... See Hot Standby Router Protocol.198....................... 295 redirection (rport)....................... 296... number of failed health checks ..................... 340 WAP .............................................................

.............................. 295 imask (IP address mask) ............ 229 filter ranges .................................................. configuring ........ 52...... 56................................... 297 licence certificate ..................... 257 directed broadcasts ...................................................................... 68 Information Trunk Group Information................ See IP subnets.. 70..................................................................................................... 51 Interface change stats .......... 363 switch location ....................................... 52...................... 311 IP interface .................. 115 interface statistics ...... 271 layer 7 SLB maintenance statistics ............ 294 IEEE standards 802.. 335 incorrect VIPs (statistic) .................. 218 image downloading .............................. 353.............. 62........................................... M MAC (media access control) address 53............................................................................................................................................................................................ 35 tag parameters ........... 224 I ICMP statistics ...... 35..................... 233 IP forwarding information ....... 228 IP interfaces ...... 90 port speed............................ 233 local route cache IP address ranges for............ 335 IP configuration via setup ..... 271 configuring address ................................................................ 21 315393-E.................. 235 IP port configuration ............................................................ 56.............................................................................................. 196 Layer 4 administrator account................. 66 IP route tag ........... 234 log syslog messages ................................................................................................................................................. 199............................. 358 IMAP server health checks ................... 234 Telnet ............ 181 logical segment................... 63 lmask (routing option) ............................................................................................................ 116 IP subnet mask ..................................................... 90 Link Status Information ......... 66 local (IP route type) ............... 121 idle timeout overview... selecting .............................. 68 information ........... 90 duplex mode ........................................ 68 local network for route caching ....................... 233 local networks for route caching ........ 35 local route cache ranges .......... 338 IP Route Manipulation Menu ........... 66 IP Information Menu .................... 60.......... 70 BOOTP .......................... 123 IP address ..... 90 linkt (SNMP option) ...... 150 indirect (IP route type) .................................... 149 incorrect Vports (dropped frames counter) ................................................................. 25 IDSLB health checks ............................................ 257 L l4apw (L4 administrator system option) ........ 209 link status.. 353 link speed............................................................0 Command Reference HTTP health checks on any port (aphttp) ................................. 66.............. 21 IP address mask for SLB ...................... 295.......................................... 228 configuring VLANs ..................................... 367 IP routing .................................... 21 configuring default gateway ............................................Alteon OS 21.................................. 24 Layer 4 processing active ................................................... 64 Information Menu .............. October 2003 Index „ 397 .................................................... 230 IP statistics . 35 IP forwarding .................... 66 lnet (routing option) ....................................... 35 ARP information ..... 356 software..... 69 priority increment value (ifs) for VRRP ....................................... 203.................. 353 license password .................... 79 IP interface ........................ 137 LDAP version ............. 274 IP network filter configuration ...........1d Spanning-Tree Protocol ............................ 139 layer 7 SLB string statistics ..... 192 LISTENING (port state) .................................................................................................................. 52 command ....... 228 active .................................... 338 LEARNING (port state) ...................................................................... 63 least connections (SLB Real Server metric) .............................. 138 layer7 redirection statistics ................................................................................................................ 35 IP subnets VLANs .................................................. 69 IP Static Route Menu ....................................

.......365 mmask IP address mask for SLB .....................................................................................................................297 minimum misses (SLB real server metric) ................... N nbr change statistics. 112 global .................................. October 2003 ............................................................................................. 247 configuration .............. 252 general .............64............................. 242....................17 martian IP route tag (filtered) ........................ 74................................... 297 Miscellaneous Debug Menu .................................................................. 241 ospf area index ......................................53 manual style conventions .150........................................................... 47 operating mode....... 93 activating .........................................0 Command Reference Main Menu ...................................................................46 Maintenance Menu .............................................................228 MaxAge (STP information) ..................................................................... See MAC address.................................................................................................... 203.........................................................................................19 non TCP/IP frames .... 200.......................... 353 operations-level BWM options . health parameter of a hello packet ............... multicast IP route type ...................................................... configuring ................................. 352 Operations-Level Port Options ............ 246 cost value of the host ....................................... 243 authentication key .........310 network management.......294....365 display MAC address .............................................................. 354 OSPF area types .......... SLB ..................... metric SLB real server group option........243 MD5 cryptographic authentication ..............292 metrics................ 293 MD5 authentication key ............................. 249 dead........................... See Management Processor...........159 MP.................336 mnet management traffic IP address for SLB ...............................................................................335 monitor port.......... 246 dead....69 IP route type (filtered out) ........ 349 operations-level SLB options ................. 209 operations menu ............................................................. 352 operations-level IP options ......................................................188 NTP synchronization ..361 Management Processor (MP).......................................................................220 O octet counters ....... declaring a silent router to be down .....................188 398 „ Index 315393-E..68 mask IP interface subnet address .........................45 Command-Line Interface (CLI) .................. 132 online help ..25 summary ...............114 Network Address Translation (NAT) filter action .......... 241 cost of the selected path .........................................68 multi-links between switches using port trunking... 351 optional software ............................................ 353 removing ................... 222 mxage (STP bridge option) .....149 notice .................................. 52...180 NTP server menu ........................... 347 operations-level BGP options .....Alteon OS 21.211 mp packet .................189 NTP time zone ................ 350 operations-level VRRP options ......................................... authentication parameter of a hello packet ................244 MD5 key ...........63 mcon (maximum connections) ..........................................................................................247 media access control............ 112 hello.................... 250 fixed routes ..... 248 export ......................................................................

.. 150 overflow servers ........ 242 interface .. 90 port speed ....................................................................................... 77 OSPF general .................. 287 PIP ............................ 52........................... 202......................................... 23 315393-E...................................................... October 2003 „ 399 ............... 244 stub area ....................... 69 type ........................................................................................ 74 OSPF Information Route Codes ................................................................................................................................................................. 247 virtual neighbor......................... 197 SLB state information .............Alteon OS 21..... router ID ... 76 OSPF Information ............ 242 MD5 authentication key....................... 303 ping ....................... 143 Password user access control ...... 61 port trunking description ..... 198 configuring Gigabit Ethernet (gig) ......... Port Menu configuration options .................................................................................. 244 transit delay ........................ 244 priority value of the switch interface...................................................... 202 configuring Fast Ethernet ...................................................... 289 Index P panic command . 240 POP3 server health checks......... 246 range number ............... 68 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics ........................................... 263................... 344........................................................................................ shortest path first .......... 244 summary range configuration ........................ 288 persistent bindings real server .............................. 90 auto-sense .............................. 270 priority (STP port option) ............................. 246 link state database ................................ 245 transit area ............................................................... 91 preemption assuming VRRP master routing authority .......................................................0 Command Reference 248 host entry configuration ... 204 port mirroring configuration ..... 24 L4 administrator account ................ 250 spf................................................. 345 poisoned reverse............... 243 Not-So-Stubby Area . 91 IP status .............................. 32 setup... 197 port flow control........................... 59............ 75 OSPF General Information ................................... 24 default ........................... 195 password administrator account .... 65 priority....... 24 VRRP authentication .. 222 VLAN ID...................... 63 RJ-45 ..................................... 32 port states UNK (unknown) ....................... 111 overflow server activations ........................... 369 switch (and Maintenance Menu option) .................................................................... 361 parameters tag .................. 242 route redistribution configuration ............................................... 248 OSPF Database Information ............... 83 STP port priority ................................................. 242 interface configuration ............... 264 virtual router ................................................................................................ 273 passwords ... 31 disabling (temporarily)........................... 52............... 187 proxies IP address translation ........................................ 270 priority virtual router .............. 152 port configuration ..................................... 242 redistribution menu ............................. 210 information .......... 24 user account ................................. 249 host routes .......................................................................................................... 222 prisrv primary radius server ....................................................................................................................... See flow control................................................. 78 OSPF statistics ................... 56........................... 66 membership of the VLAN ....... 244 virtual link ... 222 port trunking configuration ......................... as used with split horizon .................................................. 222 ports configuration .......... 242 virtual link configuration ................................................................................................... 48.............................................................. 211 Port number ................................................... 295 port bandwidth management switch processor statistics 153 switch port contract statistics menu........................................................................................................................................... 198...... 246 type .........

..................................................................... 354 round robin as used in gateway load balancing ................................................................361 restarting switch setup ............................................ 200............................................................................................ segments.. 287 400 „ Index 315393-E.........292 real server group statistics ...131 real server global SLB statistics ............ 297 route cache configuration ..... 20 serial download ............ 206..289 removing optional software ................................................. 240 rport SLB virtual server option .......................... 91 pwd .... 203..... 187 secsrv secondary radius server .........229 rip IP route tag ............ 210 redir (SLB filtering option) ................................................................................................................29 retries radius server .................................... See Routing Information Protocol......... 186 security VLANs............ 240 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ..........354 reset key combination .......... 345 ptcfg (TFTP save command) .......................................................296 RADIUS server menu .....52.......................................................................................................................Alteon OS 21............... 145 rx flow control ................................................................................... 33......................................................................................................................................................... October 2003 ......................................................................... 178 save command............. 209...........................................61 referenced port ......135 real server group options add ........48 R RADIUS server authentication ............................................... 118 router hops .............................................................344...........71 remote monitoring on the port (rmon) ............................................. 339 secret radius server ....................................................... 33 Rx/Tx statistics.......................... 369 receive flow control 32.187 read community string (SNMP option) .......................................................................... 113 Q quiet (screen display option).... 350 real server weights .................................................. 302 RTSP SLB statistics ..........................0 Command Reference proxy IP address (PIP) ..................... 32......................83 proxy IP address (PIP) configuration ...187 retry health checks for default gateway ................................................................................................................ 177 noback option ........................................................................................................274 SLB state information ..292 statistics .................................. serial cable ................... 240 version 1 parameters..............................................................135 real server group global SLB statistics ..... 240 poisoned reverse .......................................286 real servers backup ....................... 224 segmentation........................................282 PVID (port VLAN ID) ... 359 script health checks ..........................294 real server group SLB configuration.......................... See IP subnets........................... 290 operations-level options .................. See IP subnets............................ 275 roundrobin SLB Real Server metric ............................. S save (global command) ..191 real server statistics .........................293 priority increment value (reals) for VRRP ..... 233 route statistics ........................349 remote site servers ......... 339 scriptable health checks configuration .............................133 real server SLB configuration ..361..................48 rmkey ...............82 reboot ....... 240 split horizon ...................... 254 routing information protocol configuration ...... 69 options .............310 reference ports .............. 295......................69 RIP...........................133 real server groups combining servers into .................... 187 Secure Shell ................................... 387 Server Load Balancing IDS ................

...................... 162 SFP GBIC ports ....................................... 292 health checking .......................... real server IP address ...... 296 script ...... 96 health checks .......................................................................................................................... 82 SLB layer7 statistics ........................................................ 204 shortcuts (CLI) .............................................. 288 retry .............. 287 slowage ......... 295 snap traces buffer ............... 292 SLB real server option backup ............................................................. 33 port configuration ...................................................................... 30 system time ................. SLB real server group health checks arp............. 287 name. October 2003 Index „ 401 ... 321 Session Binding Table ....... 33 VLANs . 180 SMTP server health checks ...... 296 sslh............................................................. 295 ldap ............. 295 SNMP ............................................ 137 315393-E.............. 28 stopping....................................... 294 health check types ................................................................................... 29 system date ........ 288 RIP............................................ 288 maxcon (maximum connections) ................................................... 288 intr (interval) ............................................................................. 35 IP subnet mask .................................................................................................... 292 metric ........... 34 VLAN port numbers ..................................... 337 smask source mask for filtering ................................................................................... 296 wtls ..................................... 296 smtp .......... 170 141.................... 287 submac ..................... 365 SNMP . 34 VLAN tagging ............ 287 restr (restore) SLB real server UDP option .......................................0 Command Reference server load balancing client traffic processing................ 35 port auto-negotiation mode ........................................................................................................... 191 set and get access ................................... 321 server load balancing configuration options . 321 health check ............................. 25...................... 294 metrics ............ 19............... configuration ............................................. 310 SLB Information .........................................................................................Alteon OS 21............. 31 duplex mode ................................. 32 restarting ......................................................................... 31 port flow control ............ 295 http............................................................................................................. 295 ftp .................................................................................................................................. 297 port options ................................... 288 weights .............................................................................................. 322 server traffic processing ............................................................ 27 BOOTP .... alias for each real server ........... 288 session identifier ..................... 383 SNMP health check configuration ....................................... 289 tmout (time out) .................................. 32.................. 29 Spanning-Tree Protocol ......... 296 SNMP statistics ..................................... 33 port speed .......................................................................................................... 295 imap ..................................................................................................................................................... 33 SFD statistics mp specific ................................................. 142.................................................... 311 SLB filtering option action ...... 30 VLAN name ................... 202 SIP (source IP address for filtering) ................ 82 server traffic processing ................. 300 setup configuration ........ 340 SNMP health checks ............. 281 setup facility .................................. 311 smtp ............................................... 31 starting .......................................................... 295 dns .................................................................... 295 udpdns ......................................... 284 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics Menu ................................................................................................................. 295 icmp .................................................... 191 SNMP Agent ..... 296 SLB real server group option application health checking ........................... 32...................................................... 149 server port mapping ........................................................ 295 tcp ..................................................... 296 radius ................................................................................... 32 IP configuration .......................................................... 281 setup command........................................................... 340 HP-OpenView .......................................... 50 single-mode ports ......... 296 wsp .......................................................................... 19 menu options ............................

..............................365 swkey ......... 193 l4apw (Layer 4 administrator password) ............220 bridge priority ........................................................................................................... 282 „ Index 315393-E...................141 stacking commands (CLI) .....................31 switch reset effect ................................................................35 subnets ... 309 TCP statistics ............................................ 149..........................................................218 Spanning-Tree Protocol ............................. 180 tnet..........................158 Statistics Menu ......................................................................................................................................................63 state information.............................................................64........ 196 BOOTP .........303 static IP route tag .....................240 statis route add ......................................................................................... 187 Telnet support optional setup for Telnet support ................. 363 system options admpw (administrator password) ............................... 39 terminal emulation ............ 196 login banner .................Alteon OS 21.........................................63 port cost option . 288 health checks ...............................................................69 static route rem ....................................................................................................353 software image .. 193 usrpw (user password) ................. 21 BOOTP .............................................................................. 180 time.............................................................28 state (STP information) ................................................................................ 50 TCP fragments ...................................... 180 cur (current system parameters) .. October 2003 ................................360 split horizon .. 189 date ........................................................39 software image file and version ...360 Switch Processor (SP)..... 17 TFTP .. 188......................................................... 195 system parameters......................222 root bridge ..222 port priority option ...........................221 bridge parameters .................................. 21 configuring switches using ............... 53 location (SNMP option) ...........................................................................................................................35 IP interface ................. 180 hprompt ......................353 SYN attack detection configuration ............................. 188...................................................... 191 date and time .......................................................... 180 HTTP access ..................... 125...337 402 sync ......... 193 System Maintenance Menu ............... 161 Telnet ................................................................................................... 350 synchronization VRRP switch............................162 spanning tree configuration...................356 SP specific statistics .................................. 281 telnet radius server .................................................................................63.....................0 Command Reference SNMP Support optional setup for SNMP support ........................228 switch resetting ................................................... client system..................................................... 333................................................................................................230 statistics group ......................... 20 text conventions ..................................53 license ........................................ 357 PUT and GET commands .......... current ........................ 181 system contact (SNMP option) ...........240 SSL ....50 starting switch setup ...................... 282 TFTP server .....95 stopping switch setup........................ 350 syslog system host log configuration ......................................................... 295 source and destination ports...................................................133 management processor ................................................................................................... 177 bridge aging option .................................. 189 T tab completion (CLI) ..................303 secure socket layer statistics .......230 static routes Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ...............29 subnet address maskconfiguration IP subnet address ..365 display trace buffer ...........................................................................228 subnet mask .......... 220 setup (on/off) ........................................ 300 health checking using ............ 191 system access control configuration................................................................................ 193 tnport ....................................................................................... 51........................

..................... authentication . SLB information about .......................... global SLB menu option) ............................................Alteon OS 21......... 83 user account ................. 198.. 30 system option .......... 210 transparent proxies............................. 356 URL for health checks ...... 225 setup............................... 262......................................... 206....................................................................................... 275 increasing priority level of ............... 25 timers kickoff......... 263 priority increment values (vrs) for VRRP ................................... 68 typographic conventions................................................. 135 virtual server SLB statistics ...................................................... 61 Unscheduled System Dump ........ 202...................................................................... 272 HSRP priority increment value ....................... 188 U UCB statistics ..... 241 IP route tag ...................................... 33........................................................ October 2003 Index „ 403 ............................................................................. switch software ..................... 193 TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol) ...................... 294 SLB state information ................................... 82 virtual port state............................ 272 HSRV priority increment value ................................................... 32........................................................ 263 priority tracking options ............... 48 Tracking VRRP ....................................... 288 source and destination ports ............ 336 trace buffer .......................................... 161 UDP datagrams ...... 82 virtual router description . 253........................................................................... 368 315393-E... 82 statistics ....... 310 Trunk Group Information ... 224 VLAN tagging port configuration.............................................. 269 virtual router group configuration ... 209.. 115 time-to-live................. 270 tracking criteria .... 271 configuration ................. 270 master preemption (prio) ........................... 133 virtual servers ............................ 195 Uuencode Flash Dump .....................0 Command Reference time setup ................ DNS response (global SLB menu option) V verbose ................................................................................... 187 timeouts idle connection ....................................... 351 password........ 271 priority........................................................................ 267 incrementing VRRP instance ....... 64 ttl (time to live... 309 UDP statistics .................... 264 virtual router group VRRP priority tracking ......................................... 274 HSRV..... 365 Switch Processor ......... 266 transmit flow control32.................. 274 virtual server global SLB statistics ....... 33 323 tnet system option ....... 200.. 264 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration 260 virtual router sharing .......... 126 unknown (UNK) port state ..................................................................................... 24 usrpw (system option) .. manual .......... 273 priority election for the virtual router ............................................................ 203........................................................................... 244 type parameters ....... when used for NAT ............. 265 master preemption (preem) .... 365 traceroute........................ 262 master mode ....................... 271 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) authentication parameters for IP interfaces .................... 193 tnport system option ............................................. 149 server status using ........................................... 33 type of area ospf.............................................................................................................. 370 upgrade............................................................ 133 VLAN active port ............................................ 69 virtual IP address (VIP) ............................. 264............................................................ 269 virtual router group priority tracking ..................................................................................... 270 operations-level options .......................... 48 vip advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes ...... 17 tzone .................... 180 timeout radius server ............................ 273 group options (prio) ................................................ 265.............................. 205..... 270 virtual routers HSRP failover ...................... 208 port restrictions ...... 323 tx flow control..................

.............. 91..........................33 Spanning-Tree Protocol ............341 WAP health check wspport ................340...............120 W WAP health checks ..............70 broadcast domains ...........218 name ............................................................ 269 VRRP interface configuration ..........35 ARP entry information ....................................340...........Alteon OS 21......................................................................................... 341 wtlsprt ..274 virtual router sharing ....263 VRRP Information .........59...........................................................59................ 202................................................................. 341 wtlsprt WAP health check .................................. 342 404 „ Index 315393-E..............................................33.............298 setting virtual router priority values ........................................................198.........................34 security ...................79 VRRP master advertisements time interval ......................................................................19 weights for SLB real servers ....................................34 port membership.340...........273 master advertisements ..................................................................191 wspport WAP health check ......224 information ... 65 name setup.. X XModem ...............218 tagging .......................147 watchdog timer .................................. October 2003 ....341 WAP SLB statistics ........... 387 207 setup ..274 write community string (SNMP option) ..........262......................................36 multiple spanning trees .............................................224 setting default number (PVID) .................................262.....................263 tracking .....................................270 VRRP statistics .............................................0 Command Reference VLANs .......... 204.......340................................65 VRID (virtual router ID) .............................. 52.. 225 VLAN Number ...... 266 tracking configuration ........................................................... 342 WAP health check configuration ................................................ 65 port numbers ............................................................................................361 web-based management interface......................................................64 interface ....................................